OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R006C01

Parts Replacement
Issue Date 02 2011-10-31

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2011. All rights reserved. No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Trademarks and Permissions
and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders.

Notice
The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and the customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within the purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information, and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representations of any kind, either express or implied. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and recommendations in this document do not constitute the warranty of any kind, express or implied.

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Address: Huawei Industrial Base Bantian, Longgang Shenzhen 518129 People's Republic of China http://www.huawei.com support@huawei.com

Website: Email:

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

i

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement

About This Document

About This Document
Related Versions
The following table lists the product versions related to this document. Product Name OptiX OSN 8800 OptiX OSN 6800 OptiX OSN 3800 iManager U2000 iManager U2000 Web LCT Version V100R006C01 V100R006C01 V100R006C01 V100R005C00 V100R005C00

Intended Audience
This document guides you how to replace parts. This document is intended for field maintenance engineers.

Symbol Conventions
The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Symbol Description

DANGER

Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk, which, if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury. Indicates a hazard with a medium or low level of risk, which if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury.

WARNING

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

ii

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement

About This Document

Symbol

Description

CAUTION
TIP

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which if not avoided, could result in equipment damage, data loss, performance degradation, or unexpected results. Indicates a tip that may help you solve a problem or save time. Provides additional information to emphasize or supplement important points of the main text.

NOTE

GUI Conventions
The GUI conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Convention Boldface > Description Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titles are in boldface. For example, click OK. Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">" signs. For example, choose File > Create > Folder.

Change History
Updates between document issues are cumulative. Therefore, the latest document issue contains all updates made in previous issues.

Updates in Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Based on Product Version V100R006C01
Update 4 Replacing the SCC Board with One of the Same PCB Version Description Section "Replacing the SCC Board" is renamed as "Replacing the SCC Board with One of the Same PCB Version". The operation of clearing the databases on the SCC board is added to 4.4 Replacing the SCC Board in a Slave Subrack. Some bugs are fixed. 5 Replacing the TN16XCH Board
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)

Some bugs are fixed.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

iii

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement

About This Document

Update 6 Replacing the SCC Board with One of a Different PCB Version 7 Replacing the Cross-Connect Board 20 Replacing the Clock Board 24 Replacing the DAS1 Board The whole manual

Description Section "Upgrading Board Version of SCC Boards" is renamed as "Replacing the SCC Board with One of a Different PCB Version". The operation of clearing the databases on the SCC board is added to 6.3 Replacing the SCC Board in a Slave Subrack. Some bugs are fixed. Some bugs are fixed.

"Impact on System" is modified. Section "Replacing the DAS1 Board" is added. The following description is added to each chapter: During board replacement, the board software takes several minutes to be synchronized. At this point, the PROG indicator on the board is blinking green quickly. The impact of board replacement on ASON services is added.

Updates in Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Based on Product Version V100R006C01
Update 4 Replacing the SCC Board with One of the Same PCB Version 10 Replacing the PID Board Description The methods of replacing the TN16SCC board are added.

Section "Replacing the PID Board" is added.

Updates in Issue 03 (2011-09-15) Based on Product Version V100R006C00
Update 5 Replacing the TN16XCH Board
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)

Description Some bugs are fixed.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

iv

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement

About This Document

Updates in Issue 02 (2011-04-15) Based on Product Version V100R006C00
The update of contents is described as follows: Some bugs in the manual are fixed.

Updates in Issue 01 (2010-12-31) Based on Product Version V100R006C00
This issue is the first official release for OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R006C00. Update 5 Replacing the TN16XCH Board 29 Replacing the EFI Board 30 Replacing the PIU Board Description Section "Replacing the TN16XCH Board" is added.

The methods of setting the DIP switch on the TN16EFI board are added. The power cable connection diagram is added for the TN16PIU board.

Updates in Issue 03 (2011-08-30) Based on Product Version V100R005C00
Update 4 Replacing the SCC Board with One of the Same PCB Version Description Section "Replacing the SCC Board" is renamed as "Replacing the SCC Board with One of the Same PCB Version". The operation of clearing the databases on the SCC board is added to 4.4 Replacing the SCC Board in a Slave Subrack. Some bugs are fixed. 6 Replacing the SCC Board with One of a Different PCB Version Section "Upgrading Board Version of SCC Boards" is renamed as "Replacing the SCC Board with One of a Different PCB Version". The operation of clearing the databases on the SCC board is added to 6.3 Replacing the SCC Board in a Slave Subrack. Some bugs are fixed.
v

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Updates in Issue 01 (2010-07-30) Based on Product Version V100R005C00 This issue is the first official release for OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R005C00. the manuals for OptiX OSN 8800 V100R002C02. vi .. Updates in Issue 02 (2011-05-25) Based on Product Version V100R005C00 Update 4. At this point. Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. The description that there is no jumper inside the TN51AUX board is added. The impact of board replacement on ASON services is added.3 Replacing the Unprotected SCC Board in a Master Subrack 6. OptiX OSN 6800A. In this release. the PROG indicator on the board is blinking green quickly. the board software takes several minutes to be synchronized. Ltd. Product differences are described in the manual. The following description is added to each chapter: During board replacement. and OptiX OSN 3800 V100R004C04 are combined into one manual. Update Whole manual Description l This manual describes product series OptiX OSN 8800.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement About This Document Update 20 Replacing the Clock Board The whole manual Description "Impact on System" is modified.2 Replacing the Unprotected SCC Board in a Master Subrack 25 Replacing the AUX Board Description The description that replacing SCC boards may interrupt ASON services for a short time is added. l The equipment name is changed from OptiX OSN 8800 I to OptiX OSN 8800 T32 or from OptiX OSN 8800 II to OptiX OSN 8800 T64. OptiX OSN 6800 V100R004C04. The description that upgrading SCC boards may interrupt ASON services for a short time is added. and OptiX OSN 3800A.

.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement About This Document Update 4 Replacing the SCC Board with One of the Same PCB Version 6 Replacing the SCC Board with One of a Different PCB Version Description Setting the Battery Jumper on the SCC is an independent section. Section "Upgrading Board Version of SCC Boards" is added. vii . Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd.

..............................................................................19 4 Replacing the SCC Board with One of the Same PCB Version............................................10 3 Tools and Instruments........................................1 Replacing the Protected SCC Board in a Master Subrack......3............................................2 Replacing the Unprotected SCC Board in a Master Subrack...................4 1......................................2...............................................................124 6.98 5 Replacing the TN16XCH Board..................................2 Laser..................................3 Replacing the SCC Board After Configuring SCC 1+1 Protection................4 ESD.......22 4............. Ltd................3 Replacing the TN16XCH Board in a Slave Subrack...............................................................................................................................................1 1...........................................................................1 Setting the Battery Jumper on the SCC.........................................................................................................................27 4.2 Replacing the Protected SCC Board in a Master Subrack..........................................................1 Replacing the SCC Board with the Database Backed Up to the NMS.......................................................86 4............................................2 Replacing the SCC Board with the Database Backed Up to a CF Card (NE Is Unreachable)........113 6 Replacing the SCC Board with One of a Different PCB Version....................8 1.....................................8 1.....................................9 2 Component Category..107 5......109 5................................117 6...124 6.............................................................................................136 6.......................7 Correct Board Inserting and Removing..............................................................................................2 Replacing the TN16XCH Board in a Master Subrack................62 4....148 Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co....116 6............................................................................6 Alarm and Safety Symbols........................2.....................3.................................................4 Replacing the SCC Board with the Database Backed Up to the NMS (NE Is Reachable)........................................108 5..........................................4 1..........1 Replacing the SCC Board with the Database Backed Up to the NMS (NE Is Unreachable)..............3 Short Circuit...........................................................OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement Contents Contents About This Document................................................4 Replacing the SCC Board in a Slave Subrack.....5 Replacing the SCC Board with the Database Backed Up to a CF Card (NE Is Reachable).........................3 Replacing the SCC Board After Configuring SCC 1+1 Protection..................................................................................................3..............3 Replacing the Unprotected SCC Board in a Master Subrack...................................................6 1..........................................................................................................72 4..............................2 Replacing the SCC Board with the Database Backed Up to a CF Card..................................3..............................51 4..........5 Working on Equipment with Power Applied...........37 4...........................................3...................................................................................................................................................20 4.................38 4.......1 Specifications and Versions.....................................................................................................................................1 Setting the Battery Jumper on the TN16XCH Board............2................ viii ............................................................................6 1...ii 1 Precautions......................................................................................................

..........................202 9..................................................................................................................................................2 Under No Protection...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................179 9 Replacing the Tributary and Line Board..............................................6 Under Board-Level Protection..................................................... 240 13................185 9........................................................................................1 Under Protection...................................214 10 Replacing the PID Board........................................................................236 13 Replacing the EGSH Board..................2 Under SNCP Protection..................................................................................................................1 Under Client 1+1 Protection......................................................................247 16 Replacing the Optical Amplifier Board....................................................................................................1 Under ODUk SNCP Protection............................164 8 Replacing the Optical Transponder Board.. Ltd....................................................................................1 Under Protection...............................................................2 Under SNCP Protection..........3 Under ODUk SPRing Protection............................163 7..................................................................... 183 9............................... 162 7...................242 14 Replacing the Optical Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Board..........................................................................................................4 Under DBPS Protection...................234 12 Replacing the BPA Board.............................154 7 Replacing the Cross-Connect Board..............4 Under No Protection....................2 Under No Protection......3 Replacing the SCC Board in a Slave Subrack................................................167 8..................................................233 11......267 Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.................................................................................................198 9......7 Under No Protection.................................................................................232 11...........................OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement Contents 6.............................................................176 8.........................1 Under Client 1+1 Protection.........................................................................................................166 8.........................................................................171 8......................................................................................................244 15 Replacing the Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Board.................................5 Under DLAG Protection....................2 Under No Protection..................................................................................193 9....................................................................................................264 22 Replacing the Spectrum Analyzer Board........................................................... 262 21 Replacing the Optical Protection Board................................................................................................................................................................................................1 Under Board 1+1 Protection...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................210 9..............................................................227 11 Replacing the SDH Board...............................................................................................................................................................................................................3 Under OWSP Protection...........................................................207 9.......................219 10.........................256 19 Replacing the Optical Supervisory Channel Board.......253 18 Replacing the Variable Optical Attenuator Board.................................................................................................... ix ....218 10......241 13...............................2 Under No Protection................................................................................................................250 17 Replacing the Raman Amplifier Board..............................................................................259 20 Replacing the Clock Board....................................................

..........OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement Contents 23 Replacing the Optical Power and Dispersion Equalizing Board.....290 31 Replacing the Power Switch on the DC Power Distribution Box........................................... Ltd....................300 33 Replacing the Air Filter.........................286 30 Replacing the PIU Board..........................................................................................................................................................284 29 Replacing the EFI Board........................................................275 26 Replacing the DCM.............................270 24 Replacing the DAS1 Board.........................................272 25 Replacing the AUX Board........................................................305 Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.............................................................................................................................................. x .........................................................................................................................................................................................281 28 Replacing the EFI Frame..................................................................279 27 Replacing the Pluggable Optical Module...............................................................................................................................................296 32 Replacing the Fan Tray Assembly..............................302 34 Replacing SDI Components..............................................................

Precautions l Make sure that the optical transmission distance and interface rate of the board are consistent with those of the original board. Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Precautions In expansion or maintenance. Make sure the board specifications and version before and after the replacement are consistent. Table 1-1 lists precautions and the operation flow of replacing boards and components.. l Record board-related configurations. l Query related alarms and performance events by using the U2000. This section describes the operations and precautions for components replacement.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 1 Precautions 1 About This Chapter Table 1-1 Board replacement flow Procedure Before replacement Operation l Check and record the board specifications and version. l Correctly set the DIP switch and jumper. it is often necessary to add or replace boards and other components. 1 . l Prepare all required boards and operation tools. l Check whether the label of the outgoing fiber cable of the board complete and modify the label if necessary. Ltd.

4 ESD Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 1. l Store the replaced board in an ESD protection bag and attach a maintenance label to the bag. set performance monitoring parameters. The label must show the NE name and include a fault description.. follow the safety precautions described below to help prevent personal injury or equipment damage. ensure that all devices connected to the board are operating correctly. l Protect the board from damage during removal and replacement by following standard ESD procedures. check if the switching is normal. and back up the database. 1. l Insert or remove the board correctly. l For a board without the alarm reporting function. l To replace an SCC board. Before you replace a board or other hardware functional components of the optical network equipment. you must re-apply the configurations. Connect the fiber back again after the board is replaced.3 Short Circuit Exercise caution where you place metallic tools so that you do not cause a short circuit in any equipment. l For a functional board with a backup.1 Specifications and Versions When replacing a board. 1. make sure that the name and version of the new board are consistent with those of the replaced board. l Query related alarms and performance events by using the U2000. 2 . l Record the settings of the jumper and DIP switch on the board. Precautions l Remove fibers connected to the board before replacement. l Make sure that the fibers are connected correctly. Avoid looking directly into fiber optic cables to help avoid eye damage. be aware of the following information: 1.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 1 Precautions Procedure During replacement Operation l Wear an ESD wrist strap. and make sure that there is no abnormal alarm. The laser complies with IEC60825.2 Laser When you install and maintain equipment. After replacement l Check the board indicators and make sure that the board works normally. Ltd.

Ltd. follow antistatic procedures to prevent equipment damage: 1. 1.7 Correct Board Inserting and Removing Removing an in-service board can interrupt services.5 Working on Equipment with Power Applied When you perform operations on the equipment when power is applied.. Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.6 Alarm and Safety Symbols During equipment installation and maintenance. 1. 3 . Perform board hot swapping during offpeak hours. observe the precautions indicated by the alarm and safety symbols to help prevent personal injury or equipment damage.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 1 Precautions During installation and maintenance. ensure that you take the safety precautions to prevent personal injury or equipment damage.

Ltd. For details.. you can obtain the version information by querying the engineering document records 1. see the iManager U2000 Operation Guide for NG WDM NE Management. follow the safety precautions described below to help prevent personal injury or equipment damage. The laser complies with IEC60825.1 Specifications and Versions When replacing a board. see the Hardware Description. Do not look directly at the optical ports or fiber connectors during the installation and maintenance of boards or fibers. For information about the replacement compatibility between board versions. you must check whether the boards with different versions can be replaced. For details about the bar code. you cannot use the U2000 to obtain version information. NOTE When a board is faulty and unavailable. see the Hardware Description. For OTU boards.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 1 Precautions 1. Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Do not shine laser beams into the eyes of other workers. use protective caps to cover the optical interface and the fiber connector after you remove the fiber from the optical interface. The safety precautions of lasers consist of two parts: l l Personal injury Equipment damage Personal Injury DANGER Laser beams from the optical ports on boards or from the fiber connectors cause eye damage. make sure that the name and version of the new board are consistent with those of the replaced board. Wavelength information is provided in the bar code on the front panel of the board. 4 . In some cases. the wavelength of the new and replaced boards must be identical. DANGER To prevent eye damage in the case of an optical port that is in use. If the version is inconsistent. You can also obtain board versions on the U2000.2 Laser When you install and maintain equipment.

add an optical attenuator to prevent damage to the equipment because of the high power of the laser beam. Shut down the pump laser before you insert or remove fiber connectors on the Raman amplifier board to help prevent personal injury that is caused by high optical power. Add the attenuator at the receive optical port on a board that supports optical attenuators.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 1 Precautions DANGER The Raman amplifier board is very high. CAUTION When performing a hardware loopback test on optical ports using a fiber. Equipment Damage CAUTION Use protective caps to cover unused optical ports and fiber connectors so that they do not gather dust. Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd. 5 . CAUTION When you use the optical time domain reflectometer (OTDR). CAUTION Exercise caution when you remove or insert a board that is connected with fibers.. disconnect the fiber between the opposite station and the board to prevent damage to the receive optical module because of high optical power.

on the air baffle. For the Raman amplifier board with backward pump. the fiber connectors might be damaged when you insert or remove the fiber connectors. The bent radius of the fiber that is connected to the LINE interface on the Raman amplifier board must be larger than 30 mm to prevent the fiber from being burned. The single-point additional loss within 10–20 km must be smaller than 0.2 dB (G. The fibers at every joint point must be spliced.1 dB (G.4 ESD During installation and maintenance. CAUTION Ensure that screws do not fall off into the subrack or chassis.. l l l 1.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 1 Precautions CAUTION The optical power of the Raman amplifier board is very high. CAUTION Do not place tools. Ltd.4 dB (G. The single-point additional loss within 0–10 km must be smaller than 0. Otherwise. follow antistatic procedures to prevent equipment damage: l l Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Always wear an ESD wrist strap during the operation. The LSH/APC optical connectors must be used in the fiber that is connected to the LINE interface. Observe the following precautions when using the Raman amplifier board to prevent damage to the equipment. Do not add boards or nonfiber devices. Make sure that the fiber connectors are clean.652) or 0. the strong pump light enters the fiber through the input end (LINE) instead of the output end (SYS).652) or 0.655) and the single-point return loss must not be smaller than 40 dB. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Fiber connections must be complete before you enable the lasers on the Raman amplifier board. Check that the equipment is securely grounded. at the input end. such as screwdrivers.655) and the single-point return loss must not be smaller than 40 dB. The optical power of the LINE interface on the Raman amplifier board is very high.2 dB (G. 1.3 Short Circuit Exercise caution where you place metallic tools so that you do not cause a short circuit in any equipment. 6 . such as attenuators or fiber jumpers. l l l l Do not use fiber connectors within 0–20 km.

If the wrist strap validity period (usually two years) has expired. When you are following antistatic procedures.. Make sure that the wrist strap touches your skin. Insert the ESD strap connector into the ESD socket of the equipment. Ltd. replace it with a wrist strap that provides the required resistance value. Do not use non-antistatic materials such as white foams. or if the resistance value fails to meet requirements. common plastic bags. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. see the Quick Installation Guide. see Figure 1-1. 7 l l l l Issue 02 (2011-10-31) . circuits.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 1 Precautions CAUTION Wear a well-grounded ESD wrist strap whenever you touch equipment or boards. or paper bags to pack boards. Do not touch a board with your clothing. or pins with your bare hands. Do not touch chips. Keep the boards and other ESD-sensitive parts you are installing in ESD bags. Place the removed boards and components on an ESD pad or ESD material. and do not let these materials touch the boards. take the following precautions: l Check the validity and functionality of the wrist strap. Clothing generates static electricity that is not protected by the wrist strap. Wear an ESD wrist strap when operating the ports of boards because they are also ESDsensitive. For details. Figure 1-1 Wearing an ESD wrist strap NOTE Insert the connector of the ESD strap into the equipment port. Use ESD tweezers or extraction tools to replace chips. Its resistance value must be between 0. For information about how to wear an ESD wrist strap.75 mega ohm to 10 mega ohm. Wear an ESD wrist strap and place the board on an ESD pad when you replace boards or chips. Discharge the static electricity of cables and protective sleeves before you connect them to the ports.

Laser level symbol. HAZARD LEVEL 1M INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION DO NOT VIEW DIRECTLY WITH NON-ATTENUATING OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Table 1-2 Symbols on the WDM equipment Symbol Describes ESD protection symbol. EN 55022.5 Working on Equipment with Power Applied When you perform operations on the equipment when power is applied.6 Alarm and Safety Symbols During equipment installation and maintenance. ensure that you take the safety precautions to prevent personal injury or equipment damage. ESD boxes and bags) available in the equipment room for packing boards in the future. EN 55024. IEC 61000 and GR-1089CORE.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 1 Precautions l Keep packing materials (such as. Ltd. 1. 1.. Table 1-2 describes the alarm and safety symbols on the WDM equipment. CAUTION Indicates the laser level and warns that laser beams can cause injuries to eyes. You must wear an ESD wrist strap or glove to avoid damage caused by electrostatic discharge to boards. observe the precautions indicated by the alarm and safety symbols to help prevent personal injury or equipment damage. DANGER Do not install or remove power cables on equipment when power is applied. ESD complies with IEC Publication 1000. 8 . DANGER Do not install or disassemble equipment when power is applied.

components. the services may be interrupted. If a board is reinserted in the backplane. the new paths must be commissioned. l Insert the board along the slide rail of each slot. see "Replacing a Board" of the Supporting Tasks. it will be in the running state several minutes after it starts. Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 9 . connectors.. l For optical-layer ASON services. otherwise. NOTE l The time interval between power-on and power-off of a piece of equipment must be more than 10 seconds. Warns you to regularly clean the air filter. Indicates the position of the grounding point. or connection slots. Regular cleaning symbol. Fan warning symbol. l Wait at least ten seconds between board removal and board insertion. To help prevent a short circuit. If the board to be removed is a line board without protection and carries ASON services. optimize the ASON services traversing the board to other paths before removing the board. For details about how to insert or remove a board. Ltd. CAUTION l Do not use excessive force when inserting a board to avoid distorting the pins on the backplane. You are advised to optimize the ASON services to their preset restoration paths. Perform board hot swapping during offpeak hours. make sure the components do not touch each other l When holding a board.7 Correct Board Inserting and Removing Removing an in-service board can interrupt services. 1. Warns you not to touch the fan blade until the fan stops moving. never touch the circuit.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 1 Precautions Symbol Describes Grounding symbol.

optical module. Table 2-1 lists the types and replacement precautions of boards in the OptiX OSN 8800. LSXL.. see the Hardware Description. Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. LQMS. 10 . Table 2-3 lists the types and replacement precautions of boards in the OptiX OSN 3800. TMX. LQMD. and software version. the optical add and drop multiplexing board. THA The new board must match the replaced board in type. working wavelength. Ltd. Table 2-1 Board classification of the OptiX OSN 8800 Precautions for Board Replacement The new board must match the replaced board in type. and so on.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 2 Component Category 2 l l l Component OTU board Boards Component Category Boards are classified into different types. TQX. working wavelength. and software version. LEX4. NOTE For information about replacement compatibility between different versions of a board. LOM. LSX. LSQ. NOTE For information about replacement compatibility between different versions of a board. LOG. LOA Tributary board TDX. LDMD. LDMS. Table 2-2 lists the types and replacement precautions of boards in the OptiX OSN 6800. such as the optical transponder board. see the Hardware Description. LWXS. TOG. TOA. and the optical amplifier board. the optical multiplexer and demultiplexer board. optical module. LSXR. LSXLR. LEM24. LQM. TSXL. TOM. LDM. LDX.

XCM. see the Hardware Description. The new board must match the replaced board in type and software version.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 2 Component Category Component Line board Boards ND2. WSMD4. 11 . TN16SCC l For OptiX OSN 8800 T32: TN52XCH. see the Hardware Description. RDU9. and software version. TN51SCC. WSMD9 The new board must match the replaced board in type and software version. Cross-connect unit and system and communication unit AUX l For OptiX OSN 8800 T16: TN16XCH. see the Hardware Description. NPO2. NS2. WSM9. NQ2 Precautions for Board Replacement The new board must match the replaced board in type. Ltd. WSD9. NS3. NOTE For information about replacement compatibility between different versions of a board. D40V. D40. SBM2 RMU9. CMR4. SFIU The new board must match the replaced board in type and software version. Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. ITL. NOTE For information about replacement compatibility between different versions of a board. PID unit ENQ2. SXM. MR8V. SXH. MR2. DMR1. ROAM. TNK2SCC Optical multiplexer and demultiplexer board M40. optical module. The new board must match the replaced board in type and software version. MR8. see the Hardware Description.. NOTE For information about replacement compatibility between different versions of a board. WSMD2. NPO2E The new board must match the replaced board in type and software version. working wavelength. FIU. MR4. TN52SCC l For OptiX OSN 8800 T64: XCT. NOTE For information about replacement compatibility between different versions of a board. M40V. Optical add and drop multiplexer (OADM) board Reconfigurable OADM board CMR2.

. NOTE For information about replacement compatibility between different versions of a board. NOTE For information about replacement compatibility between different versions of a board. OBU2. NOTE For information about replacement compatibility between different versions of a board. OLP. OPM8 VA1. 12 .OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 2 Component Category Component Optical amplifier board Boards CRPC. OAU1. The new board must match the replaced board in type and software version. The new board must match the replaced board in type and software version. see the Hardware Description. Ltd. MCA8. Clock unit STG The new board must match the replaced board in type and software version. VA4 The new board must match the replaced board in type and software version. HSC1. Spectrum analyzer board MCA4. OBU1. Variable optical attenuator board Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. SCS The new board must match the replaced board in type and software version. SC2. ST2 Optical protection board DCP. see the Hardware Description. Optical supervisory channel board SC1. see the Hardware Description. see the Hardware Description. NOTE For information about replacement compatibility between different versions of a board. WMU. HBA. DAS1 Precautions for Board Replacement Check the input optical power of the amplifier against excessive optical power that damages optical components of the new board.

SF64A. SLD64. LWXD. TQX. Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. LWX2. LWXS.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 2 Component Category Component Optical power and dispersion equalizing board OCS system unit Boards DCU. SF64. optical module. LSQ. EFI1. TSXL. TOG The new board must match the replaced board in type. STI. LSX. LEM24. TDG. SFD64. SLQ16. see the Hardware Description. LQM. LOA Precautions for Board Replacement The new board must match the replaced board in type. EFI2. LDMD. ROP ROPA subsystem unit Interface area unit PIU. The new board must match the replaced board in type and software version. see the Hardware Description. BPA. Tributary board TBE. TQS. and software version. LQG. LSXLR. NOTE For information about replacement compatibility between different versions of a board. LDGD.. TOM. . SL64. The new board must match the replaced board in type and software version. LDX. 13 . and software version. LSXR. SLQ64 GFU. EFI. SLO16. ATE FAN Fan tray assembly Table 2-2 Board classification of the OptiX OSN 6800 Component OTU board Boards ECOM. LDM. L4G. LDMS. TMX. optical module. SLH41. LSXL. LOG. LOM. LQMS. LDGS. DCU. NOTE For information about replacement compatibility between different versions of a board. Ltd. The new board must match the replaced board in type and software version. The new board must match the replaced board in type and software version. TQM. working wavelength. EGSH. LEX4. TDX. LQMD. EAS2. RGU. TDC Precautions for Board Replacement The new board must match the replaced board in type and software version. working wavelength.

ITL. see the Hardware Description. The new board must match the replaced board in type and software version. and software version. SFIU The new board must match the replaced board in type and software version. MR8. working wavelength.. Cross-connect unit and system and communication unit Optical multiplexer and demultiplexer board M40. MR4. ELQX. SBM2 RMU9. NS3. WSMD4. 14 . optical module. AUX The new board must match the replaced board in type and software version. MR8V. NOTE For information about replacement compatibility between different versions of a board. DMR1. and software version. M40V. RDU9. NOTE For information about replacement compatibility between different versions of a board. CMR4. ROAM. FIU. WSD9. optical module. NS2. WSM9. PTQX XCS. D40. PID unit BMD4. Ltd. see the Hardware Description. WSMD2.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 2 Component Category Component Line board Boards ND2. BMD8. The new board must match the replaced board in type. MR2. see the Hardware Description. NOTE For information about replacement compatibility between different versions of a board. SCC. Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. D40V. Optical add and drop multiplexer (OADM) board Reconfigurable OADM board CMR2. working wavelength. NQ2 Precautions for Board Replacement The new board must match the replaced board in type. NOTE For information about replacement compatibility between different versions of a board. WSMD9 The new board must match the replaced board in type and software version. see the Hardware Description.

OBU1. DAS1. see the Hardware Description.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 2 Component Category Component Optical amplifier board Boards CRPC. The new board must match the replaced board in type and software version. see the Hardware Description. The new board must match the replaced board in type and software version. NOTE For information about replacement compatibility between different versions of a board. WMU. 15 . OLP. OAU1. NOTE For information about replacement compatibility between different versions of a board. Spectrum analyzer board MCA4. VA4 The new board must match the replaced board in type and software version. Ltd. OBU1P1 Precautions for Board Replacement Check the input optical power of the amplifier against excessive optical power that damages optical components of the new board. Clock board STG The new board must match the replaced board in type and software version.. HSC1. see the Hardware Description. see the Hardware Description. Variable optical attenuator board Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. SCS The new board must match the replaced board in type and software version. OBU2. OPM8 VA1. NOTE For information about replacement compatibility between different versions of a board. Optical supervisory channel board SC1. HBA. MCA8. SC2. NOTE For information about replacement compatibility between different versions of a board. ST2 Optical protection board DCP.

TQM. LOA Precautions for Board Replacement The new board must match the replaced board in type. The new board must match the replaced board in type and software version.. LDGD. optical module. LQMS. LOM. The new board must match the replaced board in type and software version. ROP Interface area unit PIU. working wavelength. RGU. LOG. NOTE For information about replacement compatibility between different versions of a board. The new board must match the replaced board in type and software version. optical module. LWXS. TMX. TDC Precautions for Board Replacement The new board must match the replaced board in type and software version. LQG. and software version. LWXD. LDMD. LQMD.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 2 Component Category Component Optical power and dispersion equalizing board ROPA subsystem unit Boards DCU. Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. TDX. LDGS. and software version. LQM. LDM. Ltd. LSX. LSXR. see the Hardware Description. NOTE For information about replacement compatibility between different versions of a board. TDG. LWX2. Tributary board TBE. TOG The new board must match the replaced board in type. see the Hardware Description. 16 . EFI1 Fan tray assembly FAN Table 2-3 Board classification of the OptiX OSN 3800 Component OTU board Boards ECOM. TQS. GFU. LDX. L4G. working wavelength. TOM. LDMS.

System control.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 2 Component Category Component Line board Boards NS2 Precautions for Board Replacement The new board must match the replaced board in type. FIU The new board must match the replaced board in type and software version. NOTE For information about replacement compatibility between different versions of a board. AUX The new board must match the replaced board in type and software version. DAS1 The new board must match the replaced board in type and software version. CMR4. NOTE For information about replacement compatibility between different versions of a board. OBU2. see the Hardware Description. Ltd. Optical add and drop multiplexer (OADM) board Optical amplifier board CMR1. NOTE For information about replacement compatibility between different versions of a board. MR4. and software version. Optical multiplexer and demultiplexer board DFIU. see the Hardware Description. NOTE For information about replacement compatibility between different versions of a board. OBU1.. Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. CMR2. DMR1. MR2. optical module. Check the input optical power of the amplifier against excessive optical power that damages optical components of the new board. SBM2 OAU1. working wavelength. see the Hardware Description. supervision and communication board SCC. 17 . see the Hardware Description.

see the Hardware Description. APIU Fan tray assembly FAN Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd. HSC1. OPM8 The new board must match the replaced board in type and software version. OLP. see the Hardware Description. The new board must match the replaced board in type and software version. 18 . The new board must match the replaced board in type and software version. SC2. Spectrum analyzer board MCA4. Optical protection board DCP. The new board must match the replaced board in type and software version.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 2 Component Category Component Optical supervisory channel board Boards SC1. Variable optical attenuator board VA1. see the Hardware Description. MCA8. VA4 Optical power and dispersion equalizing board Interface area unit DCU The new board must match the replaced board in type and software version.. SCS The new board must match the replaced board in type and software version. NOTE For information about replacement compatibility between different versions of a board. PIU.ST2 Precautions for Board Replacement The new board must match the replaced board in type and software version. NOTE For information about replacement compatibility between different versions of a board. NOTE For information about replacement compatibility between different versions of a board.

Table 3-1 lists the tools and instruments that are required in component replacement. Tools/Instruments ESD wrist strap Usage Prevents the electrostatic energy generated by the human body from damaging static-sensitive components.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 3 Tools and Instruments 3 Table 3-1 Tools/Instruments required No. 2 3 ESD bag Cross screwdriver 4 5 Multimeter U2000 6 Web LCT 7 Optical power meter Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 1 Tools and Instruments The tools and instruments described in this chapter are required when you replace components. Tests optical power. Allows you to query alarms. upload and download data. Ltd. Required to install or remove a board and subrack power cables. Contains static-sensitive components. Allows you to create an NE and modify the IP address after you replace the SCC. 19 . Tests the voltage of the PDU and the battery of the SCC. and perform switching..

Consult Huawei technical support engineers before replacing an SCC board. The valid slots for the SCC board are IU74 and IU85.. The valid slots for the SCC board are IU11 and IU28. In OptiX OSN 8800 T32. The valid slots for the SCC board are IU9 and IU10. the SCC board takes one slot in the subrack. The valid slots for the SCC board are IU8 and IU9. No manual setting of NE ID is required on the standby board. the SCC board takes one slot in the subrack. When the 1+1 protection is not provided. IU9 is the first choice. If there is 1+1 protection for the SCC board. The valid slots for the SCC board are IU17 and IU18. IU74 is the first choice. In OptiX OSN 3800. NOTE l l l l In the case of SCC 1+1 protection. IU28 is the first choice. IU17 is the default slot for the standby SCC. the data on the active SCC board is synchronized to the standby SCC board after the standby board is replaced. IU11 is the default slot for the standby SCC. the SCC board takes one slot in the subrack. l In OptiX OSN 8800 T16. If there is 1+1 protection for the SCC board. IU18 is the first choice. the SCC board takes one slot in the subrack. If there is 1+1 protection for the SCC board. Ltd. In OptiX OSN 8800 T64. IU85 is the default slot for the standby SCC. Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 20 . IU10 is the default slot for the standby SCC. NE ID must be set. IU9 is the first choice.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 4 Replacing the SCC Board with One of the Same PCB Version 4 Replacing the SCC Board with One of the Same PCB Version About This Chapter This section describes how to replace a SCC board with one of the same PCB version. IU8 is the default slot for the standby SCC. If there is 1+1 protection for the SCC board. In OptiX OSN 6800. If there is 1+1 protection for the SCC board. the SCC board takes one slot in the subrack.

Replacing the SCC board of the slave subrack. you can replace the SCC board when: l l l The SCC board of the master subrack is configured with SCC 1+1 protection. Do not directly insert a standby SCC board that is removed from an ASON NE in to the master subrack of another ASON NE so that the SCC board functions as the active SCC board of the latter NE. For OptiX OSN 3800. 4. There is no protection for the SCC board of the master subrack. 4.2 Replacing the Protected SCC Board in a Master Subrack This section describes how to replace the SCC board of the master subrack when SCC 1+1 protection is configured.1 Setting the Battery Jumper on the SCC This section describes how to set the battery jumper on the spare SCC board before replacing the SCC board. Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. The SCC can be replaced when: l l The SCC board of the master subrack is configured with SCC 1+1 protection.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 4 Replacing the SCC Board with One of the Same PCB Version CAUTION Do not remove the SCC board during batch data backup to help avoid unsynchronized data. 21 . There is no protection for the SCC board. Ltd. For OptiX OSN 8800/6800.3 Replacing the Unprotected SCC Board in a Master Subrack This section describes how to replace an SCC board in the master subrack when no protection is configured for the SCC board. Before inserting the SCC board.. 4. ensure that the node ID and OSPF IP address that are saved on the SCC board are unique on the entire ASON network.4 Replacing the SCC Board in a Slave Subrack This section describes how to replace an SCC board in a slave subrack. 4.

1 Setting the Battery Jumper on the SCC This section describes how to set the battery jumper on the spare SCC board before replacing the SCC board. TN51SCC board and TN52SCC board. Figure 4-5 and Figure 4-6 show the position of battery jumper on the board. 22 . After the board is in use. place a jumper cap over pin 2 and pin 1. Figure 4-5 and Figure 4-6 show the position of battery jumper on the board.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 4 Replacing the SCC Board with One of the Same PCB Version 4. Impact on System There are no impacts on the system. Figure 4-1. OptiX OSN 6800 supports the TN11SCC board. place a jumper cap over pin 3 and pin 2. Figure 4-7 shows the battery jumper. OptiX OSN 8800 T32 supports the TN51SCC board and TN52SCC board. Ltd. When the board is not in use. Tools. When the battery is not required. Equipment. and Materials ESD wrist strap Background Information The battery on the SCC ensures that the configuration data on the SCC is retained in case of a power failure of the SCC. OptiX OSN 8800 T64 supports the TNK2SCC board. Figure 4-2 shows the position of battery jumper on the board. Figure 4-3 shows the position of battery jumper on the board. place a jumper cap over the battery jumper to make a short circuit. When the battery is required.. Figure 4-4 shows the position of battery jumper on the board. and thus the battery supplies power normally. l l l l l OptiX OSN 8800 T16 supports the TN16SCC board. use a jumper cap to disconnect the battery jumper. Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. OptiX OSN 3800 supports the TN21SCC board and TN22SCC board.

23 .OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 4 Replacing the SCC Board with One of the Same PCB Version Figure 4-1 Position of the battery jumper on the TN11SCC CPU 01020304 CF Card BIOS Running Mode Battery jumper 1 2 3 Battery jumper Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.. Ltd.

Ltd. 24 .OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 4 Replacing the SCC Board with One of the Same PCB Version Figure 4-2 Position of the battery jumper on the TN16SCC BIOS Running Mode SW1 ON 1 234 J1 OFF Battery Jumper 321 CF Card Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co..

25 .. Ltd.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 4 Replacing the SCC Board with One of the Same PCB Version Figure 4-3 Position of the battery jumper on the TN21/TN22SCC TN21SCC BIOS Running Mode CPU J13J14 Battery jumper 3 2 1 Battery jumper TN22SCC BIOS Running Mode CPU J11 J13 Battery jumper 3 2 1 Battery jumper Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.

26 .. Ltd.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 4 Replacing the SCC Board with One of the Same PCB Version Figure 4-4 Position of the battery jumper on the TNK2SCC BIOS Running Mode 01020304 Battery Jumper 3 2 1 J9 Battery Supply J44 CPU CF Figure 4-5 Position of the battery jumper on the TN51SCC BIOS Running Mode Battery Supply 01 02 03 04 J42 J12 Battery Jumper U42 U45 J1 CPU 321 CF Card Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.

Prerequisite l l You must be an NM user with "NE and network operator" authority or higher..OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 4 Replacing the SCC Board with One of the Same PCB Version Figure 4-6 Position of the battery jumper on the TN52SCC BIOS Running Mode Battery Supply 321 Battery Jumper CPU J1 U33 U18 01 02 03 04 J11 CF Card Figure 4-7 Battery jumper positions When battery is required When battery is not required 3 2 1 4. 27 Issue 02 (2011-10-31) .2 Replacing the Protected SCC Board in a Master Subrack This section describes how to replace the SCC board of the master subrack when SCC 1+1 protection is configured. The FTP/TFTP/SFTP server is configured and the FTP/TFTP/SFTP service is started. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. see the U2000 NE Software Management. For more information. Ltd.

1 Setting the Battery Jumper on the SCC. Impact on System Replacing an SCC board configured with protection does not affect the existing services. and Materials ESD bag. 02. either 0 or 1. The settings of the four jumpers can be arranged in 16 combinations.. 28 . When the jumper is capped. representing 0 to 15 in the decimal system.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 4 Replacing the SCC Board with One of the Same PCB Version l The SCC replacement board must be the same type as the SCC board being replaced. Tools. Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. the setting corresponds to binary 1. U2000. You clear the database by configuring the BIOS running mode by using four setting jumpers on the spare SCC board. The four jumpers for setting the BIOS running mode are arranged from high order to low order and identified as 04. the setting corresponds to binary 0. 03. In the case of SCC 1+1 protection. replacing one of the SCC in the protection group does not interrupt communication between the NE where the SCC board resides and the U2000 after you switch services from one SCC board to the other SCC board. Ltd. and 01. The setting of each jumper corresponds to a binary value. When a jumper is not capped. Equipment. The default setting of the four jumpers is 0000. you must set the battery jumper on the spare SCC board with reference to 4. multimeter Background Information Before an SCC board is replaced with a spare board. You must clear the database on the spare SCC board before starting the replacement. The figure below shows the four jumpers for setting the BIOS running mode and the battery jumper on an SCC board.

29 . Ltd..OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 4 Replacing the SCC Board with One of the Same PCB Version Figure 4-8 Position of the BIOS running mode jumper on the TN11SCC CPU 01020304 CF Card BIOS Running Mode Battery jumper 1 2 3 Battery jumper Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.

30 .OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 4 Replacing the SCC Board with One of the Same PCB Version Figure 4-9 Position of the BIOS running mode jumper on the TN16SCC BIOS Running Mode SW1 ON 1 234 J1 OFF Battery Jumper 321 CF Card Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd..

.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 4 Replacing the SCC Board with One of the Same PCB Version Figure 4-10 Position of the BIOS running mode jumper on the TN21/TN22SCC TN21SCC BIOS Running Mode CPU J13J14 Battery jumper 3 2 1 Battery jumper TN22SCC BIOS Running Mode CPU J11 J13 Battery jumper 3 2 1 Battery jumper Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 31 . Ltd.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 4 Replacing the SCC Board with One of the Same PCB Version Figure 4-11 Position of the BIOS running mode jumper on the TNK2SCC BIOS Running Mode 01020304 Battery Jumper 3 2 1 J9 Battery Supply J44 CPU CF Figure 4-12 Position of the BIOS running mode jumper on the TN51SCC BIOS Running Mode Battery Supply 01 02 03 04 J42 J12 Battery Jumper U42 U45 J1 CPU 321 CF Card Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 32 . Ltd..

. Ltd. 33 .OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 4 Replacing the SCC Board with One of the Same PCB Version Figure 4-13 Position of the BIOS running mode jumper on the TN52SCC BIOS Running Mode Battery Supply 321 Battery Jumper CPU J1 U33 U18 01 02 03 04 J11 CF Card Figure 4-14 Setting the BIOS running mode to 1111 51SCC 01 04 03 02 01 02 03 04 52SCC K2SCC 01 02 03 04 Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.

the battery is not working..OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 11SCC 4 Replacing the SCC Board with One of the Same PCB Version 01 02 03 04 TN16SCC ON=1 ON OFF=0 OFF 1 2 The Lowest Site 3 4 The Highest Site TN21SCC 01 02 J13 03 04 J14 TN22SCC 01 02 03 04 J11 J13 Procedure Step 1 Select a spare SCC board as the replacement board. Then. NOTE The 1X3 battery jumper on the replacement board enables or disables the power supply from the battery. 34 . Ensure that the spare SCC board and the SCC board to be replaced have the same name and are of the same type. remove the cap of pin 1 and cap pin 3 on the jumper and use a multimeter to measure the battery voltage. Ensure that pin 1 and pin 2 of this jumper are capped. Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd. If the voltage is lower than 3 V. The selected SCC board cannot be used as a replacement board.

2.. right-click the desire NE and click NE Explorer from the shortcut menu. Select Working/Protection Switching from the shortcut menu. Optional: If the NMS Client is selected. 7. "yyyymmdd" indicates the date when the backup is created. 5.. In the Main Topology view. 4. 4. The switching is successful. Step 6 If the board to be replaced is the working board.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 4 Replacing the SCC Board with One of the Same PCB Version Step 2 Review and record the current alarms on the NE. For details about how to remove a board. see "Replacing a Board" of the Supporting Tasks. click the NE and choose Configuration > Board 1+1 Protection from the Function Tree. the NMS creates the dbf. Ltd. the selected device information is stored on the NMS server. For more information. there must be no new abnormal alarms or performances. go to Step 6. the switching is successful. right-click the desired SCC Board 1+1 Protection. Step 4 Follow the steps below to review the working state of the board to be replaced. 3. Step 5 If the board to be replaced is the active board. Step 7 Inform the onsite maintenance engineer and replace the board. NOTE By default the NMS Server is selected. In the Main Topology. The NE Explorer window is displayed. If the Active Board is not the board to be replaced. click data have to be backed up. and "hhmmss" indicates the time when the backup is created. choose Administration > NE Software Management > NE Data Backup/Restoration from the Main Menu. 1. 1. If services are normal. On the NE View tab page. Right click the device(s) that you want to backup in the NE View table. Click OK in the window displayed. In Board 1+1 Protection. Select the option NMS Server or NMS Client to backup the selected device information. Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Query the alarms and performance events on the U2000.pkg file in the NEName/ yyyymmddhhmmss directory. 35 . When the backup operation is successful. 2. to select the location where the device Click Start to start the backup operation for the selected device(s). refer to "Querying the Current Alarms" of the Supporting Tasks. "NEName" indicates the name of the NE. NOTE The Backup Information tab is unavailable when multiple devices are selected. Step 3 Back up the NE database to the NMS server. Check if services are normal. Click Query. 2. Click Query. follow the steps below to perform an active/ standby switching on the U2000. go to Step 7. Choose Configuration > Board 1+1 Protection from the Function Tree. 5. Otherwise. the backup progress is displayed. Select Backup. 3. to open the Backup dialog. In the NE Explorer.. This is to record the NE database when the SCC board is replaced for future reference. If the NMS Server is selected. 6. 1.

see "Indicators" in the Hardware Description. right-click SCC Board 1+1 Protection. If the indicator is not steady green. Step 12 Check and set the other parameters on the U2000 to ensure that the parameter values of the new board are the same as the original data. 3. 5. Check the NE alarm attribute data against the original data. the system automatically synchronizes the data between the existing SCC board and the new SCC board. The NE Explorer window is displayed. and then insert the SCC board to the slot housing the original SCC board. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. remove the board. Step 11 Optional: Follow the steps below to switch the active/standby state of the SCCs back to the original state. Insert the spare SCC board in the slot housing the original SCC board. Perform a switching test.. Record the current alarms of the NE. The data include saving mode. 36 . you can perform the preceding step to initiate active/standby switching. reversion mode and delayed report. Check the software information of the new SCC against the original data. Issue 02 (2011-10-31) In the Main Topology view. Click the Basic Setting and Alarm Source tabs in turn on the Filter dialog box to set the filter conditions for the current alarms. NOTE After you start the new SCC board. Step 13 Querying the current alarms of the NE by using the U2000. Set the BIOS running mode of the spare SCC board to 1111 to clear the database in the flash memory. Choose Configuration > Board 1+1 Protection from the Function Tree. Synchronize the NE time with the NMS server time. Ensure that the STAT indicator is steady green. Step 10 View the indicators on the front panel of the new board. Figure 4-14 shows the settings of the four jumpers on the SCC board. 3. Remove the jumper caps which you set in Step 8. It takes approximately 90 minutes for a new board to work normally after insertion. NOTE After you set the jumpers and install the new SCC board in the slot. Click OK in the window displayed. For details about the indicators. Step 9 After the database of the SCC board is cleared completely. 2. Check whether the switching state is correct. Check the alarm suppression setting data against the original data. 1. you need to reinsert the board or select a new replacement board. In this manner. Ltd. NOTE For details to set these parameters. 1. 2. right-click the desire NE and click NE Explorer from the shortcut menu. 2. Select Restore Working/Protection from the shortcut menu. After data backup completes. In Board 1+1 Protection. 1. 4. wait 15 minutes to allow the database to be cleared. 6. In the Main Topology. 1. see iManager U2000 Operator Guide for NG WDM NE Management.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 4 Replacing the SCC Board with One of the Same PCB Version Step 8 Set the four jumpers on the spare SCC board to set the BIOS running mode. 3. Click OK. 2. Enable the NE performance monitoring. the database on the new SCC board is cleared. 4. Reinsert this SCC board to the slot. choose Fault > Browse Current Alarm from the Main Menu.

configure the system to provide 1+1 SCC protection. If a slot is available for another SCC. The NE is not reachable on the U2000. and the alarm parameter is 0x5 0xff 0xff 0xff 0xff. Table 4-1 Modes of replacing the SCC of the master subrack without protection Scenario The NE is reachable on the U2000. The current database of the NE cannot be backed up. check whether the jumper cap is correctly placed over the battery jumper. restore the database to the NE. 37 .OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement NOTE 4 Replacing the SCC Board with One of the Same PCB Version You can select the desired alarms and right-click to choose Save > Save Selected Records. If yes. If the voltage is lower than 3 V. or rightclick to choose Save > Save All Records from the shortcut menu to save the current alarms of the NE. ensure that the monitoring of the POWER_FAIL alarm is enabled. The board must be replaced. Ltd. No backup database is stored on the U2000. Mode Backing up the NE database to the U2000. The first mode is recommended. use a multimeter to measure the battery voltage. the NE can only read the database on the U2000 or the database on the CF card saved during the last backup. ----End 4. The battery is fixed on the board and cannot be replaced. After the SCC is replaced. Backing up the NE database to a CF board Remarks The database of the NE must be backed up. CAUTION The standard voltage of the battery is 3.3 Replacing the Unprotected SCC Board in a Master Subrack This section describes how to replace an SCC board in the master subrack when no protection is configured for the SCC board. A backup database is stored on the U2000. NOTE After replacing the SCC is replaced. After replacing the SCC. the battery of the SCC board is abnormal. If the POWER_FAIL alarm occurs. the battery is out of work. Backing up the NE database to the U2000 Backing up the NE database to a CF board Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.6 V..

3. When a jumper is not capped. see U2000 NE Software Management. 03. The settings of the four jumpers can be arranged in 16 combinations. The default setting of the four jumpers is 0000. U2000. Tools. The four jumpers for setting the BIOS running mode are arranged from high order to low order and identified as 04. 38 . When the jumper is capped. You must clear the database on the spare SCC board before the replacement. and Materials ESD bag. set the battery jumper on the spare SCC board with reference to 4. but ASON services may be affected for a short time when configurations are restored by downloading the database. the setting corresponds to binary 1. either 0 or 1. The SCC replacement board must be the same type as the SCC board being replaced.1 Replacing the SCC Board with the Database Backed Up to the NMS (NE Is Unreachable) If the NE is unreachable because of a SCC damage.1 Setting the Battery Jumper on the SCC. representing 0 to 15 in the decimal system. Impact on System Replacing the SCC board does not affect traditional services. Prerequisite l l l You must be an NM user with "NE and network operator" authority or higher. the setting corresponds to binary 0. multimeter. you can restore the NE database from the NMS after replacing the SCC board.. Mode Manually reconfigure NE parameters as required Remarks 4. The setting of each of the four jumpers corresponds to a binary value. and 01. Ltd. Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Equipment. For more information. and the CF board has failed. The FTP/TFTP/SFTP server is configured and the FTP/TFTP/SFTP service is started.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 4 Replacing the SCC Board with One of the Same PCB Version Scenario No backup database is stored on the U2000. The figure below shows the four jumpers for setting the BIOS running mode together with the battery jumper on an SCC board. 02. This can be achieved by setting the BIOS running mode by using four jumpers on the spare SCC board. Web LCT Background Information Before replacing an SCC board with a spare SCC board.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 4 Replacing the SCC Board with One of the Same PCB Version Figure 4-15 Position of the BIOS running mode jumper on the TN11SCC CPU 01020304 CF Card BIOS Running Mode Battery jumper 1 2 3 Battery jumper Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 39 .. Ltd.

40 . Ltd.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 4 Replacing the SCC Board with One of the Same PCB Version Figure 4-16 Position of the BIOS running mode jumper on the TN16SCC BIOS Running Mode SW1 ON 1 234 J1 OFF Battery Jumper 321 CF Card Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co..

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 4 Replacing the SCC Board with One of the Same PCB Version Figure 4-17 Position of the BIOS running mode jumper on the TN21/TN22SCC TN21SCC BIOS Running Mode CPU J13J14 Battery jumper 3 2 1 Battery jumper TN22SCC BIOS Running Mode CPU J11 J13 Battery jumper 3 2 1 Battery jumper Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 41 .. Ltd.

42 .. Ltd.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 4 Replacing the SCC Board with One of the Same PCB Version Figure 4-18 Position of the BIOS running mode jumper on the TNK2SCC BIOS Running Mode 01020304 Battery Jumper 3 2 1 J9 Battery Supply J44 CPU CF Figure 4-19 Position of the BIOS running mode jumper on the TN51SCC BIOS Running Mode Battery Supply 01 02 03 04 J42 J12 Battery Jumper U42 U45 J1 CPU 321 CF Card Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.

Ltd.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 4 Replacing the SCC Board with One of the Same PCB Version Figure 4-20 Position of the BIOS running mode jumper on the TN52SCC BIOS Running Mode Battery Supply 321 Battery Jumper CPU J1 U33 U18 01 02 03 04 J11 CF Card Figure 4-21 Setting the BIOS running mode to 1011 51SCC 01 04 03 02 01 K2SCC 01 02 03 04 52SCC 02 03 04 11SCC 01 02 03 04 Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.. 43 .

. 44 . Ltd.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 16SCC ON=1 ON 4 Replacing the SCC Board with One of the Same PCB Version OFF=0 OFF 1 2 The Lowest Site 3 4 The Highest Site TN21SCC 01 02 J13 TN22SCC 01 02 03 04 J11 03 04 J14 J13 Figure 4-22 Setting the BIOS running mode to 1010 51SCC 01 04 03 02 01 K2SCC 01 02 03 04 52SCC 02 03 04 Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.

the NE database and ASON service cannot be restored. Ltd. Operations on the U2000 must be performed in the network management center. the Node ID of the NE must be set according to the original data after the SCC is replaced. Otherwise. Operations on the Web LCT must be performed on site.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 11SCC 4 Replacing the SCC Board with One of the Same PCB Version 01 02 03 04 16SCC ON=1 ON OFF=0 OFF 1 2 The Lowest Site 3 4 The Highest Site TN21SCC 01 02 J13 TN22SCC 01 02 03 04 J11 03 04 J14 J13 Precautions CAUTION l If the NE where the SCC to be replaced resides is an ASON NE. l l Procedure Step 1 Select a spare SCC board. Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ensure that the spare SCC board and the SCC board to be replaced have the same name and are of the same type.. 45 .

Set the IP address of the Web LCT to ensure that Web LCT is in the same IP subnet segment as the NE IP address. Step 3 Set the jumpers on the spare SCC board. see Figure 4-22. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. the PROG indicator on the SCC board is constantly green. Step 5 After the new SCC board starts. Remove the spare SCC board and then set its BIOS running mode to 1010 to clear the system parameter area. and the initial password admin.. the database on the new SCC board is cleared. Figure 4-21 shows the settings of the four jumpers on the SCC board. If the IP address of the Web LCT and the NE IP address are in different network segments. 46 .9. The selected SCC board cannot be used as a replacement. 6. For details about how to remove a board. which indicates that the database is cleared completely.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement NOTE 4 Replacing the SCC Board with One of the Same PCB Version The 1X3 jumper on the replacement board enables or disables the power supply from the battery. 2. 2. NOTE 2. Modify the NE attribute to restore the communication between the NE and the U2000. That is. 1. The new board is initiated at factory. Disconnect the cables from the NM_ETH1 and NM_ETH2 ports (if connected). Set Domain Type to GNE IP Domain or GNE IP Address. Set the BIOS running mode of the spare SCC board to 1011 to clear the database in the flash memory. Step 6 Create the NE by using the Web LCT. which indicates that the database is being cleared. and the New Domain dialog box is displayed. Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Click Cancel to exit the Manage Domain Search dialog box. 4. 3. see "Replacing a Board" of the Supporting Tasks. remove the cap of pin 1 and cap pin 3 on the jumper and use a multimeter to measure the battery voltage. After you install the board. Log in to the Web LCT with the user name admin. Wait for a few minutes until the PROG indicator blinks green. 5. reinsert the new SCC board to the slot. and enter an IP address in the Domain Address field. Connect the Web LCT to NM_ETH1. NOTE You can repeat step 3 through 5 to add multiple search domains. Then. For the settings of the four jumpers on the SCC board. Click NE Search > Advanced Search in the NE List. Click Add. 4. Ltd. NOTE After the four jumpers are set and the SCC board is inserted in the slot. Insert the spare SCC board in the slot housing the original SCC board. Insert the spare SCC board into the slot housing the original SCC board. Remove the jumper caps which are shown in Step 3. 1. 1. remove the board. connect the Web LCT to the NE.*.*. 3. Wait for a few minutes until the PROG indicator is green and slowly flashes. Step 2 Inform the onsite maintenance engineer and remove the board. Step 4 After the database of the SCC board is cleared completely. After that. and the default IP subnet segment of the board is 129. Click OK. The Search NE dialog box is displayed. After that. Click Manage Domain. The Manage Domain Search dialog box is displayed. disconnect the NE from the computer where the U2000 (hereinafter the computer is referred to as U2000) is installed. If the voltage is lower than 3 V. Ensure that pin 1 and pin 2 of each jumper are capped. the battery is not working. 3. reinsert this SCC board to the slot. the Web LCT cannot be connected to the NE.

. 1. Click Close after the Result dialog box is displayed. Are you sure to send it? ". select Communication > Communication Parameters from Function Tree. NOTE l The NE search function searches out only the NEs in the specified network segment. you do not need to enter the use name and password and the system automatically uses the user name and password for login last time. Step 7 Modify the NE IP based on the original information by using the Web LCT. Step 9 Modify the subnet mask based on the original information by using the Web LCT. 3. 9. select an NE from the list and click Add NE. If you select the Use same user name and password to login check box. you can log in to multiple NEs at a time by entering the user name and password only in the first line. In the NE Explorer. TIP You can select multiple NEs at a time by concurrently pressing Shift. Click OK after the Warning dialogue box pops up that prompts "Incorrect operations will interrupt the communication between NEs. In the NE Explorer. 8. and click Apply. Enter the IP Address. When this occurs. 3. Select the NE that you want to log in and click NE Login in the lower right corner or rightclick the NE and choose NE Login. 47 Issue 02 (2011-10-31) . 2. Click OK. Are you sure to send it? ". A prompt message is displayed. 1. and click Apply. l When the search is in progress. Ltd. indicating that the NE is successfully added. Click OK after the Warning dialogue box pops up that prompts "The NE communication parameters have been changed. and then click OK. If you select the Use the user name and password that was used last time check box. NOTE If the NE IP addresses before and after the modification are in different network segments. 4. 2. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 1. Step 8 Modify the gateway IP based on the original information by using the Web LCT. 3. and click Apply. Are you sure to continue? ". In the NE Explorer. Click OK after the Warning dialogue box pops up that prompts "Incorrect operations will interrupt the communication between NEs. In the NE Login dialog box that is displayed. Select Communication > Communication Parameters from Function Tree. set the IP address of the Web LCT in the same network segment as the NE IP address.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 4 Replacing the SCC Board with One of the Same PCB Version 7. the Web LCT cannot be connected to the NE. 2. After the search is complete. Click OK after the warning dialog box about communication interruption between NEs pops up. Click OK after the warning dialog box pops up. Click OK after the Warning dialogue box pops up that prompts "The NE communication parameters have been changed. Are you sure to continue? ". Select Communication > Communication Parameters from Function Tree. you can click End Search. 4. 4. Enter the Subnet Mask. Enter the Gateway IP Address. 5. enter lct and password in the User Name and Password fields. Select appropriate network segment IP addresses within the Domain and click Search.

1. you can use the original user name and password to access the NE by using the U2000. The password is a string of 6-16 characters. 7. 2. In the NE Explorer. and then click OK. In the NE Explorer. In the Modify NE ID dialog box that is displayed. 4. Remove the network cable which connected the NM_ETH1 port to the Web LCT. 3. 3. click Yes. 2. Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. After you confirm the operation twice. a prompt appears telling you that the operation was successful. 3. 3. In the NE Explorer. Connect the network cable removed in the Step 5. NOTE You can also choose Configuration > WDM ASON > ASON Topology Management from the main menu and set the NE node ID. Enter the password in the New Password field and enter it again in the Confirm Password field. A dialog box indicating that the operation is successful is displayed. Click Query. Ltd. NOTE You also need to set the Whether the password is allowed to be modified immediately parameter. click Close to complete changing the NE ID. 1. and must contain at least one letter and one numeral. Click Create and the Add NE User dialog box is displayed. Step 11 Check the NE communication parameters by using the Web LCT. Click OK. NOTE After this procedure. choose Configuration > NE Attribute from the Function Tree. symbols and numerals. 2. Step 12 Create an NE's user by using the Web LCT. select the NE and choose Security > NE User Management from the Function Tree. 48 . 4. Click Close. the NE is unreachable. Check that all NE communication parameters should be the same with the original ones. enter values in the New ID and New Extended ID fields. Click Query to view the current node ID of the NE. 2.. 5. It can consist of letters.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 4 Replacing the SCC Board with One of the Same PCB Version Step 10 Modify the NE ID and extended ID based on the original information by using the Web LCT. At this time. and click the NE Explorer. Select the NE you just created. 1. Enter the NE user name in the NE User field. Double-click the Node ID field to enter a node ID for the NE. and the Operation Result dialog box is displayed. Click Apply. modify the node ID of the NE by using the Web LCT. A warning dialog box is displayed. Select Communication > Communication Parameters from Function Tree. 1. Select the User Level as needed. 1. All created users of the NE are displayed in NE User Management Table. 2. select an NE and choose ASON > ASON Feature Management from the Function Tree. Step 14 Recover the network connection of the NE. 6. Click Modify NE ID. Click the Node ID Management tab. Step 13 If the NE is an ASON NE.

. Select NMS Server or NMS Client to recover the backup file for the selected device(s). 4. see the Upgrade Guide. If the backup file is not listed in the File Name drop-down list. In the Operation Confirmation dialog. 1. go to Step 16. 8. If the backup file is not listed in the File Name drop-down list. 7. Ltd. The selected backup file path is displayed in the File To Be Recovered field. Ensure that the software version of the spare SCC board is consistent with that of the SCC board to be replaced. Select the NE where the SCC that has been replaced resides in the NE View table. to select the backup file from the l If NMS Client is selected. 3. select the file to be recovered. 1. NOTE 5. choose Administration > NE Software Management > NE Data Backup/Restoration from the Main Menu. Click Start. otherwise go to Step 17. a pop-up menu is displayed. In the Main Topology view. Step 16 Upgrade or downgrade the software of the spare SCC board. In the File Name drop-down list. to open the Recover dialog. as shown below. to select the backup file in the Select File dialog box. you need to click NMS Client. and the Activate Database dialog box is displayed. 2.. l If NMS Server is selected. 6. CAUTION During the process from backing up databases to restoring databases... Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.. click Browse. By default NMS Server is selected. select the file to be recovered. do not modify the NE configurations to avoid database inconsistency. NOTE You must activate the NE database within five minutes after restoring it. 3.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 4 Replacing the SCC Board with One of the Same PCB Version Step 15 If the software version of the spare SCC board is different from the software version of the SCC board to be replaced. The selected backup file path is displayed in the File To Be Recovered field. 49 . Select Recover.. Select Activate Database. Right-click the NE.. Issue 02 (2011-10-31) In the Main Topology view. choose Administration > NE Software Management > NE Data Backup/Restoration from the Main Menu. click Yes to start the recover operation. 2. and turn to 17. For details.6. Click OK.. Step 18 Activate the NE database. The recover operation status is displayed in the NE View table. 4. Step 17 Restore the NE database from the NMS server. The selected backup file path from the NMS Server or NMS Client is displayed in the File Name dropdown list. Right click the device(s) that you want to recover in the NE View table. you need to select the appropriate backup file from the NMS server. the Operation Confirmation dialog box is displayed.

NOTE The operation on the U2000 may bring a service interruption. The progress of the database activation is displayed on the NE View tab. If yes. 3. use a multimeter to measure the battery voltage.. or rightclick to choose Save > Save All Records from the shortcut menu to save the current alarms of the NE. If the POWER_FAIL alarm occurs. 3. 4. and then this icon is changed to . ensure that the monitoring of the POWER_FAIL alarm is enabled. The battery is fixed on the board and cannot be replaced. Click Start to start the database activation process. the battery of the SCC board is abnormal. The data include saving mode. 2. Check the NE alarm attribute data against the original data. The board must be replaced. Ltd. Click OK. 4.6 V. Configure the OSPF IP address of the NE if the site complies with the models for separated optical and electrical NEs and the NE is on an optical-layer ASON network. the battery is out of work. Step 19 Check and set the other parameters on the U2000 to ensure that the parameter values of the new board are the same as the original data. and the alarm parameter is 0x5 0xff 0xff 0xff 0xff. Synchronize the NE time with the NMS server time. Optional: Click the icon in Deliver To Board Activate. Record the current alarms of the NE. 1. reversion mode and delayed report. see iManager U2000 Operator Guide for NG WDM NE Management. choose Fault > Browse Current Alarm from the Main Menu. NOTE You can select the desired alarms and right-click to choose Save > Save Selected Records. Click the Basic Setting and Alarm Source tabs in turn on the Filter dialog box to set the filter conditions for the current alarms. In the Main Topology view. Step 20 Querying the current alarms of the NE by using the U2000. Check the alarm suppression setting data against the original data. check whether the jumper cap is correctly placed over the battery jumper. ----End Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 5. CAUTION The standard voltage of the battery is 3. If the voltage is lower than 3 V.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 4 Replacing the SCC Board with One of the Same PCB Version 5. 2. NOTE For details to set these parameters. Enable the NE performance monitoring. NOTE After replacing the SCC is replaced. 6. 50 . Check the software information of the new SCC against the original data. 1.

but ASON services may be affected for a short time when configurations are restored by downloading the database. The setting of each of the four jumpers corresponds to a binary value. When a jumper is not capped. and Materials ESD bag. Ltd.. the setting corresponds to binary 1. Web LCT Background Information Before replacing an SCC board with a spare SCC board. either 0 or 1. Impact on System Replacing the SCC board does not affect traditional services. The default setting of the four jumpers is 0000. 03. and 01. The figure below shows the four jumpers for setting the BIOS running mode and the battery jumper on an SCC board. 51 . restore the NE database from the CF card after replacing the SCC board if there is no backup data on the NMS. The four jumpers for setting the BIOS running mode are arranged from high order to low order and identified as 04. The settings of the four jumpers can be arranged in 16 combinations. Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. You must clear the database on the spare SCC board before replacing the replacement board.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 4 Replacing the SCC Board with One of the Same PCB Version 4. set the battery jumper on the spare SCC board with reference to 4. representing 0 to 15 in the decimal system. When a jumper is capped. multimeter. The SCC replacement board must be the same type as the SCC board being replaced.1 Setting the Battery Jumper on the SCC. 02. the setting corresponds to binary 0. Tools. Equipment. Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE and network operator" authority or higher.2 Replacing the SCC Board with the Database Backed Up to a CF Card (NE Is Unreachable) When the NE is unreachable resulting from a damage of the SCC board.3. You can clear the database by setting the BIOS running mode by using four jumpers on the replacement SCC board. U2000.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 4 Replacing the SCC Board with One of the Same PCB Version Figure 4-23 Position of the BIOS running mode jumper on the TN11SCC CPU 01020304 CF Card BIOS Running Mode Battery jumper 1 2 3 Battery jumper Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 52 .. Ltd.

.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 4 Replacing the SCC Board with One of the Same PCB Version Figure 4-24 Position of the BIOS running mode jumper on the TN16SCC BIOS Running Mode SW1 ON 1 234 J1 OFF Battery Jumper 321 CF Card Figure 4-25 Position of the BIOS running mode jumper on the TNK2SCC BIOS Running Mode 01020304 Battery Jumper 3 2 1 J9 Battery Supply J44 CPU CF Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 53 . Ltd.

54 . Ltd..OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 4 Replacing the SCC Board with One of the Same PCB Version Figure 4-26 Position of the BIOS running mode jumper on the TN51SCC BIOS Running Mode Battery Supply 01 02 03 04 J42 J12 Battery Jumper U42 U45 J1 CPU 321 CF Card Figure 4-27 Position of the BIOS running mode jumper on the TN52SCC BIOS Running Mode Battery Supply 321 Battery Jumper CPU J1 U33 U18 01 02 03 04 J11 CF Card Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.

55 . Ltd.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 4 Replacing the SCC Board with One of the Same PCB Version Figure 4-28 Setting the BIOS running mode to 1011 51SCC 01 04 03 02 01 K2SCC 01 02 03 04 52SCC 02 03 04 11SCC 01 02 03 04 16SCC ON=1 ON OFF=0 OFF 1 2 The Lowest Site 3 4 The Highest Site Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co..

.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 4 Replacing the SCC Board with One of the Same PCB Version Figure 4-29 Setting the BIOS running mode to 1010 51SCC 01 04 03 02 01 K2SCC 01 02 03 04 52SCC 02 03 04 11SCC 01 02 03 04 16SCC ON=1 ON OFF=0 OFF 1 2 The Lowest Site 3 4 The Highest Site Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd. 56 .

Insert the spare SCC board to the slot housing the original SCC board. In this manner. Step 4 Set the four jumpers on the spare SCC board so as to set the BIOS running mode of the SCC board and then insert it to the slot housing the original SCC board. For the settings of the four jumpers on the SCC board. After that. Figure 4-28 shows the settings of the four jumpers on the SCC board.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 4 Replacing the SCC Board with One of the Same PCB Version Precautions CAUTION l If the NE where the SCC to be replaced resides is an ASON NE. the Node ID of the NE must be set according to the original data after the SCC is replaced. the battery jumper) on the board is used to enable or disable the power supply from the battery. which indicates that the database is being cleared. hold the CF card and pull the card out of the CF card slot. 2. l After the database of the NE is restored on the CF card. reinsert the new SCC board to the slot. the restoration must be completed within two hours after you install the replacement SCC is installed. NOTE Keep the CF card because it is required for NE data restoration. Make sure that pin 1 and pin 2 of each jumper are capped. l Operations on the U2000 must be performed in the network management center. the ASON service cannot be restored. Set the BIOS running mode of the spare SCC board to 1011 to clear the database in the flash memory. cap pin 2 and pin 3 on the jumper and use a multimeter to measure the battery voltage. 1. Step 3 On the SCC board that has been removed. the original database of the NE cannot be restored. Procedure Step 1 Select a spare SCC board as the replacement board. Wait for a few minutes until the PROG indicator blinks green. If the voltage is lower than 3 V. the battery is not working. 3. see Figure 4-29. the database on the new SCC board is cleared. see "Replacing a Board" of the Supporting Tasks. Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Step 2 Remove the SCC board to be replaced. NOTE The 1X3 jumper (namely. which indicates that the database is cleared completely. NOTE After the four BIOS jumpers are set and you install the SCC board in the slot. If you wait more than two hours to restore the database of the NE on the CF card.. 57 . Ltd. If the original data is overwritten. the PROG indicator on the SCC board is constantly green. The board must be replaced. Put the SCC into an ESD bag. For more information. Wait for a few minutes until the PROG indicator is green and slowly flashes. Ensure that the spare SCC board and the SCC board to be replaced have the same name and are of the same type. the data automatically saved on the NE overwrites the original data stored on the CF card. Otherwise. l Operations on the Web LCT must be performed on site. Remove the spare SCC board and then set its BIOS running mode to 1010 to clear the system parameter area. Then.

NOTE l The NE search function searches out only the NEs in the specified network segment. Click OK. Remove the jumper caps which are shown in Step 4. 9. NOTE 2. A prompt message is displayed. and enter an IP address in the Domain Address field. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Disconnect the cables from the NM_ETH1 and NM_ETH2 ports (if connected). 6. and the initial password admin. That is. Step 7 Create the NE by using the Web LCT. 7. Click OK. Click Manage Domain. In the NE Login dialog box that is displayed. you can click End Search. l When the search is in progress. Step 8 Modify the NE IP based on the original information by using the Web LCT. If you select the Use the user name and password that was used last time check box. In the NE Explorer. 58 Issue 02 (2011-10-31) . disconnect the NE from the computer where the U2000 (hereinafter the computer is referred to as U2000) is installed. 1. NOTE You can repeat step 3 through 5 to add multiple search domains. 3. and the New Domain dialog box is displayed. Log in the Web LCT with the user name admin. Modify the NE attribute to restore the communication between the NE and the U2000. reinsert this SCC board to the slot. If the IP address of the Web LCT and the NE IP address are in different network segments. Connect the Web LCT to NM_ETH1.. Select appropriate network segment IP addresses within the Domain and click Search.9. enter lct and password in the User Name and Password fields. you do not need to enter the use name and password and the system automatically uses the user name and password for login last time. Select the NE that you want to log in and click NE Login in the lower right corner or rightclick the NE and choose NE Login. 4. you can log in to multiple NEs at a time by entering the user name and password only in the first line. The new board is initiated at factory. 4. Click Cancel to exit the Manage Domain Search dialog box. Click Add. 1. The Manage Domain Search dialog box is displayed. the Web LCT cannot be connected to the NE. Step 6 After the new SCC board is started. 1. 2. TIP You can select multiple NEs at a time by concurrently pressing Shift. select an NE from the list and click Add NE. select Communication > Communication Parameters from Function Tree. Ltd. 8. and the default IP subnet segment of the board is 129. connect the Web LCT to the NE. After the search is complete. If you select the Use same user name and password to login check box. and then click OK.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 4 Replacing the SCC Board with One of the Same PCB Version Step 5 After the database of the SCC board is cleared completely. Set Domain Type to GNE IP Domain or GNE IP Address. 5. Set the IP address of the Web LCT to ensure that Web LCT is in the same IP subnet segment as the NE IP address. remove the board. indicating that the NE is successfully added. 3. Click NE Search > Advanced Search in the NE List.*. After that. The Search NE dialog box is displayed.*.

Enter the NE user name in the NE User field. 3. and click Apply. Click Create and the Add NE User dialog box is displayed. Step 11 Modify the NE ID and extended ID based on the original information by using the Web LCT. Step 13 Create an NE's user by using the Web LCT. When this occurs. Enter the Gateway IP Address. 3. Click OK after the Warning dialogue box pops up that prompts "The NE communication parameters have been changed. select the NE and choose Security > NE User Management from the Function Tree. the NE is unreachable. 5. 1. 2. 1. Are you sure to continue? ". Click OK after the Warning dialogue box pops up that prompts "Incorrect operations will interrupt the communication between NEs. Select Communication > Communication Parameters from Function Tree. Step 10 Modify the subnet mask based on the original information by using the Web LCT. In the NE Explorer. and then click OK. and click the NE Explorer. 2. Click OK after the warning dialog box pops up. Are you sure to send it? ". 59 .. 1. 3. A dialog box indicating that the operation is successful is displayed. Check that all NE communication parameters should be the same with the original ones. 4. and click Apply. 3. Step 12 Check the NE communication parameters by using the Web LCT. 3. 2. Ltd. In the Modify NE ID dialog box that is displayed. 2. Click OK after the Warning dialogue box pops up that prompts "The NE communication parameters have been changed. Select Communication > Communication Parameters from Function Tree. set the IP address of the Web LCT in the same network segment as the NE IP address. 4. Select Communication > Communication Parameters from Function Tree. NOTE If the NE IP addresses before and after the modification are in different network segments. Enter the IP Address. click Close to complete changing the NE ID. 4. the Web LCT cannot be connected to the NE. Click Close after the Result dialog box is displayed. choose Configuration > NE Attribute from the Function Tree. Click OK after the Warning dialogue box pops up that prompts "Incorrect operations will interrupt the communication between NEs.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 4 Replacing the SCC Board with One of the Same PCB Version 2. Step 9 Modify the gateway IP based on the original information by using the Web LCT. In the NE Explorer. Click OK after the warning dialog box about communication interruption between NEs pops up. 1. Click Modify NE ID. and click Apply. 1. Enter the Subnet Mask. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Are you sure to continue? ". At this time. Select the NE you just created. 4. click Yes. In the NE Explorer. Select the User Level as needed. 2. A warning dialog box is displayed. enter values in the New ID and New Extended ID fields. Issue 02 (2011-10-31) In the NE Explorer. 3. Are you sure to send it? ".

and the NE Configuration Data Management interface is displayed. 3. For details. Step 16 After the SCC board is started. Click Restore NE Database from CF Card. see the Upgrade Guide. select an NE or multiple NEs. Step 20 Restore the initial database of the NE by using the U2000. choose Configuration > NE Configuration Data Management from the Main Menu. Click Query. Double-click the Node ID field to enter a node ID for the NE.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 4 Replacing the SCC Board with One of the Same PCB Version 5.. NOTE You also need to set the Whether the password is allowed to be modified immediately parameter. 7. 1. modify the node ID of the NE by using the Web LCT. Step 19 Upgrade or downgrade the software of the spare SCC board. 4. In the Main Topology view. Then. 2. NOTE After this procedure. indicating that the restoration of the NE database may lead to service interruption. remove the SCC board inserted just now. select an NE and choose ASON > ASON Feature Management from the Function Tree. Step 15 Restore the network connection of the NE. NOTE You can also choose Configuration > WDM ASON > ASON Topology Management from the main menu and set the NE node ID. go to Step 14. a prompt appears telling you that the operation was successful. symbols and numerals. and must contain at least one letter and one numeral. All created users of the NE are displayed in NE User Management Table. select an NE and click In NE Configuration. . In the Object Tree on the left. The password is a string of 6-16 characters. It can consist of letters. Remove the network cable which connected the NM_ETH1 port to the Web LCT. Step 17 After the SCC board is started and the communication between the NE and U2000 is normal. Step 18 If the software version of the spare SCC board is different from the software version of the SCC board to be replaced. Click Close. After you confirm the operation twice. 6. 4. and the Operation Result dialog box is displayed. 1. Click Query to view the current node ID of the NE. Ensure that the software version of the spare SCC board is consistent with that of the SCC board to be replaced. otherwise go to Step 20. Insert the CF card that has been removed in Step 3 into the CF card slot on the SCC board. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. you can use the original user name and password to access the NE by using the U2000. The Confirm dialog box is displayed. Connect the network cable removed. go to Step 19. 2. Click Apply. Click the Node ID Management tab. Click OK. insert the SCC. In the NE Explorer. Issue 02 (2011-10-31) . Step 14 If the NE is an ASON NE. 3. 1. 60 2. Ltd. Enter the password in the New Password field and enter it again in the Confirm Password field.

Enable the NE performance monitoring. 3. The data include saving mode. check whether the jumper cap is correctly placed over the battery jumper. the battery of the SCC board is abnormal. If yes. Step 21 Check and set the other parameters on the U2000 to ensure that the parameter values of the new board are the same as the original data. Click the Basic Setting and Alarm Source tabs in turn on the Filter dialog box to set the filter conditions for the current alarms. Check the NE alarm attribute data against the original data. NOTE You can select the desired alarms and right-click to choose Save > Save Selected Records. In the Main Topology view. Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. CAUTION During the process from backing up databases to restoring databases. Check the software information of the new SCC against the original data.. do not modify the NE configurations to avoid database inconsistency. Record the current alarms of the NE. Synchronize the NE time with the NMS server time. reversion mode and delayed report. Click OK to start to restore the NE database. the battery is out of work. NOTE After the NE databases are restored. 1. 3. 1. If the voltage is lower than 3 V. Check the alarm suppression setting data against the original data. The board must be replaced. 4. 2. choose Fault > Browse Current Alarm from the Main Menu. use a multimeter to measure the battery voltage. 61 . see iManager U2000 Operator Guide for NG WDM NE Management. 6. or rightclick to choose Save > Save All Records from the shortcut menu to save the current alarms of the NE. NOTE For details to set these parameters. Ltd. Click OK. you need to perform warm resets on other boards. and the alarm parameter is 0x5 0xff 0xff 0xff 0xff. the NE software issues the data in the CF card to only the SCC board but not other boards. 6. 5. 2. ensure that the monitoring of the POWER_FAIL alarm is enabled. NOTE After replacing the SCC is replaced. 4. To ensure that the configurations in the SCC board and the configurations in other boards are consistent. Click Closeafter an Operation Result dialog box is displayed. If the POWER_FAIL alarm occurs.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 4 Replacing the SCC Board with One of the Same PCB Version 5. Configure the OSPF IP address of the NE if the site complies with the models for separated optical and electrical NEs and the NE is on an optical-layer ASON network. Step 22 Querying the current alarms of the NE by using the U2000.

When IU8 is not occupied by another board. For more information. it is available for another SCC to implement 1+1 protection with the SCC in IU28. When IU85 is vacant. ----End 4. the SCC is housed in IU9 by default. In this case. In this case. Ltd.. the SCC is housed in IU28 by default.3 Replacing the SCC Board After Configuring SCC 1+1 Protection When replacing an SCC board. replacing one of the SCC in the protection group does not interrupt the communication between the NE where the SCC resides and the U2000 after a switching from this SCC to the other SCC is performed. it is available for another SCC to implement 1+1 protection with the SCC in IU74. The impact caused by replacing an SCC without protection is as follows: l For the OptiX OSN 8800 T16. Prerequisite l l l You must be an NM user with "NE and network operator" authority or higher. replacing one of the SCC in the protection group does not interrupt the communication between the NE where the SCC resides and the U2000 after a switching from this SCC to the other SCC is performed. you can configure protection for the SCC board if the NE is reachable and the slot for housing the standby SCC board is not occupied by a service board. When IU17 is not occupied by another board. replacing one of the SCC in the protection group does not interrupt the Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. The FTP/TFTP/SFTP server is configured and the FTP/TFTP/SFTP service is started.6 V. see U2000 NE Software Management. When IU11 is not occupied by another board. the SCC is housed in IU74 by default. the SCC is housed in IU9 by default. Impact on System Replacing the SCC does not affect the existing services. it is available for another SCC to implement 1+1 protection with the SCC in IU18.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 4 Replacing the SCC Board with One of the Same PCB Version CAUTION The standard voltage of the battery is 3. In this case. it is available for another SCC to implement 1+1 protection with the SCC in IU9. When IU10 is not occupied by another board. In this case. For the OptiX OSN 3800. 62 l l l l Issue 02 (2011-10-31) .3. For the OptiX OSN 8800 T32. For the OptiX OSN 8800 T64. replacing one of the SCC in the protection group does not interrupt the communication between the NE where the SCC resides and the U2000 after a switching from this SCC to the other SCC is performed. For the OptiX OSN 6800. The type of the replacement SCC board is the same of the SCC board to be replaced. it is available for another SCC to implement 1+1 protection with the SCC in IU9. replacing one of the SCC in the protection group does not interrupt the communication between the NE where the SCC resides and the U2000 after a switching from this SCC to the other SCC is performed. The battery is fixed on the board and cannot be replaced. the SCC is housed in IU18 by default. In this case.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. The default setting of the four jumpers is 0000. either 0 or 1. Ltd. 63 . Equipment. multimeter. and 01. U2000. the setting corresponds to binary 0. You can clear the database by setting the BIOS running mode by using four jumpers on the replacement SCC board. You must clear the database on the spare SCC board before replacing the replacement board. The figure below shows the four jumpers for setting the BIOS running mode and the battery jumper on an SCC board.1 Setting the Battery Jumper on the SCC.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 4 Replacing the SCC Board with One of the Same PCB Version communication between the NE where the SCC resides and the U2000 after a switching from this SCC to the other SCC is performed. representing 0 to 15 in the decimal system. 02. Tools. The four jumpers for setting the BIOS running mode are arranged from high order to low order and identified as 04.. 03. When a jumper is not capped. Web LCT Background Information Before replacing an SCC board with a spare SCC board. and Materials ESD bag. set the battery jumper on the spare SCC board with reference to 4. When the jumper is capped. the setting corresponds to binary 1. The settings of the four jumpers can be arranged in 16 combinations. The setting of each of the four jumpers corresponds to a binary value.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 4 Replacing the SCC Board with One of the Same PCB Version Figure 4-30 Position of the BIOS running mode jumper on the TN11SCC CPU 01020304 CF Card BIOS Running Mode Battery jumper 1 2 3 Battery jumper Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.. Ltd. 64 .

Ltd. 65 ..OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 4 Replacing the SCC Board with One of the Same PCB Version Figure 4-31 Position of the BIOS running mode jumper on the TN16SCC BIOS Running Mode SW1 ON 1 234 J1 OFF Battery Jumper 321 CF Card Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.

Ltd.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 4 Replacing the SCC Board with One of the Same PCB Version Figure 4-32 Position of the BIOS running mode jumper on the TN21/TN22SCC TN21SCC BIOS Running Mode CPU J13J14 Battery jumper 3 2 1 Battery jumper TN22SCC BIOS Running Mode CPU J11 J13 Battery jumper 3 2 1 Battery jumper Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.. 66 .

Ltd..OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 4 Replacing the SCC Board with One of the Same PCB Version Figure 4-33 Position of the BIOS running mode jumper on the TNK2SCC BIOS Running Mode 01020304 Battery Jumper 3 2 1 J9 Battery Supply J44 CPU CF Figure 4-34 Position of the BIOS running mode jumper on the TN51SCC BIOS Running Mode Battery Supply 01 02 03 04 J42 J12 Battery Jumper U42 U45 J1 CPU 321 CF Card Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 67 .

.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 4 Replacing the SCC Board with One of the Same PCB Version Figure 4-35 Position of the BIOS running mode jumper on the TN52SCC BIOS Running Mode Battery Supply 321 Battery Jumper CPU J1 U33 U18 01 02 03 04 J11 CF Card Figure 4-36 Setting the BIOS running mode to 1111 51SCC 01 04 03 02 01 02 03 04 52SCC K2SCC 01 02 03 04 Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 68 . Ltd.

69 . Ltd.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 11SCC 4 Replacing the SCC Board with One of the Same PCB Version 01 02 03 04 TN16SCC ON=1 ON OFF=0 OFF 1 2 The Lowest Site 3 4 The Highest Site TN21SCC 01 02 J13 03 04 J14 TN22SCC 01 02 03 04 J11 J13 Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co..

Then. Optional: If the NMS Client is selected. and "hhmmss" indicates the time when the backup is created. 70 . NOTE The 1X3 battery jumper on the replacement board enables or disables the power supply from the battery. Ltd. When the backup operation is successful. On the NE View tab page. the NE database and ASON service cannot be restored. the NMS creates the dbf. If the NMS Server is selected. 6. Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Select the option NMS Server or NMS Client to backup the selected device information. NOTE The Backup Information tab is unavailable when multiple devices are selected. click data have to be backed up.. "yyyymmdd" indicates the date when the backup is created. 5. Ensure that pin 1 and pin 2 of this jumper. 2. the selected device information is stored on the NMS server. l l Procedure Step 1 Select a spare SCC board as the replacement board.pkg file in the NEName/ yyyymmddhhmmss directory. the Node ID of the NE must be set according to the original data after the SCC is replaced. In this manner. Step 3 Set the jumpers on the spare SCC board by using the following methods and insert it to the specified slot for a standby SCC board. Step 2 Back up the NE database to the NMS server. In the Main Topology view. If the voltage is lower than 3 V. Operations on the U2000 must be performed in the network management center.. the database on the new SCC board is cleared. This records the NE database when the SCC board is replaced for future reference. Select Backup. Right click the device(s) that you want to backup in the NE View table. 7. 4. 3. remove the cap of pin 1 and cap pin 3 on the jumper and use a multimeter to measure the battery voltage..OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 4 Replacing the SCC Board with One of the Same PCB Version Precautions CAUTION l If the NE where the SCC to be replaced resides is an ASON NE. Ensure that the spare SCC board and the SCC board to be replaced have the same name and type. NOTE By default the NMS Server is selected. the battery is not working. choose Administration > NE Software Management > NE Data Backup/Restoration from the Main Menu. Otherwise. to open the Backup dialog. the backup progress is displayed. Operations on the Web LCT must be performed on site. to select the location where the device Click Start to start the backup operation for the selected device(s). "NEName" indicates the name of the NE. 1. The selected SCC board cannot be used as a replacment board.

For details about indicator definitions. Check if services are normal. the system automatically backs up the data on the existing SCC board to the new SCC board. there must be no new abnormal alarms or performances. 1. you can perform the preceding step to initiate an active/ standby switching. or replace the board again. Select Working/Protection Switching from the shortcut menu. Check the alarm suppression setting data against the original data. right-click the desire NE and click NE Explorer from the shortcut menu. Step 6 Wait for 90 minutes. The NE Explorer window is displayed. 2. 1. NOTE For details to set these parameters. you need to add a corresponding logical board on the U2000. Remove the jumper caps which are shown in Step 3. 5. Step 7 Log in to the U2000 and complete the following steps to perform an active/standby switch between the SCC boards. reinsert this SCC board to the slot. Step 8 Check and set the other parameters on the U2000 to ensure that the parameter values of the new board are the same as the original data. Enable the NE performance monitoring.. the system automatically configures 1+1 protection for the SCC. NOTE After the four jumpers are set and the SCC board is inserted to the slot. 2. add the logical board of the SCC board on the U2000. see "Indicators" of the Hardware Description. In the Main Topology. reversion mode and delayed report. Then.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement NOTE 4 Replacing the SCC Board with One of the Same PCB Version After inserting the spare SCC board to the specified slot for a standby SCC board. The switching is successful. Set the BIOS running mode of the spare SCC board to 1111 so as to clear the database in the flash memory. Check the software information of the new SCC against the original data. Step 9 Querying the current alarms of the NE by using the U2000. Step 5 Review the indicators of the new board. Figure 4-36 shows the settings of the four jumpers on the SCC board. Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 71 . 4. 3. see iManager U2000 Operator Guide for NG WDM NE Management. Click OK in the window displayed. 5. Step 4 After the database of the SCC board is cleared completely. 1. Choose Configuration > Board 1+1 Protection from the Function Tree. Check the NE alarm attribute data against the original data. right-click the desired SCC Board 1+1 Protection. The data include saving mode. NOTE 4. After the SCC board starts. After the data is backed up. If the indicator gives abnormal indication. you need to reinsert the board. Insert the spare SCC board to the slot housing the original SCC board. remove the board. Ltd. It takes 90 minutes for a board to work normally after the board is inserted. you must wait approximately 15 minutes to allow the database to clear. Ensure that the STAT indicator is steady green. Synchronize the NE time with the NMS server time. If the Active Board is not the board to be replaced. In Board 1+1 Protection. 2. After the new SCC board is started. the switching is successful. Query the alarms and performance events on the U2000. 3. Click Query. If services are normal. After that.

the battery is out of work. U2000.3. or rightclick to choose Save > Save All Records from the shortcut menu to save the current alarms of the NE. choose Fault > Browse Current Alarm from the Main Menu. In the Main Topology view. NOTE You can select the desired alarms and right-click to choose Save > Save Selected Records. 72 . Record the current alarms of the NE. Tools. and the alarm parameter is 0x5 0xff 0xff 0xff 0xff. but ASON services may be affected for a short time when configurations are restored by downloading the database. ensure that the monitoring of the POWER_FAIL alarm is enabled. The FTP/TFTP/SFTP server is configured and the FTP/TFTP/SFTP service is started. Click OK. on the U2000. Prerequisite l l l You must be an NM user with "NE and network operator" authority or higher. use a multimeter to measure the battery voltage. NOTE After replacing the SCC is replaced.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 4 Replacing the SCC Board with One of the Same PCB Version 1. Then. The SCC replacement board must be the same type as the SCC board being replaced. In this manner.6 V. The board must be replaced. you can restore the NE database from the NMS after replacing the SCC board. Ltd. delete the logical board of the SCC board to be replaced. For more information. ----End 4. Web LCT Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. and Materials ESD bag. check whether the jumper cap is correctly placed over the battery jumper. If yes. Impact on System Replacing the SCC board does not affect traditional services. Click the Basic Setting and Alarm Source tabs in turn on the Filter dialog box to set the filter conditions for the current alarms. CAUTION The standard voltage of the battery is 3. 3.. see U2000 NE Software Management. If the POWER_FAIL alarm occurs. multimeter. Step 10 Remove the SCC board to be replaced and put it in an ESD bag. you can back up the NE database to the NMS if the NE is reachable and the slot for housing the standby SCC board is occupied by a service board. Equipment. 2. the battery of the SCC board is abnormal. The battery is fixed on the board and cannot be replaced.4 Replacing the SCC Board with the Database Backed Up to the NMS (NE Is Reachable) Before replacing an SCC board. If the voltage is lower than 3 V. 4.

When a jumper is capped. the setting corresponds to binary 0. and 01. 02. 73 . set the battery jumper on the spare SCC board with reference to 4.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 4 Replacing the SCC Board with One of the Same PCB Version Background Information Before replacing an SCC board with a spare SCC board. representing 0 to 15 in the decimal system. The default setting of the four jumpers is 0000. You must clear the database on the spare SCC board before replacing the replacement board.. 03. either 0 or 1. When a jumper is not capped. You can clear the database by setting the BIOS running mode by using four jumpers on the replacement SCC board. Ltd. The four jumpers for setting the BIOS running mode are arranged from high order to low order and identified as 04. The settings of the four jumpers can be arranged in 16 combinations. the setting corresponds to binary 1.1 Setting the Battery Jumper on the SCC. Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. The setting of each of the four jumpers corresponds to a binary value. The figure below shows the four jumpers for setting the BIOS running mode and the battery jumper on an SCC board.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 4 Replacing the SCC Board with One of the Same PCB Version Figure 4-37 Position of the BIOS running mode jumper on the TN11SCC CPU 01020304 CF Card BIOS Running Mode Battery jumper 1 2 3 Battery jumper Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.. Ltd. 74 .

Ltd. 75 ..OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 4 Replacing the SCC Board with One of the Same PCB Version Figure 4-38 Position of the BIOS running mode jumper on the TN16SCC BIOS Running Mode SW1 ON 1 234 J1 OFF Battery Jumper 321 CF Card Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 4 Replacing the SCC Board with One of the Same PCB Version Figure 4-39 Position of the BIOS running mode jumper on the TN21/TN22SCC TN21SCC BIOS Running Mode CPU J13J14 Battery jumper 3 2 1 Battery jumper TN22SCC BIOS Running Mode CPU J11 J13 Battery jumper 3 2 1 Battery jumper Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd. 76 ..

Ltd.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 4 Replacing the SCC Board with One of the Same PCB Version Figure 4-40 Position of the BIOS running mode jumper on the TNK2SCC BIOS Running Mode 01020304 Battery Jumper 3 2 1 J9 Battery Supply J44 CPU CF Figure 4-41 Position of the BIOS running mode jumper on the TN51SCC BIOS Running Mode Battery Supply 01 02 03 04 J42 J12 Battery Jumper U42 U45 J1 CPU 321 CF Card Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 77 ..

Ltd.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 4 Replacing the SCC Board with One of the Same PCB Version Figure 4-42 Position of the BIOS running mode jumper on the TN52SCC BIOS Running Mode Battery Supply 321 Battery Jumper CPU J1 U33 U18 01 02 03 04 J11 CF Card Figure 4-43 Setting the BIOS running mode to 1011 51SCC 01 04 03 02 01 K2SCC 01 02 03 04 52SCC 02 03 04 11SCC 01 02 03 04 Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 78 ..

79 .OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 16SCC ON=1 ON 4 Replacing the SCC Board with One of the Same PCB Version OFF=0 OFF 1 2 The Lowest Site 3 4 The Highest Site TN21SCC 01 02 J13 TN22SCC 01 02 03 04 J11 03 04 J14 J13 Figure 4-44 Setting the BIOS running mode to 1010 51SCC 01 04 03 02 01 K2SCC 01 02 03 04 52SCC 02 03 04 Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.. Ltd.

. 80 . Ensure that the spare SCC board and the SCC board to be replaced have the same name and are of the same type. Ltd. the NE database and ASON service cannot be restored. Operations on the Web LCT must be performed on site. Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Operations on the U2000 must be performed in the network management center. the Node ID of the NE must be set according to the original data after the SCC is replaced. Otherwise.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 11SCC 4 Replacing the SCC Board with One of the Same PCB Version 01 02 03 04 16SCC ON=1 ON OFF=0 OFF 1 2 The Lowest Site 3 4 The Highest Site TN21SCC 01 02 J13 TN22SCC 01 02 03 04 J11 03 04 J14 J13 Precautions CAUTION l If the NE where the SCC to be replaced resides is an ASON NE. l l Procedure Step 1 Select a spare SCC board as the replacement board.

to open the Backup dialog. 3. 2. The selected SCC board cannot be used as a replacment board. 5. If the NMS Server is selected. select an NE and choose Security > NE User Management from the Function Tree. the NMS creates the dbf. to select the location where the device Click Start to start the backup operation for the selected device(s). Step 3 Back up the NE database to the NMS server. and record the node ID. Step 4 Follow the steps below to query the system to obtain the user data of the NE. click data have to be backed up. 1. Ltd. the selected device information is stored on the NMS server. 7. Issue 02 (2011-10-31) In the NE Explorer. 4. Record the NE user data returned by the system for future restoration of the NE user data. 2. 6. This records the NE database when the SCC board is faulty for future reference. 81 . Select Backup. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. For more information. When the backup operation is successful.. Then. choose Administration > NE Software Management > NE Data Backup/Restoration from the Main Menu. remove the cap of pin 1 and cap pin 3 on the jumper and use a multimeter to measure the battery voltage. NOTE By default the NMS Server is selected. In the NE Explorer. Click the Node ID Management tab. "yyyymmdd" indicates the date when the backup is created.. Select the NE you just created. 1. and click the NE Explorer. and "hhmmss" indicates the time when the backup is created. 3.pkg file in the NEName/ yyyymmddhhmmss directory. 2. the battery is not working. Record NE communication parameters such as the IP address and the subnet mask in case you need them for parameter restoration. Step 6 If the NE is an ASON NE. Right click the device(s) that you want to backup in the NE View table. If the voltage is lower than 3 V. Select the option NMS Server or NMS Client to backup the selected device information. Step 5 Follow the steps below to query the NE communication parameters. 1. "NEName" indicates the name of the NE.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement NOTE 4 Replacing the SCC Board with One of the Same PCB Version The 1X3 battery jumper on the replacement board enables or disables the power supply from the battery. Optional: If the NMS Client is selected. 3. select an NE and choose ASON > ASON Feature Management from the Function Tree. NOTE The Backup Information tab is unavailable when multiple devices are selected. On the NE View tab page. 3. Select Communication > Communication Parameters from Function Tree. the backup progress is displayed. Step 2 Review and record the current alarms on the NE. Click Query. query and record the node ID of the NE. Ensure that pin 1 and pin 2 of this jumper. refer to "Querying the Current Alarms" of the Supporting Tasks. 2.. In the Main Topology view. Click Query. 1.

l When the search is in progress. NOTE 2. 3.*. Click OK. Wait for a few minutes until the PROG indicator is green and slowly flashes. Disconnect the cables from the NM_ETH1 and NM_ETH2 ports (if connected). NOTE l The NE search function searches out only the NEs in the specified network segment. Step 8 Set the jumpers on the spare SCC board by using the following methods and insert it to the slot housing the original SCC board. you can click End Search. The Search NE dialog box is displayed. In this manner.*. the Web LCT cannot be connected to the NE. remove the board. Click Manage Domain. and the default IP subnet segment of the board is 129. Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Step 10 After the new SCC board is started. reinsert the new SCC board to the slot. 1. reinsert this SCC board to the slot. Figure 4-43 shows the settings of the four jumpers on the SCC board. Remove the jumper caps which are shown in Step 8. After that. 3. Click Add. 3. which indicates that the database is being cleared. 1. Log in the Web LCT with the user name admin. Click Cancel to exit the Manage Domain Search dialog box. NOTE After the four BIOS jumpers are set and you install the SCC board in the slot. Ltd. For details about how to remove a board. see "Replacing a Board" of the Supporting Tasks. disconnect the NE from the computer where the U2000 (hereinafter the computer is referred to as U2000) is installed. the database on the new SCC board is cleared.9. Wait for a few minutes until the PROG indicator blinks green. Set the BIOS running mode of the spare SCC board to 1011 to clear the database in the flash memory. 7. Select appropriate network segment IP addresses within the Domain and click Search. Click NE Search > Advanced Search in the NE List. 6. Remove the spare SCC board and then set its BIOS running mode to 1010 to clear the system parameter area. Step 9 After the database of the SCC board is cleared completely. After that. If the IP address of the Web LCT and the NE IP address are in different network segments. and the initial password admin. 82 . NOTE You can repeat step 3 through 5 to add multiple search domains. For the settings of the four jumpers on the SCC board. Set Domain Type to GNE IP Domain or GNE IP Address.. The Manage Domain Search dialog box is displayed. Set the IP address of the Web LCT to ensure that Web LCT is in the same IP subnet segment as the NE IP address. see Figure 4-44. and enter an IP address in the Domain Address field. 2. Connect the Web LCT to NM_ETH1. Modify the NE attribute to restore the communication between the NE and the U2000. The new board is initiated at factory.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 4 Replacing the SCC Board with One of the Same PCB Version Step 7 Inform the onsite maintenance engineer and remove the board. which indicates that the database is cleared completely. Insert the spare SCC board to the slot housing the original SCC board. and the New Domain dialog box is displayed. 4. the PROG indicator on the SCC board is constantly green. 5. 4. Step 11 Create the NE by using the Web LCT. connect the Web LCT to the NE. That is. 1. 2.

Are you sure to continue? ". In the NE Login dialog box that is displayed. Click OK after the Warning dialogue box pops up that prompts "Incorrect operations will interrupt the communication between NEs. the Web LCT cannot be connected to the NE. set the IP address of the Web LCT in the same network segment as the NE IP address.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 4 Replacing the SCC Board with One of the Same PCB Version 8. 1. 83 Issue 02 (2011-10-31) . NOTE If the NE IP addresses before and after the modification are in different network segments. you do not need to enter the use name and password and the system automatically uses the user name and password for login last time. Step 14 Modify the subnet mask based on the original information by using the Web LCT. Click OK after the warning dialog box pops up. and then click OK. Select Communication > Communication Parameters from Function Tree. Ltd. 2. 3. you can log in to multiple NEs at a time by entering the user name and password only in the first line. select an NE from the list and click Add NE. and click Apply. and then click OK. Enter the Subnet Mask. Click Modify NE ID. In the NE Explorer. indicating that the NE is successfully added. 2. A prompt message is displayed. Are you sure to send it? ". and click Apply. choose Configuration > NE Attribute from the Function Tree. Enter the Gateway IP Address. Click OK after the Warning dialogue box pops up that prompts "The NE communication parameters have been changed. and click Apply. Step 13 Modify the gateway IP based on the original information by using the Web LCT. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 3. 1. In the NE Explorer. 5. 1. If you select the Use same user name and password to login check box. Step 15 Modify the NE ID and extended ID based on the original information by using the Web LCT. 3. 1. TIP You can select multiple NEs at a time by concurrently pressing Shift. Are you sure to send it? ". Select Communication > Communication Parameters from Function Tree. After the search is complete. 4. 9.. Click OK after the Warning dialogue box pops up that prompts "The NE communication parameters have been changed. When this occurs. select Communication > Communication Parameters from Function Tree. Are you sure to continue? ". enter lct and password in the User Name and Password fields. 2. Click OK after the warning dialog box about communication interruption between NEs pops up. Click Close after the Result dialog box is displayed. If you select the Use the user name and password that was used last time check box. Step 12 Modify the NE IP based on the original information by using the Web LCT. In the NE Explorer. In the NE Explorer. In the Modify NE ID dialog box that is displayed. Click OK. 4. Click OK after the Warning dialogue box pops up that prompts "Incorrect operations will interrupt the communication between NEs. Select the NE that you want to log in and click NE Login in the lower right corner or rightclick the NE and choose NE Login. Enter the IP Address. 4. 2. enter values in the New ID and New Extended ID fields.

All created users of the NE are displayed in NE User Management Table. A warning dialog box is displayed. 5. Select Communication > Communication Parameters from Function Tree. 2. After you confirm the operation twice. 7. Enter the NE user name in the NE User field. Click OK. Ltd. NOTE You also need to set the Whether the password is allowed to be modified immediately parameter. In the NE Explorer. 1. Double-click the Node ID field to enter a node ID for the NE. Click Apply. and click the NE Explorer. Click Close. Remove the network cable which connected the NM_ETH1 port to the Web LCT. 1. 84 . select the NE and choose Security > NE User Management from the Function Tree. Enter the password in the New Password field and enter it again in the Confirm Password field. NOTE You can also choose Configuration > WDM ASON > ASON Topology Management from the main menu and set the NE node ID. At this time. Step 17 Create an NE's user by using the Web LCT. go to Step 21. 1. NOTE After this procedure. 3. Connect the network cable removed in the Step 10. 6. you can use the original user name and password to access the NE by using the U2000. symbols and numerals. The password is a string of 6-16 characters. 4. Click Query to view the current node ID of the NE. 4. Click the Node ID Management tab. In the NE Explorer. the NE is unreachable. and must contain at least one letter and one numeral. Step 19 Recover the network connection of the NE. 2. and the Operation Result dialog box is displayed. A dialog box indicating that the operation is successful is displayed. Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 3. click Yes. 2. 3. It can consist of letters. Select the NE you just created. Step 20 If the software version of the spare SCC board is different from the software version of the SCC board to be replaced. Check that all NE communication parameters should be the same with the original ones. 2. a prompt appears telling you that the operation was successful. Click Create and the Add NE User dialog box is displayed. modify the node ID of the NE by using the Web LCT. Step 18 If the NE is an ASON NE. 1. Click Query. click Close to complete changing the NE ID.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 4 Replacing the SCC Board with One of the Same PCB Version 3. select an NE and choose ASON > ASON Feature Management from the Function Tree. Select the User Level as needed. Step 16 Check the NE communication parameters by using the Web LCT. otherwise go to Step 22..

and the Activate Database dialog box is displayed. you need to select the appropriate backup file from the NMS server.. you need to click to select the backup file from the NMS Client. Right-click the NE. Select NMS Server or NMS Client to recover the backup file for the selected device(s).OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 4 Replacing the SCC Board with One of the Same PCB Version Step 21 Upgrade or downgrade the software of the spare SCC board. 7. choose Administration > NE Software Management > NE Data Backup/Restoration from the Main Menu.. 5. 1. The progress of the database activation is displayed on the NE View tab. 3. select the file to be recovered.. click Browse. The recover operation status is displayed in the NE View table. as shown below. 8. By default NMS Server is selected.. select the file to be recovered. Ensure that the software version of the spare SCC board is consistent with that of the SCC board to be replaced. The selected backup file path is displayed in the File To Be Recovered field. 4. Step 23 Activate the NE database. Right click the device(s) that you want to recover in the NE View table. 4. In the Main Topology view. Click Start. to open the Recover dialog. Select the NE where the SCC that has been replaced resides in the NE View table. For details. In the Main Topology view. l If NMS Server is selected.. a pop-up menu is displayed.. Optional: Click the icon in Deliver To Board Activate. 2. see the Upgrade Guide.6. If the backup file is not listed in the File Name drop-down list. 5. NOTE You must activate the NE database within five minutes after restoring it. Select Activate Database. If the backup file is not listed in the File Name drop-down list. l If NMS Client is selected. 85 . Step 22 Restore the NE database from the NMS server. click Yes to start the recover operation. In the Operation Confirmation dialog. Click Start to start the database activation process. Click OK. 3. In the File Name drop-down list.. and then this icon is changed to . The selected backup file path is displayed in the File To Be Recovered field. the Operation Confirmation dialog box is displayed. choose Administration > NE Software Management > NE Data Backup/Restoration from the Main Menu. NOTE The selected backup file path from the NMS Server or NMS Client is displayed in the File Name dropdown list. CAUTION During the process from backing up databases to restoring databases. Select Recover. 6. to select the backup file in the Select File dialog box. and turn to 22. 1. Ltd.. do not modify the NE configurations to avoid database inconsistency. Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 2.

Step 25 Querying the current alarms of the NE by using the U2000. see iManager U2000 Operator Guide for NG WDM NE Management. Step 24 Check and set the other parameters on the U2000 to ensure that the parameter values of the new board are the same as the original data. 4. Configure the OSPF IP address of the NE if the site complies with the models for separated optical and electrical NEs and the NE is on an optical-layer ASON network. 3. choose Fault > Browse Current Alarm from the Main Menu. 6. Record the current alarms of the NE. 3. Enable the NE performance monitoring. Check the software information of the new SCC against the original data. If the POWER_FAIL alarm occurs. use a multimeter to measure the battery voltage. 5. check whether the jumper cap is correctly placed over the battery jumper. back up the NE database to a CF card if the NE is reachable and the standby SCC slot is occupied by a service board. reversion mode and delayed report. NOTE After replacing the SCC is replaced.6 V. 2. In the Main Topology view. 1. NOTE For details to set these parameters. Click the Basic Setting and Alarm Source tabs in turn on the Filter dialog box to set the filter conditions for the current alarms. CAUTION The standard voltage of the battery is 3. and the alarm parameter is 0x5 0xff 0xff 0xff 0xff. The board must be replaced. 1. the battery is out of work. the battery of the SCC board is abnormal. Ltd.3. If the voltage is lower than 3 V. Click OK. Synchronize the NE time with the NMS server time. The data include saving mode. The battery is fixed on the board and cannot be replaced. you can restore the NE database from the CF card after you replace the SCC board is replaced. 86 . NOTE You can select the desired alarms and right-click to choose Save > Save Selected Records. Check the NE alarm attribute data against the original data.5 Replacing the SCC Board with the Database Backed Up to a CF Card (NE Is Reachable) Before replacing an SCC board.. If yes. ensure that the monitoring of the POWER_FAIL alarm is enabled. ----End 4. 4. If you choose to back up the database. or rightclick to choose Save > Save All Records from the shortcut menu to save the current alarms of the NE. 2. Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Check the alarm suppression setting data against the original data.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement NOTE 4 Replacing the SCC Board with One of the Same PCB Version The operation on the U2000 may bring a service interruption.

Tools. Web LCT Background Information Before an SCC board is replaced with a spare board. The settings of the four jumpers can be arranged in 16 combinations. When a jumper is not capped. multimeter. 02. either 0 or 1. The figure below shows the four jumpers for setting the BIOS running mode together with the battery jumper on an SCC board. When a jumper is capped. and Materials ESD bag. Equipment. The SCC replacement board must be the same type as the SCC board being replaced. The four jumpers for setting the BIOS running mode are arranged from high order to low order and identified as 04. Impact on System Replacing the SCC board does not affect traditional services. The setting of each of the four jumpers corresponds to a binary value. 87 .OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 4 Replacing the SCC Board with One of the Same PCB Version Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE and network operator" authority or higher. Ltd. 03. You can clear the database by setting the BIOS running mode by using four jumpers on the replacement SCC board. You must clear the database on the spare SCC board before replacing the replacement board. the setting corresponds to binary 1. the setting corresponds to binary 0. representing 0 to 15 in the decimal system. and 01. The default setting of the four jumpers is 0000.1 Setting the Battery Jumper on the SCC.. but ASON services may be affected for a short time when configurations are restored by downloading the database. the battery jumper on the spare SCC board must be set with reference to 4. Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. U2000.

88 .OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 4 Replacing the SCC Board with One of the Same PCB Version Figure 4-45 Position of the BIOS running mode jumper on the TN11SCC CPU 01020304 CF Card BIOS Running Mode Battery jumper 1 2 3 Battery jumper Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd..

89 .OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 4 Replacing the SCC Board with One of the Same PCB Version Figure 4-46 Position of the BIOS running mode jumper on the TN16SCC BIOS Running Mode SW1 ON 1 234 J1 OFF Battery Jumper 321 CF Card Figure 4-47 Position of the BIOS running mode jumper on the TNK2SCC BIOS Running Mode 01020304 Battery Jumper 3 2 1 J9 Battery Supply J44 CPU CF Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd..

. 90 .OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 4 Replacing the SCC Board with One of the Same PCB Version Figure 4-48 Position of the BIOS running mode jumper on the TN51SCC BIOS Running Mode Battery Supply 01 02 03 04 J42 J12 Battery Jumper U42 U45 J1 CPU 321 CF Card Figure 4-49 Position of the BIOS running mode jumper on the TN52SCC BIOS Running Mode Battery Supply 321 Battery Jumper CPU J1 U33 U18 01 02 03 04 J11 CF Card Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd.

91 . Ltd..OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 4 Replacing the SCC Board with One of the Same PCB Version Figure 4-50 Setting the BIOS running mode to 1011 51SCC 01 04 03 02 01 K2SCC 01 02 03 04 52SCC 02 03 04 11SCC 01 02 03 04 16SCC ON=1 ON OFF=0 OFF 1 2 The Lowest Site 3 4 The Highest Site Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.

92 ..OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 4 Replacing the SCC Board with One of the Same PCB Version Figure 4-51 Setting the BIOS running mode to 1010 51SCC 01 04 03 02 01 K2SCC 01 02 03 04 52SCC 02 03 04 11SCC 01 02 03 04 16SCC ON=1 ON OFF=0 OFF 1 2 The Lowest Site 3 4 The Highest Site Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd.

the battery is not working. select an NE and choose Security > NE User Management from the Function Tree. the original database of the NE cannot be restored. 3. 93 . choose Configuration > NE Configuration Data Management from the Main Menu. the restoration must be completed within two hours after you install the replacement SCC is installed. Click OK in the confirmation dialog box. Step 3 Back up the database on the U2000. Ensure that pin 1 and pin 2 of this jumper. 6. If the original data is overwritten. query the system to obtain the user data of the NE following the steps below. l After the database of the NE is restored on the CF card. Otherwise. . the data automatically saved on the NE overwrites the original data stored on the CF card. In the Main Topology view. l Operations on the U2000 must be performed in the network management center. Ltd. Click Close in the Operation Result dialog box is displayed. Step 2 Review and record the current alarms on the NE. remove the cap of pin 1 and cap pin 3 on the jumper and use a multimeter to measure the battery voltage. 1. Step 4 Four minutes later. the ASON service cannot be restored. 1. and click the NE Explorer. refer to "Querying the Current Alarms" of the Supporting Tasks. Click Back Up NE Data and then choose Manually Back Up Database to CF Card. For more information.. Record the NE user data returned by the system for future restoration of the NE user data. 1. the Node ID of the NE must be set according to the original data after the SCC is replaced. 2. select an NE and click Select one or more NEs in the NE Configuration. The spare SCC board and the SCC board to be replaced must have the same name and type. The selected SCC board cannot be used as a replacment board. In the NE Explorer. NOTE The 1X3 battery jumper on the replacement board enables or disables the power supply from the battery. Step 5 Follow the steps below to query the NE communication parameters. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Procedure Step 1 Select a spare SCC board as the replacement board. l Operations on the Web LCT must be performed on site. 4. In the Object Tree. If you wait more than two hours to restore the database of the NE on the CF card.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 4 Replacing the SCC Board with One of the Same PCB Version Precautions CAUTION l If the NE where the SCC to be replaced resides is an ASON NE. Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Select the NE you just created. and the NE Configuration Data Management interface is displayed. Then. 3. 5. 2. Click Query. If the voltage is lower than 3 V.

In this manner. Log in the Web LCT with the user name admin. NOTE After the four BIOS jumpers are set and you install the SCC board in the slot. Remove the jumper caps which are shown in Step 9. see Figure 4-51. query and record the node ID of the NE. Put the SCC into an ESD bag. the database on the new SCC board is cleared. Ltd. Disconnect the cables from the NM_ETH1 and NM_ETH2 ports (if connected). Wait for a few minutes until the PROG indicator blinks green. disconnect the NE from the computer where the U2000 (hereinafter the computer is referred to as U2000) is installed. hold the CF card and pull the card out of the CF card slot.. Step 10 After the database of the SCC board is cleared completely. Step 12 Create the NE by using the Web LCT. Step 11 After the new SCC board is started. NOTE 2. Modify the NE attribute to restore the communication between the NE and the U2000. 3. 4. Step 7 Remove the SCC board to be replaced. After that. Set the BIOS running mode of the spare SCC board to 1011 to clear the database in the flash memory. connect the Web LCT to the NE. select an NE and choose ASON > ASON Feature Management from the Function Tree. Insert the spare SCC board to the slot housing the original SCC board.9. 3. That is.*. and the initial password admin. which indicates that the database is being cleared. which indicates that the database is cleared completely. remove the board. Step 6 If the NE is an ASON NE.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 4 Replacing the SCC Board with One of the Same PCB Version 2. For more information. The new board is initiated at factory. see "Replacing a Board" of the Supporting Tasks. 1. Wait for a few minutes until the PROG indicator is green and slowly flashes. In the NE Explorer. the Web LCT cannot be connected to the NE. NOTE Keep the CF card because it is required for NE data restoration. 3. Record NE communication parameters such as the IP address and the subnet mask in case you need them for parameter restoration. Select Communication > Communication Parameters from Function Tree. 1. Click Query. the PROG indicator on the SCC board is constantly green. Step 8 On the SCC board that has been removed. Figure 4-50 shows the settings of the four jumpers on the SCC board. For settings of the four jumpers on the SCC board. Step 9 Set the four jumpers on the spare SCC board so as to set the BIOS running mode and insert the SCC board to the slot housing the original SCC board. Click the Node ID Management tab. 2. 2. 3. reinsert the new SCC board to the slot. 94 . Remove the spare SCC board and then set its BIOS running mode to 1010 to clear the system parameter area. reinsert this SCC board to the slot. and the default IP subnet segment of the board is 129. Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. and record the node ID.*. Set the IP address of the Web LCT to ensure that Web LCT is in the same IP subnet segment as the NE IP address. Connect the Web LCT to NM_ETH1. After that. 1. If the IP address of the Web LCT and the NE IP address are in different network segments.

NOTE If the NE IP addresses before and after the modification are in different network segments. If you select the Use the user name and password that was used last time check box. 7. Select the NE that you want to log in and click NE Login in the lower right corner or rightclick the NE and choose NE Login. If you select the Use same user name and password to login check box. and then click OK. l When the search is in progress.. select Communication > Communication Parameters from Function Tree.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 4 Replacing the SCC Board with One of the Same PCB Version 1. When this occurs. 3. the Web LCT cannot be connected to the NE. In the NE Explorer. Click Close after the Result dialog box is displayed. Step 14 Modify the gateway IP based on the original information by using the Web LCT. Click OK. Click NE Search > Advanced Search in the NE List. 3. Select appropriate network segment IP addresses within the Domain and click Search. 9. TIP You can select multiple NEs at a time by concurrently pressing Shift. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 1. In the NE Login dialog box that is displayed. and the New Domain dialog box is displayed. Click OK after the Warning dialogue box pops up that prompts "The NE communication parameters have been changed. 5. and enter an IP address in the Domain Address field. Ltd. indicating that the NE is successfully added. enter lct and password in the User Name and Password fields. 5. 6. you can click End Search. 2. The Search NE dialog box is displayed. select an NE from the list and click Add NE. 4. Click Add. 95 Issue 02 (2011-10-31) . Step 13 Modify the NE IP based on the original information by using the Web LCT. and click Apply. you do not need to enter the use name and password and the system automatically uses the user name and password for login last time. Set Domain Type to GNE IP Domain or GNE IP Address. Are you sure to send it? ". Click Manage Domain. NOTE l The NE search function searches out only the NEs in the specified network segment. Enter the Gateway IP Address. Click OK after the warning dialog box pops up. 2. 8. Click Cancel to exit the Manage Domain Search dialog box. Select Communication > Communication Parameters from Function Tree. Enter the IP Address. Click OK after the warning dialog box about communication interruption between NEs pops up. After the search is complete. 1. and click Apply. In the NE Explorer. The Manage Domain Search dialog box is displayed. NOTE You can repeat step 3 through 5 to add multiple search domains. you can log in to multiple NEs at a time by entering the user name and password only in the first line. set the IP address of the Web LCT in the same network segment as the NE IP address. 3. Click OK. 4. 2. A prompt message is displayed.

Are you sure to continue? ". Click Query. 5. select the NE and choose Security > NE User Management from the Function Tree. Check that all NE communication parameters should be the same with the original ones. and the Operation Result dialog box is displayed. 2. 3.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 4 Replacing the SCC Board with One of the Same PCB Version 4. At this time. 1. In the NE Explorer. In the NE Explorer. It can consist of letters. symbols and numerals. 1. Click OK. A dialog box indicating that the operation is successful is displayed. Step 16 Modify the NE ID and extended ID based on the original information by using the Web LCT. Enter the NE user name in the NE User field. Select Communication > Communication Parameters from Function Tree. choose Configuration > NE Attribute from the Function Tree. Double-click the Node ID field to enter a node ID for the NE. NOTE You also need to set the Whether the password is allowed to be modified immediately parameter. Step 15 Modify the subnet mask based on the original information by using the Web LCT. click Close to complete changing the NE ID. In the Modify NE ID dialog box that is displayed. 6. the NE is unreachable. Ltd. 1. 96 . and then click OK. Issue 02 (2011-10-31) In the NE Explorer. Step 17 Check the NE communication parameters by using the Web LCT. 1. Enter the Subnet Mask. and click Apply. Select the NE you just created. Are you sure to continue? ". Click Close. Click the Node ID Management tab. and click the NE Explorer. 7. 3. Select Communication > Communication Parameters from Function Tree. Select the User Level as needed. Step 18 Create an NE's user by using the Web LCT. 3. 4.. and must contain at least one letter and one numeral. Step 19 If the NE is an ASON NE. 2. Click Create and the Add NE User dialog box is displayed. Click OK after the Warning dialogue box pops up that prompts "Incorrect operations will interrupt the communication between NEs. Are you sure to send it? ". The password is a string of 6-16 characters. 4. 1. 2. Click OK after the Warning dialogue box pops up that prompts "Incorrect operations will interrupt the communication between NEs. 3. click Yes. Click OK after the Warning dialogue box pops up that prompts "The NE communication parameters have been changed. 2. Click Query to view the current node ID of the NE. A warning dialog box is displayed. 3. In the NE Explorer. 2. enter values in the New ID and New Extended ID fields. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Click Modify NE ID. All created users of the NE are displayed in NE User Management Table. select an NE and choose ASON > ASON Feature Management from the Function Tree. modify the node ID of the NE by using the Web LCT. Enter the password in the New Password field and enter it again in the Confirm Password field.

Remove the network cable which connected the NM_ETH1 port to the Web LCT. Step 24 Upgrade or downgrade the software of the spare SCC board. indicating that the restoration of the NE database may lead to service interruption. you can use the original user name and password to access the NE by using the U2000. Click Closeafter an Operation Result dialog box is displayed. the NE software issues the data in the CF card to only the SCC board but not other boards. and the NE Configuration Data Management interface is displayed. To ensure that the configurations in the SCC board and the configurations in other boards are consistent. 97 . 1. Connect the network cable removed. In the Main Topology view. After you confirm the operation twice. see the Upgrade Guide. Click OK to start to restore the NE database.. go to Step 24. go to Step 19. Step 25 Restore the initial database of the NE by using the U2000. 5. otherwise go to Step 25. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 4. do not modify the NE configurations to avoid database inconsistency. 3. a prompt appears telling you that the operation was successful. 6. CAUTION During the process from backing up databases to restoring databases. insert the SCC. 1. NOTE You can also choose Configuration > WDM ASON > ASON Topology Management from the main menu and set the NE node ID. Click Apply. Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Check the software information of the new SCC against the original data. NOTE 2. select an NE and click In NE Configuration. Step 26 Check and set the other parameters on the U2000 to ensure that the parameter values of the new board are the same as the original data. . After the NE databases are restored. remove the SCC board inserted just now. For details. choose Configuration > NE Configuration Data Management from the Main Menu.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 4 Replacing the SCC Board with One of the Same PCB Version 4. Step 21 After the SCC board is started. Ltd. you need to perform warm resets on other boards. Click Restore NE Database from CF Card. Step 20 Recover the network connection of the NE. Ensure that the software version of the spare SCC board is consistent with that of the SCC board to be replaced. Step 23 If the software version of the spare SCC board is different from the software version of the SCC board to be replaced. 1. 2. Then. select an NE or multiple NEs. In the Object Tree on the left. Insert the CF card that has been removed in Step 8 into the CF card slot on the SCC board. Step 22 After the SCC board is started and the communication between the NE and U2000 is normal. The Confirm dialog box is displayed. NOTE After this procedure.

CAUTION The standard voltage of the battery is 3. In the Main Topology view. 2. The battery is fixed on the board and cannot be replaced. use a multimeter to measure the battery voltage. the battery of the SCC board is abnormal. ----End 4. Step 27 Querying the current alarms of the NE by using the U2000. 3. Check the alarm suppression setting data against the original data. the battery is out of work. The data include saving mode. 4. Prerequisite You must be an NMS user with "NE and network operator" authority or higher. 3. Configure the OSPF IP address of the NE if the site complies with the models for separated optical and electrical NEs and the NE is on an optical-layer ASON network. Synchronize the NE time with the NMS server time. Click OK. choose Fault > Browse Current Alarm from the Main Menu.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 4 Replacing the SCC Board with One of the Same PCB Version 2. Ltd. NOTE After replacing the SCC is replaced. check whether the jumper cap is correctly placed over the battery jumper. reversion mode and delayed report. If the voltage is lower than 3 V. 4. NOTE For details to set these parameters. ensure that the monitoring of the POWER_FAIL alarm is enabled. Click the Basic Setting and Alarm Source tabs in turn on the Filter dialog box to set the filter conditions for the current alarms. see iManager U2000 Operator Guide for NG WDM NE Management. 1. or rightclick to choose Save > Save All Records from the shortcut menu to save the current alarms of the NE. 98 . Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. NOTE You can select the desired alarms and right-click to choose Save > Save Selected Records. The board must be replaced. Enable the NE performance monitoring. Record the current alarms of the NE. 5.. If yes. Impact on System Replacing the SCC does not affect the existing services. The SCC replacement board must be the same type as the SCC board being replaced. 6.4 Replacing the SCC Board in a Slave Subrack This section describes how to replace an SCC board in a slave subrack. Check the NE alarm attribute data against the original data. If the POWER_FAIL alarm occurs.6 V. and the alarm parameter is 0x5 0xff 0xff 0xff 0xff.

The default setting of the four jumpers is 0000. U2000. The POWER_FAIL alarm of the subrack where the replacement SCC resides cannot be reported. 03. The four jumpers for setting the BIOS running mode are arranged from high order to low order and identified as 04. Tools. 99 . However. Ltd. multimeter Background Information Before an SCC board is replaced with a spare board. the services on these boards are not affected. you must set the battery jumper on the spare SCC board with reference to 4. and 01.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 4 Replacing the SCC Board with One of the Same PCB Version If the SCC is configured with 1+1 protection. You clear the database by configuring the BIOS running mode by using four setting jumpers on the spare SCC board. and Materials ESD bag.1 Setting the Battery Jumper on the SCC. the setting corresponds to binary 1.. representing 0 to 15 in the decimal system. The ESC and OSC communication of the subrack where the replacement SCC resides fails. When the jumper is capped. The settings of the four jumpers can be arranged in 16 combinations. Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Certain optical boards in the slave subrack housing the SCC board to be replaced go offline and cannot be managed. The subrack whose ID conflicts with the ID of the subrack where the replacement SCC resides cannot be detected. either 0 or 1. replacing the SCC does not affect the system. The setting of each jumper corresponds to a binary value. the setting corresponds to binary 0. If an SCC is not configured with 1+1 protection. replacing the SCC has the following effects: l l l l l The fan is automatically changed to the "High Speed" mode. 02. The figure below shows the four jumpers for setting the BIOS running mode and the battery jumper on an SCC board. Equipment. You must clear the database on the spare SCC board before starting the replacement. When a jumper is not capped.

100 . Ltd.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 4 Replacing the SCC Board with One of the Same PCB Version Figure 4-52 Position of the BIOS running mode jumper on the TN11SCC CPU 01020304 CF Card BIOS Running Mode Battery jumper 1 2 3 Battery jumper Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co..

Ltd.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 4 Replacing the SCC Board with One of the Same PCB Version Figure 4-53 Position of the BIOS running mode jumper on the TN16SCC BIOS Running Mode SW1 ON 1 234 J1 OFF Battery Jumper 321 CF Card Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.. 101 .

102 .. Ltd.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 4 Replacing the SCC Board with One of the Same PCB Version Figure 4-54 Position of the BIOS running mode jumper on the TN21/TN22SCC TN21SCC BIOS Running Mode CPU J13J14 Battery jumper 3 2 1 Battery jumper TN22SCC BIOS Running Mode CPU J11 J13 Battery jumper 3 2 1 Battery jumper Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.

.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 4 Replacing the SCC Board with One of the Same PCB Version Figure 4-55 Position of the BIOS running mode jumper on the TNK2SCC BIOS Running Mode 01020304 Battery Jumper 3 2 1 J9 Battery Supply J44 CPU CF Figure 4-56 Position of the BIOS running mode jumper on the TN51SCC BIOS Running Mode Battery Supply 01 02 03 04 J42 J12 Battery Jumper U42 U45 J1 CPU 321 CF Card Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd. 103 .

Ltd.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 4 Replacing the SCC Board with One of the Same PCB Version Figure 4-57 Position of the BIOS running mode jumper on the TN52SCC BIOS Running Mode Battery Supply 321 Battery Jumper CPU J1 U33 U18 01 02 03 04 J11 CF Card Figure 4-58 Setting the BIOS running mode to 1111 51SCC 01 04 03 02 01 02 03 04 52SCC K2SCC 01 02 03 04 Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 104 ..

Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.. Then. Ltd. and the type of the spare board are the same as those of the original board. cap pin 2 and pin 3 on the battery jumper and use a multimeter to measure the battery voltage. it indicates that the battery is not working. If the voltage is lower than 3 V. Ensure that pin 1 and pin 2 on the battery jumper are capped. Ensure the name. NOTE The 1X3 jumper inside the board is used to enable or disable the power supply from the battery. the SCC board needs to be replaced. In this case.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 11SCC 4 Replacing the SCC Board with One of the Same PCB Version 01 02 03 04 TN16SCC ON=1 ON OFF=0 OFF 1 2 The Lowest Site 3 4 The Highest Site TN21SCC 01 02 J13 03 04 J14 TN22SCC 01 02 03 04 J11 J13 Procedure Step 1 Select a spare board. 105 .

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement

4 Replacing the SCC Board with One of the Same PCB Version

Step 2 Review and record the current alarms on the NE. For more information, refer to "Querying the Current Alarms" of the Supporting Tasks. Step 3 Inform the onsite maintenance engineer and replace the board. For more information regarding how to replace a board, refer to "Replacing a Board" of the Supporting Tasks. Step 4 Set the four jumpers on the spare SCC board to set the BIOS running mode, and then insert the SCC board to the slot housing the original SCC board. In this manner, the database on the new SCC board is cleared. 1. 2. Set the BIOS running mode of the spare SCC board to 1111 to clear the database in the flash memory. Figure 4-58 shows the settings of the four jumpers on the SCC board. Insert the spare SCC board in the slot housing the original SCC board.
NOTE

After you set the jumpers and install the new SCC board in the slot, wait 15 minutes to allow the database to be cleared.

Step 5 After the database of the SCC board is cleared completely, remove the board. Remove the jumper caps which are shown in Step 4. After that, reinsert this SCC board to the slot. Step 6 Review the indicators of the new board. It takes ten minutes for a new board to work normally after insertion. Ensure that the STAT indicator is steady green. If the indicator gives abnormal indication, you need to reinsert the board, or replace the board again. For more information regarding indicator definitions, refer to "Indicators" of the Hardware Description. Step 7 Querying the current alarms of the NE by using the U2000. 1. 2. 3. 4. In the Main Topology view, choose Fault > Browse Current Alarm from the Main Menu. Click the Basic Setting and Alarm Source tabs in turn on the Filter dialog box to set the filter conditions for the current alarms. Click OK. Record the current alarms of the NE.
NOTE

You can select the desired alarms and right-click to choose Save > Save Selected Records, or rightclick to choose Save > Save All Records from the shortcut menu to save the current alarms of the NE.
NOTE

After replacing the SCC is replaced, ensure that the monitoring of the POWER_FAIL alarm is enabled. If the POWER_FAIL alarm occurs, and the alarm parameter is 0x5 0xff 0xff 0xff 0xff, the battery of the SCC board is abnormal, check whether the jumper cap is correctly placed over the battery jumper. If yes, use a multimeter to measure the battery voltage. If the voltage is lower than 3 V, the battery is out of work. The board must be replaced.

CAUTION
The standard voltage of the battery is 3.6 V. The battery is fixed on the board and cannot be replaced. ----End

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

106

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement

5 Replacing the TN16XCH Board

5
About This Chapter

Replacing the TN16XCH Board

This section describes how to replace an TN16XCH board. 5.1 Setting the Battery Jumper on the TN16XCH Board This section describes how to set the battery jumper on the spare TN16XCH board before replacing the TN16XCH board. 5.2 Replacing the TN16XCH Board in a Master Subrack This section describes how to replace the TN16XCH board of the master subrack when TN16XCH 1+1 protection is configured. 5.3 Replacing the TN16XCH Board in a Slave Subrack This section describes how to replace an TN16XCH board in a slave subrack.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

107

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement

5 Replacing the TN16XCH Board

5.1 Setting the Battery Jumper on the TN16XCH Board
This section describes how to set the battery jumper on the spare TN16XCH board before replacing the TN16XCH board. The battery on the TN16XCH helps to ensure that the configuration is kept upon a power failure of the TN16XCH. If the board is in use, place a jumper cap over the battery jumper to make a short circuit, which allows the battery to supply power normally. If the board is not in use, use a jumper cap to disconnect the battery jumper. Figure 5-1 shows the position of battery jumper on the TN16XCH board. Figure 5-1 Position of the battery jumper on the TN16XCH board

J1
CPU

Battery Jumper

321

CF Card

Figure 5-2 shows the power jumper.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

108

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement

5 Replacing the TN16XCH Board

Figure 5-2 battery jumper
When battery is required When battery is not required

3

2

1

5.2 Replacing the TN16XCH Board in a Master Subrack
This section describes how to replace the TN16XCH board of the master subrack when TN16XCH 1+1 protection is configured.

Prerequisite
l l l You must be an NMS user with "NE and network operator" authority or higher. The FTP/TFTP/SFTP server is configured and the FTP/TFTP/SFTP service is started. For more information, refer to the U2000 NE Software Management. The type of the replacement TN16XCH board is the same as the type of the TN16XCH board to be replaced.

Impact on System
Replacing an TN16XCH board configured with protection does not affect the existing services. In the case of TN16XCH 1+1 protection, replacing one of the TN16XCH in the protection group does not interrupt the communication between the NE where the TN16XCH resides and the U2000 after a switching from this TN16XCH to the other TN16XCH is performed.

Tools, Equipment and Materials
ESD bag, U2000, multimeter

Background Information
Before an TN16XCH board is replaced with a spare board, the battery jumper on the spare TN16XCH board must be set with reference to 5.1 Setting the Battery Jumper on the TN16XCH Board. In addition, the database on the spare TN16XCH board must be cleared before the replacement. This can be achieved by setting the BIOS running mode to 1111 through DIP switch on the spare TN16XCH board. Figure 5-3shows the position of the DIP switch on the TN16XCH board and Figure 5-4 shows the schematic diagram of the status of the DIP switch.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 109

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement

5 Replacing the TN16XCH Board

Figure 5-3 Position of the BIOS running mode DIP on the TN16XCH

SW1 BIOS Running Mode
12 34

J1
ON OFF

321

CPU

Battery Jumper

CF Card

Figure 5-4 Setting the BIOS running mode to 1111

ON=1

ON

OFF=0

OFF 1 2 3 4 The Lowest Site The Highest Site

Procedure
Step 1 Select a spare TN16XCH board as the replacement board. Ensure that the spare TN16XCH board and the TN16XCH board to be replaced have the same name and type.
NOTE

The 1X3 jumper (namely, the battery jumper) on the TN16XCH board is used to enable or disable the power supply from the battery. Ensure that pin 1 and pin 2 of this jumper are capped. Then, cap pin 2 and pin 3 on the jumper and use a multimeter to measure the battery voltage. If the voltage is lower than 3 V, the battery is not working. The TN16XCH board needs to be replaced.

Step 2 Review and record the current alarms on the NE. For more information, refer to "Querying the Current Alarms" of the Supporting Tasks.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 110

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement

5 Replacing the TN16XCH Board

Step 3 Back up the NE database to the NMS server. This is to record the NE database when the TN16XCH board is replaced for future reference. 1. 2. In the Main Topology view, choose Administration > NE Software Management > NE Data Backup/Restoration from the Main Menu. Right click the device(s) that you want to backup in the NE View table.
NOTE

The Backup Information tab is unavailable when multiple devices are selected.

3. 4.

Select Backup... to open the Backup dialog. Select the option NMS Server or NMS Client to backup the selected device information.
NOTE

By default the NMS Server is selected. If the NMS Server is selected, the selected device information is stored on the NMS server.

5. 6. 7.

Optional: If the NMS Client is selected, click data have to be backed up.

to select the location where the device

Click Start to start the backup operation for the selected device(s). On the NE View tab page, the backup progress is displayed. When the backup operation is successful, the NMS creates the dbf.pkg file in the NEName/ yyyymmddhhmmss directory. "NEName" indicates the name of the NE, "yyyymmdd" indicates the date when the backup is created, and "hhmmss" indicates the time when the backup is created.

Step 4 Follow the steps below to review the working state of the board to be replaced. 1. 2. In the NE Explorer, click the NE and choose Configuration > Board 1+1 Protection from the Function Tree. Click Query.

Step 5 If the board to be replaced is the active board, go to Step 6. Otherwise, go to Step 7. Step 6 If the board to be replaced is the working board, follow the steps below to perform an active/ standby switching on the U2000. 1. 2. 3. In the Main Topology, right-click the desire NE and click NE Explorer from the shortcut menu. The NE Explorer window is displayed. Choose Configuration > Board 1+1 Protection from the Function Tree. In Board 1+1 Protection, right-click the desired SCC Board 1+1 Protection. Select Working/Protection Switching from the shortcut menu. Click OK in the window displayed. Click Query. If the Active Board is not the board to be replaced, the switching is successful. Query the alarms and performance events on the U2000. Check if services are normal. If services are normal, there must be no new abnormal alarms or performances. The switching is successful.

4. 5.

Step 7 Inform the onsite maintenance engineer and replace the board. For more information regarding how to remove a board, refer to "Replacing a Board" of the Supporting Tasks. Step 8 Set the DIP switch on the spare TN16XCH board so as to set the BIOS running mode and then insert the TN16XCH board to the slot housing the original TN16XCH board. In this manner, the database on the new TN16XCH board is cleared.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 111

Check whether the switching state is correct. choose Fault > Browse Current Alarm from the Main Menu. you need to reinsert the board or replace the board again. Set the BIOS running mode of the spare TN16XCH board to 1111 to clear the database in the flash memory. 3. Ensure that the STAT indicator is steady green. 2. Insert the spare TN16XCH board to the slot housing the original TN16XCH board. Enable the NE performance monitoring. Click OK. Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. right-click the desire NE and click NE Explorer from the shortcut menu.. 2. Perform a switching test. After that. For more information regarding indicator definitions. In addition. Step 11 Optional: Follow the steps below to switch the active/standby state of the SCCs back to the original state. 112 . refer to "Indicators" of the Hardware Description. 1. 6. Ltd. 4. Step 12 Check and set the other parameters on the U2000 to ensure that the parameter values of the new board are the same as the original data. reset the DIP switch to 0000 state which are shown in Step 8. Record the current alarms of the NE. In the Main Topology view. 1. you can perform the preceding step to initiate an active/standby switching. Check the alarm suppression setting data against the original data. In the Main Topology. wait for 15 minutes to allow the database to be cleared. Select Restore Working/Protection from the shortcut menu. After the data is backed up. remove it. right-click SCC Board 1+1 Protection. In Board 1+1 Protection. NOTE After the new TN16XCH board is started. Check the software information of the new SCC against the original data. NOTE After the four jumpers are set and the TN16XCH board is inserted to the slot. Step 10 Review the indicators of the new board. reversion mode and delayed report. 4. see iManager U2000 Operator Guide for NG WDM NE Management. Step 9 After the database on the new TN16XCH board is cleared. The data include saving mode. 5. 1. 3. Check the NE alarm attribute data against the original data. NOTE For details to set these parameters. Click the Basic Setting and Alarm Source tabs in turn on the Filter dialog box to set the filter conditions for the current alarms. It takes 90 minutes for a board to work normally after the board is inserted. If the indicator gives abnormal indication. Synchronize the NE time with the NMS server time. The NE Explorer window is displayed. 2. reinsert this TN16XCH board to the slot. Choose Configuration > Board 1+1 Protection from the Function Tree.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 5 Replacing the TN16XCH Board 1. the system automatically backs up the data on the existing TN16XCH board to the new TN16XCH board. Step 13 Querying the current alarms of the NE by using the U2000. 3. Figure 5-4 shows the settings of the DIP switch on the TN16XCH board. 2. Click OK in the window displayed.

multimeter Background Information Before an TN16XCH board is replaced with a spare board. If the voltage is lower than 3 V. ensure that the monitoring of the POWER_FAIL alarm is enabled. Equipment and Materials ESD bag. determine if the jumper cap is correctly placed over the battery jumper. and the type of the spare board are the same as those of the original board. Ensure that pin 1 and pin 2 on the battery jumper are capped. the battery of the TN16XCH board is abnormal. ----End 5. the battery is not working. Prerequisite You must be an NMS user with "NE and network operator" authority or higher. The battery is fixed on the board and cannot be replaced. Tools. If the voltage is lower than 3 V.6 V. NOTE After the TN16XCH is replaced. Ltd. The board needs to be replaced. Impact on System Replacing the TN16XCH does not affect the existing services and system.1 Setting the Battery Jumper on the TN16XCH Board. In this case. use a multimeter to measure the battery voltage. Then. 113 . Procedure Step 1 Select a spare board. NOTE The 1X3 jumper inside the board is used to enable or disable the power supply from the battery.. the battery jumper on the spare TN16XCH board must be set with reference to 5. If yes. Ensure the name. the TN16XCH board needs to be replaced. U2000. Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement NOTE 5 Replacing the TN16XCH Board You can select the desired alarms and right-click to choose Save > Save Selected Records. it indicates that the battery is not working. cap pin 2 and pin 3 on the battery jumper and use a multimeter to measure the battery voltage. and the alarm parameter is 0x5 0xff 0xff 0xff 0xff.3 Replacing the TN16XCH Board in a Slave Subrack This section describes how to replace an TN16XCH board in a slave subrack. CAUTION The standard voltage of the battery is 3. If the POWER_FAIL alarm occurs. or rightclick to choose Save > Save All Records from the shortcut menu to save the current alarms of the NE.

NOTE After the TN16XCH is replaced. In the NE Explorer. In the Main Topology view. 2. If services are normal. Ltd. If the voltage is lower than 3 V. Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 114 . right-click the desire NE and click NE Explorer from the shortcut menu. 1. refer to "Querying the Current Alarms" of the Supporting Tasks. Step 8 Querying the current alarms of the NE by using the U2000. Click OK. For more information. 1.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 5 Replacing the TN16XCH Board Step 2 Review and record the current alarms on the NE. 2. Select Working/Protection Switching from the shortcut menu. Step 3 Follow the steps below to review the working state of the board to be replaced. If the POWER_FAIL alarm occurs. The board needs to be replaced. NOTE You can select the desired alarms and right-click to choose Save > Save Selected Records. If yes. Click the Basic Setting and Alarm Source tabs in turn on the Filter dialog box to set the filter conditions for the current alarms.. there must be no new abnormal alarms or performances. Otherwise. 5. determine if the jumper cap is correctly placed over the battery jumper. go to Step 5. refer to "Indicators" of the Hardware Description. Step 6 Inform the onsite maintenance engineer and replace the board. 3. and the alarm parameter is 0x5 0xff 0xff 0xff 0xff. Record the current alarms of the NE. the battery is not working. 3. The NE Explorer window is displayed. choose Fault > Browse Current Alarm from the Main Menu. Step 5 If the board to be replaced is the working board. follow the steps below to perform an active/ standby switching on the U2000. Check if services are normal. Ensure that the STAT indicator is steady green. In the Main Topology. go to Step 6. the switching is successful. Query the alarms and performance events on the U2000. The switching is successful. 4. 1. 2. click the NE and choose Configuration > Board 1+1 Protection from the Function Tree. In Board 1+1 Protection. Step 7 Review the indicators of the new board. or replace the board again. you need to reinsert the board. 4. right-click the desired SCC Board 1+1 Protection. Choose Configuration > Board 1+1 Protection from the Function Tree. ensure that the monitoring of the POWER_FAIL alarm is enabled. For more information regarding how to remove a board. use a multimeter to measure the battery voltage. refer to "Replacing a Board" of the Supporting Tasks. the battery of the TN16XCH board is abnormal. It takes ten minutes for a new board to work normally after insertion. If the Active Board is not the board to be replaced. or rightclick to choose Save > Save All Records from the shortcut menu to save the current alarms of the NE. For more information regarding indicator definitions. Step 4 If the board to be replaced is the active board. Click OK in the window displayed. Click Query. If the indicator gives abnormal indication. Click Query.

Ltd. The battery is fixed on the board and cannot be replaced. ----End Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.6 V. 115 ..OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 5 Replacing the TN16XCH Board CAUTION The standard voltage of the battery is 3.

2 Replacing the Unprotected SCC Board in a Master Subrack This section describes how to replace an SCC board in a master subrack when no protection is configured for the SCC board.3 Replacing the SCC Board in a Slave Subrack This section describes how to replace an SCC board in a slave subrack. 6. 6.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 6 Replacing the SCC Board with One of a Different PCB Version 6 Replacing the SCC Board with One of a Different PCB Version About This Chapter This section describes how to replace an SCC board with one SCC board of a later PCB version. The replacement mainly involves the SCC boards for the OptiX OSN 8800 T32 and OptiX OSN 6800.. 116 . 6. Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd.1 Replacing the Protected SCC Board in a Master Subrack This section describes how to replace the SCC board in a master subrack when SCC 1+1 protection is configured.

the battery jumper on the spare SCC board must be set with reference to 4. Prerequisite l l l You must be an NM user with "NE and network operator" authority or higher. The FTP/TFTP/SFTP server is configured and the FTP/TFTP/SFTP service is started. Tools. The default setting of the four jumpers is 0000. Ltd. Equipment. The settings of the four jumpers can be arranged in 16 combinations.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 6 Replacing the SCC Board with One of a Different PCB Version 6. either 0 or 1. 02. see U2000 NE Software Management. If the replacement board and the SCC board to be replaced are of different types.1 Replacing the Protected SCC Board in a Master Subrack This section describes how to replace the SCC board in a master subrack when SCC 1+1 protection is configured. the setting corresponds to binary 0. 117 . The setting of each of the four jumpers corresponds to a binary value. the two SCC boards in the subrack must be replaced to ensure that the active and standby SCC boards are of the same type. and Materials ESD bag. the setting corresponds to binary 1. multimeter Background Information Before an SCC board is replaced with a spare board. You must clear the database on the spare SCC board before replacing the replacement board. In the case of SCC 1+1 protection.1 Setting the Battery Jumper on the SCC. and 01. U2000. When a jumper is not capped. Impact on System The replacement does not affect the existing services.. You can clear the database by setting the BIOS running mode by using four jumpers on the replacement SCC board. 03. Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. replacing one of the SCC in the protection group does not interrupt the communication between the NE where the SCC resides and the U2000 after a switching from this SCC to the other SCC is performed. For details. The figure below shows the four jumpers for setting the BIOS running mode and the battery jumper on an SCC board. representing 0 to 15 in the decimal system. When a jumper is capped. The four jumpers for setting the BIOS running mode are arranged from high order to low order and identified as 04.

118 . Ltd.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 6 Replacing the SCC Board with One of a Different PCB Version Figure 6-1 Position of the BIOS running mode jumper on the TN11SCC CPU 01020304 CF Card BIOS Running Mode Battery jumper 1 2 3 Battery jumper Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co..

Ltd. 119 .OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 6 Replacing the SCC Board with One of a Different PCB Version Figure 6-2 Position of the BIOS running mode jumper on the TN51SCC BIOS Running Mode Power Supply 04 03 02 01 U45 J42 J12 U42 Battery Jumper J1 321 CPU CF Card Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co..

120 . Ltd..OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 6 Replacing the SCC Board with One of a Different PCB Version Figure 6-3 Position of the BIOS running mode jumper on the TN52SCC BIOS Running Mode Power Supply Battery Jumper 3 2 1 J1 U33 U18 01 02 03 04 J11 CF Card Figure 6-4 Setting the BIOS running mode to 1111 51SCC 01 04 03 02 01 11SCC 52SCC 02 03 04 01 02 03 04 Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.

2. the battery is out of work. The SCC board needs to be replaced. The TN11SCC cannot be used to replace the TN51SCC and the TN52SCC. 121 . click data have to be backed up. NOTE If two SCC boards need to be configured on the subrack. Right click the device(s) that you want to backup in the NE View table. If the voltage is lower than 3 V. Select Backup. to select the location where the device Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. The TNK2SCC board cannot be replaced with the TN51SCC or TN52SCC board. NOTE By default the NMS Server is selected. Ltd. the software of the new board needs to be upgraded. the selected device information is stored on the NMS server. 3. 5. This is to record the NE database when the SCC board is replaced for future reference. NOTE The 1X3 jumper (namely. If the NMS Server is selected. Step 3 Back up the NE database to the NMS server.. Step 2 Review and record the current alarms on the NE. cap pin 2 and pin 3 on the jumper and use a multimeter to measure the battery voltage. Then. For more information. The TN52SCC can be used to replace the TN51SCC. The TN51SCC cannot be used to replace the TN52SCC. Make sure that pin 1 and pin 2 of this jumper are capped. Software upgrade is required for the replacement. the TN51SCC board can be used to replace the TN11SCC board.. 1. When ASON is enabled. Table 6-1 Version description of the SCC Item Replacement Description When ASON is not enabled. In the Main Topology view. Select the option NMS Server or NMS Client to backup the selected device information. the active and standby SCC boards of the different types cannot be used at the same time..OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 6 Replacing the SCC Board with One of a Different PCB Version Procedure Step 1 Select a spare SCC board as the replacement SCC board by referring to the following table. 4. to open the Backup dialog. The TN52SCC can be used to replace the TN11SCC. NOTE The Backup Information tab is unavailable when multiple devices are selected. choose Administration > NE Software Management > NE Data Backup/Restoration from the Main Menu. The TN51SCC cannot be used to replace the TN11SCC. refer to "Querying the Current Alarms" of the Supporting Tasks. After replacement. the battery jumper) on the SCC board is used to enable or disable the power supply from the battery. Optional: If the NMS Client is selected.

Step 5 If the board to be replaced is the active board. Remove the jumper caps which are shown in Step 8. 1. 2. In the Main Topology. The NE Explorer window is displayed. 1.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 6 Replacing the SCC Board with One of a Different PCB Version 6. Step 6 If the board to be replaced is the working board. For details about indicator definitions. In Board 1+1 Protection. Click Start to start the backup operation for the selected device(s). 122 . NOTE After the four jumpers are set and the SCC board is inserted to the slot. if the U2000 reports a SWDL_PKG_NOBDSOFT alarm. the database on the new SCC board is cleared. Choose Configuration > Board 1+1 Protection from the Function Tree. click the NE and choose Configuration > Board 1+1 Protection from the Function Tree. Step 7 Inform the onsite maintenance engineer and replace the board. In this manner. Select Working/Protection Switching from the shortcut menu. Set the BIOS running mode of the spare SCC board to 1111 to clear the database in the flash memory. Step 10 Wait for ten minutes. If the indicator gives abnormal indication. On the NE View tab page. right-click the desired SCC Board 1+1 Protection. refer to "Replacing a Board" of the Supporting Tasks. Query the alarms and performance events on the U2000. go to Step 7. Step 4 Follow the steps below to query the working state of the board to be replaced. or replace the board again. Click OK in the window displayed. 3. The switching is successful.pkg file in the NEName/ yyyymmddhhmmss directory. Click Query. It takes 90 minutes for a board to work normally after the board is inserted. "NEName" indicates the name of the NE. and "hhmmss" indicates the time when the backup is created. the switching is successful. Ltd. When the backup operation is successful. Check if services are normal. For details. the NMS creates the dbf. If services are normal. Insert the spare SCC board to the slot housing the original SCC board. right-click the desire NE and click NE Explorer from the shortcut menu. Ensure that the STAT indicator is steady green. you must wait approximately 15 minutes to allow the database to clear. see Upgrade Guide. 2. 4. see "Indicators" of the Hardware Description. 5. software upgrade is required for the replacement. the backup progress is displayed. If the Active Board is not the board to be replaced. Otherwise. In the NE Explorer. For more information regarding how to replace a board. remove the board. follow the steps below to perform an active/ standby switching on the U2000. you need to reinsert the board. Step 9 After the database of the SCC board is cleared completely. go to Step 6. 2. there must be no new abnormal alarms or performances. 7. Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 1. Step 8 Set the four jumpers on the spare SCC board so as to set the BIOS running mode of the board and then insert it to the slot housing the original SCC board. "yyyymmdd" indicates the date when the backup is created. After that. Figure 6-4 shows the settings of the four jumpers on the SCC board. Step 11 Review the indicators of the new board.. reinsert this SCC board to the slot. Click Query.

1. Step 13 Optional: Follow the steps below to switch the active/standby state of the SCC boards back to the original state. Choose Configuration > Board 1+1 Protection from the Function Tree. Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Check the software information of the new SCC against the original data. Synchronize the NE time with the NMS server time. NOTE If you click Cancel. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. NOTE After you start the new SCC board. Perform a switching test. the Running Status of the optical NE is displayed. the U2000 will report a WRG_BD_TYPE alarm. 3. Step 12 Set Replace Board Type on the U2000. The data include saving mode. Ltd. right-click the desire NE and click NE Explorer from the shortcut menu. a prompt appears asking you whether to immediately upload the NE data. but you need to manually upload the NE data later. Click OK. Enable the NE performance monitoring. Check the alarm suppression setting data against the original data. 2. 2. 2. 4. right-click the desired SCC board. In the Main Topology. Select Restore Working/Protection from the shortcut menu. The dialog box of Replacement Board Type is displayed. Check the NE alarm attribute data against the original data. the board is successfully upgraded. you can perform the preceding step to initiate active/standby switching. the system automatically synchronizes the data between the existing SCC board and the new SCC board. In the NE Panel tab. Select the desired NE. 1. After the replacement. Click OK in the window displayed. Click OK. select the name of the target board to be replaced within the Usable Board Type. NOTE If you click Cancel. 6. right-click SCC Board 1+1 Protection. the WRG_BD_TYPE alarm is cleared.. After data backup completes. Step 14 Check and set the other parameters on the U2000 to ensure that the parameter values of the new board are the same as the original data. but you need to manually upload the NE data later. 5. 3. 6. Then. In Board 1+1 Protection. 5. Click OK. The NE Explorer window is displayed. Check whether the switching state is correct. the board is successfully upgraded. 4. 1. Double-click the optical NE icon in the Main Topology. Click Close in the displayed Result dialog box.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement NOTE 6 Replacing the SCC Board with One of a Different PCB Version After the new board works normally. 123 . 3. reversion mode and delayed report. A prompt is displayed telling you that fibers on the board will be deleted. NOTE After changing the board type by setting Replace Board Type on the U2000. Click OK to confirm the uploading of the NE data again.

Click OK. the battery of the SCC board is abnormal. use a multimeter to measure the battery voltage. If the POWER_FAIL alarm occurs. see "Indicators" of the Hardware Description. Step 15 Check the indicators of the new board. or replace the board again. NOTE After replacing the SCC is replaced. If the voltage is lower than 3 V. If the indicator gives abnormal indication. Record the current alarms of the NE. or rightclick to choose Save > Save All Records from the shortcut menu to save the current alarms of the NE. 6. you can restore the NE database from the NMS after replacing the SCC board. In this manner.2. If yes. Step 17 Repeat the preceding steps to replace the other SCC board in the protection group and ensure that the two SCC boards are of the same type after the replacement. you can back up the NE database to the NMS. Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. ----End 6. The battery is fixed on the board and cannot be replaced. The board must be replaced. In the Main Topology view. check whether the jumper cap is correctly placed over the battery jumper. Step 16 Querying the current alarms of the NE by using the U2000.6 V. the battery is out of work. NOTE You can select the desired alarms and right-click to choose Save > Save Selected Records. For the indicator definitions.2 Replacing the Unprotected SCC Board in a Master Subrack This section describes how to replace an SCC board in a master subrack when no protection is configured for the SCC board. 3. see iManager U2000 Operator Guide for NG WDM NE Management. 124 . you need to reinsert the board. Ensure that the STAT indicator is steady on green. Ltd. Click the Basic Setting and Alarm Source tabs in turn on the Filter dialog box to set the filter conditions for the current alarms. CAUTION The standard voltage of the battery is 3. ensure that the monitoring of the POWER_FAIL alarm is enabled.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement NOTE 6 Replacing the SCC Board with One of a Different PCB Version For details to set these parameters. 4. choose Fault > Browse Current Alarm from the Main Menu.1 Replacing the SCC Board with the Database Backed Up to the NMS Before replacing an SCC board.. 1. 2. and the alarm parameter is 0x5 0xff 0xff 0xff 0xff.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd. The settings of the four jumpers can be arranged in 16 combinations. Impact on System Replacing the SCC board does not affect traditional services. You can clear the database by setting the BIOS running mode by using four jumpers on the replacement SCC board. replacing the SCC in an NE interrupts the communication between the NE and the U2000. and Materials ESD bag.1 Setting the Battery Jumper on the SCC. replacing the SCC in an NE interrupts the communication between the NE and the U2000. U2000. SCC 1+1 protection cannot be configured. The setting of each of the four jumpers corresponds to a binary value. 03. see U2000 NE Software Management. The figure below shows the four jumpers for setting the BIOS running mode and the battery jumper on an SCC board. The default setting of the four jumpers is 0000. set the battery jumper on the spare SCC board with reference to 4. The impact caused by replacing an SCC without protection is as follows: l For the OptiX OSN 8800 T32. The four jumpers for setting the BIOS running mode are arranged from high order to low order and identified as 04. multimeter.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 6 Replacing the SCC Board with One of a Different PCB Version Prerequisite l l You must be an NM user with "NE and network operator" authority or higher. representing 0 to 15 in the decimal system. For the OptiX OSN 6800. When IU17 is occupied by another board. In this case. When a jumper is capped. the setting corresponds to binary 1. SCC 1+1 protection cannot be configured. 125 . You must clear the database on the spare SCC board before replacing the replacement board. For details. the SCC is housed in IU18 by default. The FTP/TFTP/SFTP server is configured and the FTP/TFTP/SFTP service is started. but ASON services may be affected for a short time when configurations are restored by downloading the database. and 01. Equipment. In this case. When a jumper is not capped. the SCC is housed in IU28 by default. the setting corresponds to binary 0. either 0 or 1. 02.. l Tools. Web LCT Background Information Before replacing an SCC board with a spare SCC board. If another board is installed in IU11.

.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 6 Replacing the SCC Board with One of a Different PCB Version Figure 6-5 Position of the BIOS running mode jumper on the TN11SCC CPU 01020304 CF Card BIOS Running Mode Battery jumper 1 2 3 Battery jumper Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 126 . Ltd.

Ltd.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 6 Replacing the SCC Board with One of a Different PCB Version Figure 6-6 Position of the BIOS running mode jumper on the TN51SCC BIOS Running Mode Power Supply 04 03 02 01 U45 J42 J12 U42 Battery Jumper J1 321 CPU CF Card Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.. 127 .

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 6 Replacing the SCC Board with One of a Different PCB Version Figure 6-7 Position of the BIOS running mode jumper on the TN52SCC BIOS Running Mode Power Supply Battery Jumper 3 2 1 J1 U33 U18 01 02 03 04 J11 CF Card Figure 6-8 Setting the BIOS running mode to 1011 51SCC 01 04 03 02 01 11SCC 52SCC 02 03 04 01 02 03 04 Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd.. 128 .

Operations on the U2000 must be performed in the network management center. Otherwise. Operations on the Web LCT must be performed on site. Ltd. the Node ID of the NE must be set according to the original data after the SCC is replaced. Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. l l Procedure Step 1 Select a spare SCC board as the replacement SCC board by referring to the following table. 129 . the NE database and ASON service cannot be restored.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 6 Replacing the SCC Board with One of a Different PCB Version Figure 6-9 Setting the BIOS running mode to 1010 51SCC 01 04 03 02 01 11SCC 52SCC 02 03 04 01 02 03 04 Precautions CAUTION l If the NE where the SCC to be replaced resides is an ASON NE..

the software of the new board needs to be upgraded. 6. NOTE The Backup Information tab is unavailable when multiple devices are selected. Ltd. 4..OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 6 Replacing the SCC Board with One of a Different PCB Version Table 6-2 Version description of the SCC Item Replacement Description When ASON is not enabled. cap pin 2 and pin 3 on the jumper and use a multimeter to measure the battery voltage. refer to "Querying the Current Alarms" of the Supporting Tasks.pkg file in the NEName/ yyyymmddhhmmss directory. the backup progress is displayed. the active and standby SCC boards of the different types cannot be used at the same time. NOTE If two SCC boards need to be configured on the subrack. The TNK2SCC board cannot be replaced with the TN51SCC or TN52SCC board. 130 Issue 02 (2011-10-31) . The TN11SCC cannot be used to replace the TN51SCC and the TN52SCC. If the NMS Server is selected. Step 2 Review and record the current alarms on the NE. the selected device information is stored on the NMS server. For more information. NOTE By default the NMS Server is selected. Software upgrade is required for the replacement. The TN51SCC cannot be used to replace the TN11SCC. Optional: If the NMS Client is selected. the battery jumper) on the SCC board is used to enable or disable the power supply from the battery. NOTE The 1X3 jumper (namely. When ASON is enabled.. Make sure that pin 1 and pin 2 of this jumper are capped. The TN51SCC cannot be used to replace the TN52SCC. When the backup operation is successful. Select the option NMS Server or NMS Client to backup the selected device information. 7. click data have to be backed up. The TN52SCC can be used to replace the TN11SCC. The SCC board needs to be replaced. 1. 3. the battery is out of work. "NEName" indicates the name of the NE. On the NE View tab page. This is to record the NE database when the SCC board is faulty for future reference. 2. Select Backup. 5. The TN52SCC can be used to replace the TN51SCC. After replacement. the TN51SCC board can be used to replace the TN11SCC board. If the voltage is lower than 3 V. choose Administration > NE Software Management > NE Data Backup/Restoration from the Main Menu. "yyyymmdd" Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Then. Right click the device(s) that you want to backup in the NE View table. In the Main Topology view. to select the location where the device Click Start to start the backup operation for the selected device(s). to open the Backup dialog. Step 3 Back up the NE database to the NMS server.. the NMS creates the dbf.

Record NE communication parameters such as the IP address and the subnet mask in case you need them for parameter restoration. 2. In the NE Explorer. 1. disconnect the NE from the computer where the U2000 (hereinafter the computer is referred to as U2000) is installed. For the settings of the four jumpers on the SCC board. Select Communication > Communication Parameters from Function Tree. Step 4 Follow the steps below to query the system to obtain the user data of the NE. Insert the spare SCC board to the slot housing the original SCC board. For details about how to remove a board. Record the NE user data returned by the system for future restoration of the NE user data. 131 2. reinsert the new SCC board to the slot. query and record the node ID of the NE. Issue 02 (2011-10-31) . Figure 6-8 shows the settings of the four jumpers on the SCC board. That is. 2. Step 9 After the database of the SCC board is cleared completely. and record the node ID. Step 6 If the NE is an ASON NE. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Select the NE you just created. Wait for a few minutes until the PROG indicator is green and slowly flashes. Step 10 After the new SCC board is started. remove the board. Connect the Web LCT to NM_ETH1. connect the Web LCT to the NE. select an NE and choose Security > NE User Management from the Function Tree. After that. 2. 1. the database on the new SCC board is cleared. Disconnect the cables from the NM_ETH1 and NM_ETH2 ports (if connected). reinsert this SCC board to the slot. 1. see "Replacing a Board" of the Supporting Tasks. Set the BIOS running mode of the spare SCC board to 1011 to clear the database in the flash memory. Step 8 Set the four jumpers on the spare SCC board so as to set the BIOS running mode of the board and then insert it to the slot housing the original SCC board. 3. the PROG indicator on the SCC board is constantly green. Step 5 Follow the steps below to query the NE communication parameters. Modify the NE attribute to restore the communication between the NE and the U2000. Click Query. which indicates that the database is being cleared. and click the NE Explorer. Click Query. Remove the spare SCC board and then set its BIOS running mode to 1010 to clear the system parameter area. 3. NOTE After the four BIOS jumpers are set and you install the SCC board in the slot. which indicates that the database is cleared completely. 3. 2. Step 7 Inform the onsite maintenance engineer and remove the board. and "hhmmss" indicates the time when the backup is created. the Web LCT cannot be connected to the NE. Ltd. In this manner. 3. 3. see Figure 6-9.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 6 Replacing the SCC Board with One of a Different PCB Version indicates the date when the backup is created.. 1. Remove the jumper caps which are shown in Step 8. If the IP address of the Web LCT and the NE IP address are in different network segments. In the NE Explorer. 1. select an NE and choose ASON > ASON Feature Management from the Function Tree. Click the Node ID Management tab. After that. Wait for a few minutes until the PROG indicator blinks green. Set the IP address of the Web LCT to ensure that Web LCT is in the same IP subnet segment as the NE IP address.

7. NOTE You can repeat step 3 through 5 to add multiple search domains. 4. NOTE l The NE search function searches out only the NEs in the specified network segment.*. After the search is complete. you can click End Search. 6. and the default IP subnet segment of the board is 129. l When the search is in progress. In the NE Login dialog box that is displayed. When this occurs. Click NE Search > Advanced Search in the NE List. and click Apply. 132 . Click OK after the warning dialog box pops up. In the NE Explorer. 9. Set Domain Type to GNE IP Domain or GNE IP Address. The Manage Domain Search dialog box is displayed. 3. 5. 1. NOTE If the NE IP addresses before and after the modification are in different network segments. If you select the Use the user name and password that was used last time check box. Click Cancel to exit the Manage Domain Search dialog box.*. 5. Enter the IP Address. you can log in to multiple NEs at a time by entering the user name and password only in the first line. and then click OK. Click OK. If you select the Use same user name and password to login check box. Click OK. The Search NE dialog box is displayed.9. TIP You can select multiple NEs at a time by concurrently pressing Shift. Step 11 Create the NE by using the Web LCT. the Web LCT cannot be connected to the NE. Click Add. and the New Domain dialog box is displayed. 8. select Communication > Communication Parameters from Function Tree. enter lct and password in the User Name and Password fields.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement NOTE 6 Replacing the SCC Board with One of a Different PCB Version The new board is initiated at factory. A prompt message is displayed. and enter an IP address in the Domain Address field. 4. Select the NE that you want to log in and click NE Login in the lower right corner or rightclick the NE and choose NE Login. Click Close after the Result dialog box is displayed. Select appropriate network segment IP addresses within the Domain and click Search. 2. 4. Step 12 Modify the NE IP based on the original information by using the Web LCT. select an NE from the list and click Add NE. and the initial password admin. 2. Click OK after the warning dialog box about communication interruption between NEs pops up. Step 13 Modify the gateway IP based on the original information by using the Web LCT. Log in the Web LCT with the user name admin. 1. Ltd.. you do not need to enter the use name and password and the system automatically uses the user name and password for login last time. Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Click Manage Domain. set the IP address of the Web LCT in the same network segment as the NE IP address. indicating that the NE is successfully added. 3.

It can consist of letters. 3. Click OK after the Warning dialogue box pops up that prompts "The NE communication parameters have been changed. Click Query. choose Configuration > NE Attribute from the Function Tree. 3. At this time.. Click Close. A warning dialog box is displayed. Enter the Subnet Mask. In the NE Explorer. 2. Check that all NE communication parameters should be the same with the original ones. 7. Step 18 If the NE is an ASON NE. Are you sure to continue? ". 1. and click the NE Explorer. The password is a string of 6-16 characters. Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 3. 133 . Are you sure to send it? ". 3. Are you sure to continue? ". and then click OK. Enter the password in the New Password field and enter it again in the Confirm Password field. Select Communication > Communication Parameters from Function Tree. Enter the Gateway IP Address. All created users of the NE are displayed in NE User Management Table. select the NE and choose Security > NE User Management from the Function Tree.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 6 Replacing the SCC Board with One of a Different PCB Version 1. In the NE Explorer. NOTE You also need to set the Whether the password is allowed to be modified immediately parameter. enter values in the New ID and New Extended ID fields. the NE is unreachable. 2. Click OK after the Warning dialogue box pops up that prompts "Incorrect operations will interrupt the communication between NEs. and click Apply. Select Communication > Communication Parameters from Function Tree. 4. Click OK. Click OK after the Warning dialogue box pops up that prompts "The NE communication parameters have been changed. Select the NE you just created. In the NE Explorer. Are you sure to send it? ". Select the User Level as needed. 2. 4. 2. Enter the NE user name in the NE User field. Step 16 Check the NE communication parameters by using the Web LCT. Step 17 Create an NE's user by using the Web LCT. Click OK after the Warning dialogue box pops up that prompts "Incorrect operations will interrupt the communication between NEs. 2. 5. Ltd. Click Create and the Add NE User dialog box is displayed. In the Modify NE ID dialog box that is displayed. symbols and numerals. Click Modify NE ID. Select Communication > Communication Parameters from Function Tree. A dialog box indicating that the operation is successful is displayed. 4. click Close to complete changing the NE ID. 1. 3. 6. 1. 1. In the NE Explorer. and click Apply. and must contain at least one letter and one numeral. Step 14 Modify the subnet mask based on the original information by using the Web LCT. modify the node ID of the NE by using the Web LCT. click Yes. and the Operation Result dialog box is displayed. Step 15 Modify the NE ID and extended ID based on the original information by using the Web LCT.

Select NMS Server or NMS Client to recover the backup file for the selected device(s). Step 20 If the software version of the spare SCC board is different from the software version of the SCC board to be replaced. 7. see the Upgrade Guide.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 6 Replacing the SCC Board with One of a Different PCB Version 1.6. By default NMS Server is selected.. select the file to be recovered. a prompt appears telling you that the operation was successful. Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Click Start. Step 19 Recover the network connection of the NE. In the Main Topology view. Click Query to view the current node ID of the NE. Right click the device(s) that you want to recover in the NE View table. you can use the original user name and password to access the NE by using the U2000. 4. The selected backup file path is displayed in the File To Be Recovered field. 3. NOTE 5. to select the backup file from the l If NMS Client is selected. 134 . After you confirm the operation twice. For details. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 6. If the backup file is not listed in the File Name drop-down list. 2. go to Step 21. In the NE Explorer. Step 22 Restore the NE database from the NMS server. to select the backup file in the Select File dialog box.. Select Recover. l If NMS Server is selected. 2. In the File Name drop-down list.. as shown below. and turn to 22. Ensure that the software version of the spare SCC board is consistent with that of the SCC board to be replaced. you need to select the appropriate backup file from the NMS server. Step 21 Upgrade or downgrade the software of the spare SCC board. NOTE After recovering the network connection of the NE. If the backup file is not listed in the File Name drop-down list. Remove the network cable which connected the NM_ETH1 port to the Web LCT. Ltd. choose Administration > NE Software Management > NE Data Backup/Restoration from the Main Menu.. select an NE and choose ASON > ASON Feature Management from the Function Tree. Double-click the Node ID field to enter a node ID for the NE. you need to click NMS Client.. to open the Recover dialog. The selected backup file path from the NMS Server or NMS Client is displayed in the File Name dropdown list. 1. NOTE After this procedure. Click Apply. The selected backup file path is displayed in the File To Be Recovered field. select the file to be recovered. Click the Node ID Management tab. 4. click Browse. the U2000 will report a WRG_BD_TYPE alarm. Connect the network cable removed in the Step 10. the Operation Confirmation dialog box is displayed. 3. Click OK. NOTE You can also choose Configuration > WDM ASON > ASON Topology Management from the main menu and set the NE node ID. 2. 1. otherwise go to Step 22.

2. the WRG_BD_TYPE alarm is cleared. a prompt appears asking you whether to immediately upload the NE data. but you need to manually upload the NE data later. do not modify the NE configurations to avoid database inconsistency. NOTE After changing the board type by setting Replace Board Type on the U2000. Click OK. select the name of the target board to be replaced within the Usable Board Type. Click Close in the displayed Result dialog box. Click OK to confirm the uploading of the NE data again. the board is successfully upgraded. In the NE Panel tab. NOTE If you click Cancel. 4. the Running Status of the optical NE is displayed. NOTE If you click Cancel. right-click the desired SCC board.. Click Start to start the database activation process. The dialog box of Replacement Board Type is displayed. In the Main Topology view. NOTE The operation on the U2000 may bring a service interruption. Ltd. CAUTION During the process from backing up databases to restoring databases.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 6 Replacing the SCC Board with One of a Different PCB Version 8. NOTE You must activate the NE database within five minutes after restoring it. 6. 2. a pop-up menu is displayed. click Yes to start the recover operation. 5. 1. A prompt is displayed telling you that fibers on the board will be deleted. After the replacement. Select Activate Database. 3. Right-click the NE. Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co... and then this icon is changed to . Then. Double-click the optical NE icon in the Main Topology. Select the NE where the SCC that has been replaced resides in the NE View table. Step 24 Set Replace Board Type on the U2000. 4. 5. 3. Select the desired NE. choose Administration > NE Software Management > NE Data Backup/Restoration from the Main Menu. Optional: Click the icon in Deliver To Board Activate. Click OK. In the Operation Confirmation dialog. 135 . Step 23 Activate the NE database. and the Activate Database dialog box is displayed. Step 25 Check and set the other parameters on the U2000 to ensure that the parameter values of the new board are the same as the original data. Click OK. 1.. but you need to manually upload the NE data later. The progress of the database activation is displayed on the NE View tab. the board is successfully upgraded. The recover operation status is displayed in the NE View table.

Configure the OSPF IP address of the NE if the site complies with the models for separated optical and electrical NEs and the NE is on an optical-layer ASON network. 1. Record the current alarms of the NE. Click OK. If the POWER_FAIL alarm occurs. you can restore the NE database from the CF card after replacing the SCC board. use a multimeter to measure the battery voltage. 2. Step 26 Querying the current alarms of the NE by using the U2000. The data include saving mode. ensure that the monitoring of the POWER_FAIL alarm is enabled. In this manner. reversion mode and delayed report. Check the alarm suppression setting data against the original data. The battery is fixed on the board and cannot be replaced. 136 . The board must be replaced.. 6. 2. CAUTION The standard voltage of the battery is 3.2. 3.2 Replacing the SCC Board with the Database Backed Up to a CF Card When replacing an SCC board. If the voltage is lower than 3 V. see iManager U2000 Operator Guide for NG WDM NE Management. Prerequisite l You must be an NM user with "NE and network operator" authority or higher. 5. Enable the NE performance monitoring. If yes. and the alarm parameter is 0x5 0xff 0xff 0xff 0xff. choose Fault > Browse Current Alarm from the Main Menu. check whether the jumper cap is correctly placed over the battery jumper. Check the NE alarm attribute data against the original data. ----End 6. or rightclick to choose Save > Save All Records from the shortcut menu to save the current alarms of the NE. 4. Check the software information of the new SCC against the original data. Synchronize the NE time with the NMS server time. NOTE After replacing the SCC is replaced. the battery is out of work. 4.6 V. NOTE You can select the desired alarms and right-click to choose Save > Save Selected Records. Ltd. Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 3. In the Main Topology view. the battery of the SCC board is abnormal.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 6 Replacing the SCC Board with One of a Different PCB Version 1. you can back up the NE database to a CF card. Click the Basic Setting and Alarm Source tabs in turn on the Filter dialog box to set the filter conditions for the current alarms. NOTE For details to set these parameters.

Ltd.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 6 Replacing the SCC Board with One of a Different PCB Version Impact on System Replacing the SCC board does not affect traditional services. the setting corresponds to binary 1. For the OptiX OSN 6800. and Materials ESD bag. U2000. The settings of the four jumpers can be arranged in 16 combinations. multimeter. If another board is installed in IU11. 137 . When a jumper is not capped. the SCC is housed in IU28 by default. 02. but ASON services may be affected for a short time when configurations are restored by downloading the database. When IU17 is occupied by another board. Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. In this case. When a jumper is capped. 03. You must clear the database on the spare SCC board before replacing the replacement board. You can clear the database by setting the BIOS running mode by using four jumpers on the replacement SCC board. replacing the SCC in an NE interrupts the communication between the NE and the U2000. and 01. replacing the SCC in an NE interrupts the communication between the NE and the U2000. The four jumpers for setting the BIOS running mode are arranged from high order to low order and identified as 04. Web LCT Background Information Before replacing an SCC board with a spare SCC board. Equipment. SCC 1+1 protection cannot be configured. The default setting of the four jumpers is 0000. the setting corresponds to binary 0. SCC 1+1 protection cannot be configured. the SCC is housed in IU18 by default. The setting of each of the four jumpers corresponds to a binary value. either 0 or 1. l Tools.. The impact caused by replacing an SCC without protection is as follows: l For the OptiX OSN 8800 T32. set the battery jumper on the spare SCC board with reference to 4.1 Setting the Battery Jumper on the SCC. In this case. The figure below shows the four jumpers for setting the BIOS running mode and the battery jumper on an SCC board. representing 0 to 15 in the decimal system.

138 .OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 6 Replacing the SCC Board with One of a Different PCB Version Figure 6-10 Position of the BIOS running mode jumper on the TN11SCC CPU 01020304 CF Card BIOS Running Mode Battery jumper 1 2 3 Battery jumper Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.. Ltd.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 6 Replacing the SCC Board with One of a Different PCB Version Figure 6-11 Position of the BIOS running mode jumper on the TN51SCC BIOS Running Mode Power Supply 04 03 02 01 U45 J42 J12 U42 Battery Jumper J1 321 CPU CF Card Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 139 .. Ltd.

140 . Ltd..OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 6 Replacing the SCC Board with One of a Different PCB Version Figure 6-12 Position of the BIOS running mode jumper on the TN52SCC BIOS Running Mode Power Supply Battery Jumper 3 2 1 J1 U33 U18 01 02 03 04 J11 CF Card Figure 6-13 Setting the BIOS running mode to 1011 51SCC 01 04 03 02 01 11SCC 52SCC 02 03 04 01 02 03 04 Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 6 Replacing the SCC Board with One of a Different PCB Version Figure 6-14 Setting the BIOS running mode to 1010 51SCC 01 04 03 02 01 11SCC 52SCC 02 03 04 01 02 03 04 Precautions CAUTION l If the NE where the SCC to be replaced resides is an ASON NE. l After the database of the NE is restored on the CF card. the Node ID of the NE must be set according to the original data after the SCC is replaced. the original database of the NE cannot be restored. the data automatically saved on the NE overwrites the original data stored on the CF card.. the restoration must be completed within two hours after you install the replacement SCC is installed. If you wait more than two hours to restore the database of the NE on the CF card. Ltd. Procedure Step 1 Select a spare SCC board as the replacement SCC board by referring to the following table. If the original data is overwritten. Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 141 . l Operations on the Web LCT must be performed on site. the ASON service cannot be restored. Otherwise. l Operations on the U2000 must be performed in the network management center.

1. Step 5 Follow the steps below to query the NE communication parameters. refer to "Querying the Current Alarms" of the Supporting Tasks. select an NE and choose Security > NE User Management from the Function Tree. 6. In the NE Explorer. NOTE If two SCC boards need to be configured on the subrack. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. The TNK2SCC board cannot be replaced with the TN51SCC or TN52SCC board. Step 4 Four minutes later. When ASON is enabled. Select Communication > Communication Parameters from Function Tree. Step 3 Backup the database on the U2000. Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Select the NE you just created. the TN51SCC board can be used to replace the TN11SCC board. Click OK in the confirmation dialog box. Record the NE user data returned by the system for future restoration of the NE user data. the battery jumper) on the SCC board is used to enable or disable the power supply from the battery. NOTE The 1X3 jumper (namely. Make sure that pin 1 and pin 2 of this jumper are capped. The TN51SCC cannot be used to replace the TN52SCC. The TN52SCC can be used to replace the TN51SCC. 142 .. Step 2 Review and record the current alarms on the NE. 4. 2. choose Configuration > NE Configuration Data Management from the Main Menu. Ltd. 3. 1. select an NE and click Select one or more NEs in the NE Configuration. 3. After replacement. The SCC board needs to be replaced. and the NE Configuration Data Management interface is displayed. the active and standby SCC boards of the different types cannot be used at the same time. the battery is out of work. 1. . If the voltage is lower than 3 V. The TN51SCC cannot be used to replace the TN11SCC. 5. Then. Click Back Up NE Data and then choose Manually Back Up Database to CF Card. and click the NE Explorer. 2. Software upgrade is required for the replacement. the software of the new board needs to be upgraded. In the Object Tree. query the system to obtain the user data of the NE following the steps below.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 6 Replacing the SCC Board with One of a Different PCB Version Table 6-3 Version description of the SCC Item Replacement Description When ASON is not enabled. The TN52SCC can be used to replace the TN11SCC. cap pin 2 and pin 3 on the jumper and use a multimeter to measure the battery voltage. 2. The TN11SCC cannot be used to replace the TN51SCC and the TN52SCC. Click Query. For more information. Click Close in the Operation Result dialog box is displayed. In the Main Topology view.

reinsert this SCC board to the slot. select an NE and choose ASON > ASON Feature Management from the Function Tree.. hold the CF card and pull the card out of the CF card slot. remove the board. 2. 1. Insert the spare SCC board to the slot housing the original SCC board. Record NE communication parameters such as the IP address and the subnet mask in case you need them for parameter restoration. In this manner. see Figure 6-14. After that.9. In the NE Explorer. 4.*. and the initial password admin. 2. NOTE Keep the CF card because it is required for NE data restoration. Disconnect the cables from the NM_ETH1 and NM_ETH2 ports (if connected). Step 11 After the new SCC board is started. For details. Wait for a few minutes until the PROG indicator is green and flashes. Click the Node ID Management tab. reinsert the new SCC board to the slot. connect the Web LCT to the NE. The new board is initiated at factory. 1. Step 6 If the NE is an ASON NE. the PROG indicator on the SCC board is constantly green. NOTE 2. Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. the Web LCT cannot be connected to the NE.*. Figure 6-13 shows the settings of the four jumpers on the SCC board. query and record the node ID of the NE. Modify the NE attribute to restore the communication between the NE and the U2000. Remove the spare SCC board and then set its BIOS running mode to 1010 to clear the system parameter area. NOTE After the four jumpers are set and the SCC board is inserted to the slot. which indicates that the database cleared completely. 3. Wait for a few minutes until the PROG indicator is green and slowly flashes. Remove the jumper caps which are shown in Step 9. Set the BIOS running mode of the spare SCC board to 1011 to clear the database in the flash memory. Step 12 Create the NE by using the Web LCT. disconnect the NE from the computer where the U2000 (hereinafter the computer is referred to as U2000) is installed. 3. Ltd. and record the node ID. 143 . Put the SCC into an ESD bag. Step 7 Remove the SCC board to be replaced. the database on the new SCC board is cleared. 1. 3. After that. Set the IP address of the Web LCT to ensure that Web LCT is in the same IP subnet segment as the NE IP address. see "Replacing a Board" of the Supporting Tasks. Step 9 Set the four jumpers on the spare SCC board so as to set the BIOS running mode of the board and then insert it to the slot housing the original SCC board. If the IP address of the Web LCT and the NE IP address are in different network segments. That is.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 6 Replacing the SCC Board with One of a Different PCB Version 3. Click Query. and the default IP subnet segment of the board is 129. Step 10 After the database of the SCC board is cleared completely. Log in the Web LCT with the user name admin. For the settings of the four jumpers on the SCC board. Connect the Web LCT to NM_ETH1. which indicates that the database is being cleared. Step 8 On the SCC board that has been removed.

. 1. 4. NOTE You can repeat step 3 through 5 to add multiple search domains. In the NE Explorer. The Search NE dialog box is displayed. 8. Select Communication > Communication Parameters from Function Tree. In the NE Explorer. and enter an IP address in the Domain Address field. 144 Issue 02 (2011-10-31) . Select appropriate network segment IP addresses within the Domain and click Search. Click Close after the Result dialog box is displayed. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 6. you can click End Search. set the IP address of the Web LCT in the same network segment as the NE IP address. When this occurs. Click Cancel to exit the Manage Domain Search dialog box. 2. and then click OK. and click Apply. Click OK after the Warning dialogue box pops up that prompts "The NE communication parameters have been changed. If you select the Use the user name and password that was used last time check box. 5.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 6 Replacing the SCC Board with One of a Different PCB Version 1. Click Add. NOTE If the NE IP addresses before and after the modification are in different network segments. 2. and click Apply. the Web LCT cannot be connected to the NE. 4. enter lct and password in the User Name and Password fields. you can log in to multiple NEs at a time by entering the user name and password only in the first line. Click OK. 5. Set Domain Type to GNE IP Domain or GNE IP Address. After the search is complete. 3. Click OK. and the New Domain dialog box is displayed. 9. Click OK after the warning dialog box about communication interruption between NEs pops up. Select the NE that you want to log in and click NE Login in the lower right corner or rightclick the NE and choose NE Login. Enter the Gateway IP Address. Step 14 Modify the gateway IP based on the original information by using the Web LCT. 3. Ltd. Step 13 Modify the NE IP based on the original information by using the Web LCT. select an NE from the list and click Add NE. 3. Enter the IP Address. select Communication > Communication Parameters from Function Tree. NOTE l The NE search function searches out only the NEs in the specified network segment. indicating that the NE is successfully added. Click Manage Domain. Click NE Search > Advanced Search in the NE List. 7. 2. The Manage Domain Search dialog box is displayed. you do not need to enter the use name and password and the system automatically uses the user name and password for login last time. l When the search is in progress. Click OK after the warning dialog box pops up. If you select the Use same user name and password to login check box. A prompt message is displayed. TIP You can select multiple NEs at a time by concurrently pressing Shift. 1. In the NE Login dialog box that is displayed. Are you sure to send it? ".

Select the NE you just created. 3. Click OK after the Warning dialogue box pops up that prompts "Incorrect operations will interrupt the communication between NEs. and the Operation Result dialog box is displayed. All created users of the NE are displayed in NE User Management Table. Check that all NE communication parameters should be the same with the original ones. Step 18 Create an NE's user by using the Web LCT. NOTE You also need to set the Whether the password is allowed to be modified immediately parameter. Click Create and the Add NE User dialog box is displayed. and click the NE Explorer. 3. 4. 7. 1.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 6 Replacing the SCC Board with One of a Different PCB Version 4. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. At this time. Select the User Level as needed. 6. click Yes. Select Communication > Communication Parameters from Function Tree. In the Modify NE ID dialog box that is displayed. symbols and numerals. Ltd. Enter the Subnet Mask. Click Query. 145 . 1. Click Close. Click OK after the Warning dialogue box pops up that prompts "The NE communication parameters have been changed. click Close to complete changing the NE ID. Select Communication > Communication Parameters from Function Tree. enter values in the New ID and New Extended ID fields. Step 17 Check the NE communication parameters by using the Web LCT. Issue 02 (2011-10-31) In the NE Explorer. 2. It can consist of letters. the NE is unreachable. The password is a string of 6-16 characters. Enter the password in the New Password field and enter it again in the Confirm Password field. 3. select an NE and choose ASON > ASON Feature Management from the Function Tree.. 5. In the NE Explorer. Are you sure to continue? ". and must contain at least one letter and one numeral. Click the Node ID Management tab. Step 19 If the NE is an ASON NE. select the NE and choose Security > NE User Management from the Function Tree. Step 15 Modify the subnet mask based on the original information by using the Web LCT. Enter the NE user name in the NE User field. and click Apply. 2. A warning dialog box is displayed. A dialog box indicating that the operation is successful is displayed. Click Modify NE ID. 2. Double-click the Node ID field to enter a node ID for the NE. 4. 3. modify the node ID of the NE by using the Web LCT. Step 16 Modify the NE ID and extended ID based on the original information by using the Web LCT. Click OK after the Warning dialogue box pops up that prompts "Incorrect operations will interrupt the communication between NEs. 1. In the NE Explorer. Are you sure to continue? ". In the NE Explorer. Click OK. 2. Are you sure to send it? ". 2. 1. 3. Click Query to view the current node ID of the NE. 1. choose Configuration > NE Attribute from the Function Tree. and then click OK.

Connect the network cable removed. Step 21 After the SCC board is started. 5. a prompt appears telling you that the operation was successful. go to Step 19. Ensure that the software version of the spare SCC board is consistent with that of the SCC board to be replaced. insert the SCC. After the NE databases are restored. Step 20 Recover the network connection of the NE. Insert the CF card that has been removed in Step 8 into the CF card slot on the SCC board. indicating that the restoration of the NE database may lead to service interruption. select an NE or multiple NEs. For details. NOTE You can also choose Configuration > WDM ASON > ASON Topology Management from the main menu and set the NE node ID. Step 25 Restore the initial database of the NE by using the U2000. Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. you need to perform warm resets on other boards. Click Restore NE Database from CF Card. Step 24 Upgrade or downgrade the software of the spare SCC board. Click OK to start to restore the NE database.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 6 Replacing the SCC Board with One of a Different PCB Version 4. In the Object Tree on the left. After you confirm the operation twice. 2. Step 26 Set Replace Board Type on the U2000. see the Upgrade Guide. 6. To ensure that the configurations in the SCC board and the configurations in other boards are consistent. remove the SCC board inserted just now. Click Apply. Ltd. the U2000 will report a WRG_BD_TYPE alarm. choose Configuration > NE Configuration Data Management from the Main Menu. The Confirm dialog box is displayed. do not modify the NE configurations to avoid database inconsistency. Step 23 If the software version of the spare SCC board is different from the software version of the SCC board to be replaced. select an NE and click In NE Configuration. 1. the NE software issues the data in the CF card to only the SCC board but not other boards.. NOTE After this procedure. and the NE Configuration Data Management interface is displayed. otherwise go to Step 25. go to Step 24. NOTE After recovering the network connection of the NE. 3. Then. 4. Click Closeafter an Operation Result dialog box is displayed. In the Main Topology view. 146 . . you can use the original user name and password to access the NE by using the U2000. NOTE 2. Pull out the network cable which connected the NM_ETH1 port to the Web LCT. 1. CAUTION During the process from backing up databases to restoring databases. Step 22 After the SCC board is started and the communication between the NE and U2000 is normal.

4. 4. right-click the desired SCC board. Click OK. the board is successfully upgraded.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 6 Replacing the SCC Board with One of a Different PCB Version 1. Enable the NE performance monitoring. 4. NOTE If you click Cancel. Configure the OSPF IP address of the NE if the site complies with the models for separated optical and electrical NEs and the NE is on an optical-layer ASON network. reversion mode and delayed report. choose Fault > Browse Current Alarm from the Main Menu. Step 27 Check and set the other parameters on the U2000 to ensure that the parameter values of the new board are the same as the original data. 3. the Running Status of the optical NE is displayed. Click OK to confirm the uploading of the NE data again. Check the NE alarm attribute data against the original data. NOTE You can select the desired alarms and right-click to choose Save > Save Selected Records. 3. Step 28 Querying the current alarms of the NE by using the U2000.. Double-click the optical NE icon in the Main Topology. but you need to manually upload the NE data later. 5. Click OK. see iManager U2000 Operator Guide for NG WDM NE Management. 5. the board is successfully upgraded. The dialog box of Replacement Board Type is displayed. Then. 1. Check the alarm suppression setting data against the original data. NOTE For details to set these parameters. Check the software information of the new SCC against the original data. select the name of the target board to be replaced within the Usable Board Type. but you need to manually upload the NE data later. The data include saving mode. NOTE After changing the board type by setting Replace Board Type on the U2000. Synchronize the NE time with the NMS server time. Ltd. Click Close in the displayed Result dialog box. or rightclick to choose Save > Save All Records from the shortcut menu to save the current alarms of the NE. 3. In the NE Panel tab. Record the current alarms of the NE. 6. 2. A prompt is displayed telling you that fibers on the board will be deleted. In the Main Topology view. 2. Click OK. 147 . 2. NOTE If you click Cancel. 1. 6. Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Select the desired NE. Click OK. Click the Basic Setting and Alarm Source tabs in turn on the Filter dialog box to set the filter conditions for the current alarms. After the replacement. a prompt appears asking you whether to immediately upload the NE data. the WRG_BD_TYPE alarm is cleared.

the SCC is housed in IU28 by default. use a multimeter to measure the battery voltage. When IU11 is not occupied by another board. The impact caused by replacing an SCC without protection is as follows: l For the OptiX OSN 8800 T32. ----End 6. the battery is out of work. the SCC is housed in IU18 by default. Ltd. U2000. it is available for another SCC to implement 1+1 protection with the SCC in IU18. ensure that the monitoring of the POWER_FAIL alarm is enabled. l Tools. Web LCT Background Information Before replacing an SCC board with a spare SCC board.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement NOTE 6 Replacing the SCC Board with One of a Different PCB Version After replacing the SCC is replaced. replacing one of the SCC in the protection group does not interrupt the communication between the NE where the SCC resides and the U2000 after a switching from this SCC to the other SCC is performed.6 V. it is available for another SCC to implement 1+1 protection with the SCC in IU28..1 Setting the Battery Jumper on the SCC. 148 . set the battery jumper on the spare SCC board with reference to 4. Equipment. If the voltage is lower than 3 V.2. Prerequisite l l You must be an NM user with "NE and network operator" authority or higher. If the POWER_FAIL alarm occurs. When IU17 is not occupied by another board. The FTP/TFTP/SFTP server is configured and the FTP/TFTP/SFTP service is started. The board must be replaced. Impact on System The replacement does not affect the existing services. and the alarm parameter is 0x5 0xff 0xff 0xff 0xff. check whether the jumper cap is correctly placed over the battery jumper. the battery of the SCC board is abnormal. In this case. Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. multimeter. For the OptiX OSN 6800. and Materials ESD bag. CAUTION The standard voltage of the battery is 3. replacing one of the SCC in the protection group does not interrupt the communication between the NE where the SCC resides and the U2000 after a switching from this SCC to the other SCC is performed. If yes. see U2000 NE Software Management. The battery is fixed on the board and cannot be replaced. For details. you can configure protection for the SCC board if the slot for housing the standby SCC board is not occupied by a service board.3 Replacing the SCC Board After Configuring SCC 1+1 Protection When replacing an SCC board. In this case.

Figure 6-15 Position of the BIOS running mode jumper on the TN11SCC CPU 01020304 CF Card BIOS Running Mode Battery jumper 1 2 3 Battery jumper Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. The default setting of the four jumpers is 0000. and 01. the setting corresponds to binary 1. representing 0 to 15 in the decimal system. The settings of the four jumpers can be arranged in 16 combinations. You can clear the database by setting the BIOS running mode by using four jumpers on the replacement SCC board. The figure below shows the four jumpers for setting the BIOS running mode and the battery jumper on an SCC board. either 0 or 1. Ltd. The setting of each of the four jumpers corresponds to a binary value. 02. the setting corresponds to binary 0. 149 . The four jumpers for setting the BIOS running mode are arranged from high order to low order and identified as 04.. 03.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 6 Replacing the SCC Board with One of a Different PCB Version You must clear the database on the spare SCC board before replacing the replacement board. When a jumper is not capped. When a jumper is capped.

. 150 .OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 6 Replacing the SCC Board with One of a Different PCB Version Figure 6-16 Position of the BIOS running mode jumper on the TN51SCC BIOS Running Mode Power Supply 04 03 02 01 U45 J42 J12 U42 Battery Jumper J1 321 CPU CF Card Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd.

.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 6 Replacing the SCC Board with One of a Different PCB Version Figure 6-17 Position of the BIOS running mode jumper on the TN52SCC BIOS Running Mode Power Supply Battery Jumper 3 2 1 J1 U33 U18 01 02 03 04 J11 CF Card Figure 6-18 Setting the BIOS running mode to 1111 51SCC 01 04 03 02 01 11SCC 52SCC 02 03 04 01 02 03 04 Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd. 151 .

2. 1. In the Main Topology view. The TN52SCC can be used to replace the TN51SCC.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 6 Replacing the SCC Board with One of a Different PCB Version Precautions CAUTION l If the NE where the SCC to be replaced resides is an ASON NE. This is to record the NE database when the SCC board is replaced for future reference. Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. The TN11SCC cannot be used to replace the TN51SCC and the TN52SCC. NOTE If two SCC boards need to be configured on the subrack. If the voltage is lower than 3 V. Operations on the U2000 must be performed in the network management center. The TN52SCC can be used to replace the TN11SCC. Software upgrade is required for the replacement. the software of the new board needs to be upgraded. After replacement. The TN51SCC cannot be used to replace the TN52SCC. NOTE The 1X3 jumper (namely. The TN51SCC cannot be used to replace the TN11SCC. Ltd. l l Procedure Step 1 Select a spare SCC board as the replacement SCC board by referring to the following table. Right click the device(s) that you want to backup in the NE View table.. Table 6-4 Version description of the SCC Item Replacement Description When ASON is not enabled. Step 2 Back up the NE database to the NMS server. Make sure that pin 1 and pin 2 of this jumper are capped. choose Administration > NE Software Management > NE Data Backup/Restoration from the Main Menu. The SCC board needs to be replaced. the NE database and ASON service cannot be restored. the TN51SCC board can be used to replace the TN11SCC board. the active and standby SCC boards of the different types cannot be used at the same time. the battery jumper) on the SCC board is used to enable or disable the power supply from the battery. Operations on the Web LCT must be performed on site. cap pin 2 and pin 3 on the jumper and use a multimeter to measure the battery voltage. When ASON is enabled. Then. the Node ID of the NE must be set according to the original data after the SCC is replaced. NOTE The Backup Information tab is unavailable when multiple devices are selected. The TNK2SCC board cannot be replaced with the TN51SCC or TN52SCC board. 152 . the battery is out of work. Otherwise.

Remove the jumper caps which are shown in Step 3. "NEName" indicates the name of the NE. the database on the new SCC board is cleared. 5. the selected device information is stored on the NMS server. you must wait approximately 15 minutes to allow the database to clear. add the logical board of the SCC board on the U2000. the NMS creates the dbf. If the NMS Server is selected. Insert the spare SCC board to the slot housing the original SCC board. Step 4 After the database of the SCC board is cleared completely. Click OK in the window displayed. For details about the indicators. right-click the desired SCC Board 1+1 Protection. NOTE After inserting the spare SCC board to the specified slot for a standby SCC board. reinsert this SCC board to the slot. Ltd. Set the BIOS running mode of the spare SCC board to 1111 to clear the database in the flash memory. 1. 1. Select Working/Protection Switching from the shortcut menu. In Board 1+1 Protection. 3. In this manner. The NE Explorer window is displayed. Optional: If the NMS Client is selected. remove the board. Ensure that the STAT indicator is steady green.. "yyyymmdd" indicates the date when the backup is created. the switching is successful. 2. Select Backup. After the SCC board gets started. Choose Configuration > Board 1+1 Protection from the Function Tree. you need to add a corresponding logical board on the U2000. After that. Then. 4. there must be no new abnormal alarms or performances. NOTE After the four jumpers are set and the SCC board is inserted to the slot. If the indicator is not steady green. and "hhmmss" indicates the time when the backup is created. Step 6 Wait for 90 minutes.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 6 Replacing the SCC Board with One of a Different PCB Version 3. The switching is successful. 153 4. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. the backup progress is displayed. Step 5 Check the indicators of the new SCC board. In the Main Topology. the system automatically configures 1+1 protection for the SCC. Click Query. Select the option NMS Server or NMS Client to backup the selected device information. When the backup operation is successful. If services are normal. see "Indicators" of the Hardware Description. NOTE By default the NMS Server is selected.. Check if services are normal. If the Active Board is not the board to be replaced. Step 3 Set the four jumpers on the spare SCC board so as to set the BIOS running mode of the board and then insert it to the specified slot for a standby SCC board.. Issue 02 (2011-10-31) . to select the location where the device Click Start to start the backup operation for the selected device(s). right-click the desire NE and click NE Explorer from the shortcut menu. 6. On the NE View tab page. to open the Backup dialog. 5. 7. 2. Step 7 Follow the steps below to perform an active/standby switching on the U2000. click data have to be backed up. Query the alarms and performance events on the U2000. you need to reinsert the board or select a new replacement board. It takes 90 minutes for a board to work normally after being inserted. Figure 6-18 shows the settings of the four jumpers on the SCC board.pkg file in the NEName/ yyyymmddhhmmss directory.

After data backup completes.. or rightclick to choose Save > Save All Records from the shortcut menu to save the current alarms of the NE. Ltd. 1. you can perform the preceding step to initiate active/standby switching. In the Main Topology view. The board must be replaced. ensure that the monitoring of the POWER_FAIL alarm is enabled. 3. Click the Basic Setting and Alarm Source tabs in turn on the Filter dialog box to set the filter conditions for the current alarms. ----End 6. Check the NE alarm attribute data against the original data.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement NOTE 6 Replacing the SCC Board with One of a Different PCB Version After you start the new SCC board. 2. If yes. Step 10 Remove the SCC board to be replaced and put it in an ESD bag. the battery is out of work. 2. Record the current alarms of the NE. 1. Step 9 Querying the current alarms of the NE by using the U2000. 5. Step 8 Check and set the other parameters on the U2000 to ensure that the parameter values of the new board are the same as the original data. The battery is fixed on the board and cannot be replaced. 4. The data include saving mode. see iManager U2000 Operator Guide for NG WDM NE Management.3 Replacing the SCC Board in a Slave Subrack This section describes how to replace an SCC board in a slave subrack. If the voltage is lower than 3 V. 4. reversion mode and delayed report. check whether the jumper cap is correctly placed over the battery jumper. Enable the NE performance monitoring. choose Fault > Browse Current Alarm from the Main Menu. Check the software information of the new SCC against the original data. Click OK. NOTE For details to set these parameters. Check the alarm suppression setting data against the original data. use a multimeter to measure the battery voltage. the battery of the SCC board is abnormal. on the U2000. Synchronize the NE time with the NMS server time. If the POWER_FAIL alarm occurs. 3. NOTE You can select the desired alarms and right-click to choose Save > Save Selected Records. Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. the system automatically synchronizes the data between the existing SCC board and the new SCC board. delete the logical board of the SCC board to be replaced. NOTE After replacing the SCC is replaced. 154 .6 V. CAUTION The standard voltage of the battery is 3. and the alarm parameter is 0x5 0xff 0xff 0xff 0xff. Then.

If an SCC is not configured with 1+1 protection.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 6 Replacing the SCC Board with One of a Different PCB Version Prerequisite You must be an NMS user with "NE and network operator" authority or higher. Certain optical boards in the slave subrack housing the SCC board to be replaced go offline and cannot be managed. the battery jumper on the spare SCC board must be set with reference to 4. The default setting of the four jumpers is 0000. U2000. The settings of the four jumpers can be arranged in 16 combinations. representing 0 to 15 in the decimal system. either 0 or 1. The ESC and OSC communication of the subrack where the replacement SCC resides fails. When a jumper is capped. Ltd. You must clear the database on the spare SCC board before replacing the replacement board. the services on these boards are not affected.1 Setting the Battery Jumper on the SCC. and Materials ESD bag. The figure below shows the four jumpers for setting the BIOS running mode and the battery jumper on an SCC board. You can clear the database by setting the BIOS running mode by using four jumpers on the replacement SCC board. the setting corresponds to binary 1.. and 01. 02. If the SCC is configured with 1+1 protection. Impact on System Replacing the SCC does not affect the existing services. the setting corresponds to binary 0. Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. When a jumper is not capped. replacing the SCC has the following effects: l l l l l The fan is automatically changed to the "High Speed" mode. 155 . Tools. The four jumpers for setting the BIOS running mode are arranged from high order to low order and identified as 04. 03. The setting of each of the four jumpers corresponds to a binary value. replacing the SCC does not affect the system. The subrack whose ID conflicts with the ID of the subrack where the replacement SCC resides cannot be detected. Equipment. The POWER_FAIL alarm of the subrack where the replacement SCC resides cannot be reported. multimeter Background Information Before an SCC board is replaced with a spare board. however.

. 156 . Ltd.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 6 Replacing the SCC Board with One of a Different PCB Version Figure 6-19 Position of the BIOS running mode jumper on the TN11SCC CPU 01020304 CF Card BIOS Running Mode Battery jumper 1 2 3 Battery jumper Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.

Ltd.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 6 Replacing the SCC Board with One of a Different PCB Version Figure 6-20 Position of the BIOS running mode jumper on the TN51SCC BIOS Running Mode Power Supply 04 03 02 01 U45 J42 J12 U42 Battery Jumper J1 321 CPU CF Card Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.. 157 .

Ltd.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 6 Replacing the SCC Board with One of a Different PCB Version Figure 6-21 Position of the BIOS running mode jumper on the TN52SCC BIOS Running Mode Power Supply Battery Jumper 3 2 1 J1 U33 U18 01 02 03 04 J11 CF Card Figure 6-22 Setting the BIOS running mode to 1111 51SCC 01 04 03 02 01 11SCC 52SCC 02 03 04 01 02 03 04 Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.. 158 .

Step 4 Set the four jumpers on the spare SCC board so as to set the BIOS running mode of the board and then insert it to the slot housing the original SCC board. the TN51SCC cannot be used to replace the TN52SCC. If the voltage is lower than 3 V. For more information.. see Upgrade Guide. NOTE After the four jumpers are set and the SCC board is inserted to the slot. Insert the spare SCC board to the slot housing the original SCC board. remove the board. After that.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 6 Replacing the SCC Board with One of a Different PCB Version Procedure Step 1 Select a spare SCC board as the replacement SCC board by referring to the following table. the battery is out of work. After the replacement. 2. the battery jumper) on the SCC board is used to enable or disable the power supply from the battery.Figure 6-22 shows the settings of the four jumpers on the SCC board. the software of the new board needs to be upgraded. Step 2 Review and record the current alarms on the NE. 1. you must wait approximately 15 minutes to allow the database to clear. For details. 159 . refer to "Querying the Current Alarms" of the Supporting Tasks. if the U2000 reports a SWDL_PKG_NOBDSOFT alarm. Step 6 Wait for ten minutes. Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Instead. Step 5 After the database of the SCC board is cleared completely. The TN52SCC can be used to replace the TN11SCC. The TNK2SCC board cannot be replaced with the TN51SCC or TN52SCC board. Table 6-5 Version description of the SCC Item Replacement Description The TN51SCC can be used to replace the TN11SCC. the TN11SCC cannot be used to replace the TN52SCC. The TN52SCC can be used to replace the TN51SCC. refer to "Replacing a Board" of the Supporting Tasks. After the replacement. NOTE The 1X3 jumper (namely. For more information regarding how to replace a board. software upgrade is required for the replacement. Instead. Remove the jumper caps which are shown in Step 4. Ltd. Instead. the TN11SCC cannot be used to replace the TN51SCC. Step 3 Inform the onsite maintenance engineer and replace the board. The TN11SCC cannot be used to replace the TN51SCC. the database on the new SCC board is cleared. Then. et the BIOS running mode of the spare SCC board to 1111 to clear the database in the flash memory. the active and standby SCC boards must be of the same type. In this manner. The SCC board needs to be replaced. Make sure that pin 1 and pin 2 of this jumper are capped. reinsert this SCC board to the slot. the software of the new board needs to be upgraded. NOTE If two SCC boards need to be configured on the subrack. cap pin 2 and pin 3 on the jumper and use a multimeter to measure the battery voltage.

Select the desired NE. Step 8 Set Replace Board Type on the U2000. NOTE If you click Cancel. If the voltage is lower than 3 V. If the POWER_FAIL alarm occurs. choose Fault > Browse Current Alarm from the Main Menu. select the name of the target board to be replaced within the Usable Board Type. Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. use a multimeter to measure the battery voltage. The board must be replaced. Click OK. Click OK to confirm the uploading of the NE data again. the board is successfully upgraded. 5. Click the Basic Setting and Alarm Source tabs in turn on the Filter dialog box to set the filter conditions for the current alarms. 3. NOTE After replacing the SCC is replaced. 2. the battery is out of work. If yes. but you need to manually upload the NE data later. Click OK. Then. but you need to manually upload the NE data later. the battery of the SCC board is abnormal. In the Main Topology view. the board is successfully upgraded. 2.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 6 Replacing the SCC Board with One of a Different PCB Version Step 7 It takes 10 minutes for a board to work normally after the board is inserted. ensure that the monitoring of the POWER_FAIL alarm is enabled. the WRG_BD_TYPE alarm is cleared. Step 9 Querying the current alarms of the NE by using the U2000. and the alarm parameter is 0x5 0xff 0xff 0xff 0xff. After the replacement. NOTE After the new board works normally. 160 . or rightclick to choose Save > Save All Records from the shortcut menu to save the current alarms of the NE. NOTE You can select the desired alarms and right-click to choose Save > Save Selected Records. The dialog box of Replacement Board Type is displayed. Record the current alarms of the NE. the Running Status of the optical NE is displayed. a prompt appears asking you whether to immediately upload the NE data. A prompt is displayed telling you that fibers on the board will be deleted. NOTE If you click Cancel. Ltd. 6. Double-click the optical NE icon in the Main Topology. the U2000 will report a WRG_BD_TYPE alarm. Click OK. 3. 4.. NOTE After changing the board type by setting Replace Board Type on the U2000. 1. Click Close in the displayed Result dialog box. 4. 1. check whether the jumper cap is correctly placed over the battery jumper. right-click the desired SCC board. In the NE Panel tab. Click OK.

161 .. ----End Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd. The battery is fixed on the board and cannot be replaced.6 V.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 6 Replacing the SCC Board with One of a Different PCB Version CAUTION The standard voltage of the battery is 3.

7. There is no protection for the Cross-Connect board. You can replace the Cross-Connect board if: The Cross-Connect board 1+1 protection is configured.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 7 Replacing the Cross-Connect Board 7 l l Replacing the Cross-Connect Board About This Chapter This section describes how to replace the Cross-Connect boards. 162 ..2 Under No Protection This section describes how to replace the cross-connect board when no protection is configured.1 Under Board 1+1 Protection This section describes how to replace the cross-connect board when cross-connect board 1+1 protection is configured. Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 7. Ltd.

Step 3 Perform an active/standby switching on the U2000. and that the cross-connect board in slot 10 works normally and no BUS_ERR alarm is generated on the subrack. right-click the desire NE and click NE Explorer from the shortcut menu. and that the XCS board in slot 10 works normally and the subrack where it is located has no BUS_ERR alarm. Choose Configuration > Board 1+1 Protection from the Function Tree. 1. For details. the PROG indicator on the board is blinking green quickly. 163 . At this point. For OptiX OSN 8800 T64. The NE Explorer window is displayed. Ltd. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. and Materials ESD bag. Tools. refer to the Hardware Description. Otherwise.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 7 Replacing the Cross-Connect Board 7. Impact on System When cross-connect 1+1 board protection is configured. replacing the cross-connect board brings no impact on the services in case of a normal switching. Prerequisite You must be an NMS user with "NE and network operator" authority or higher. clear the alarm before the replacement. see "Querying the Current Alarms" of the Supporting Tasks. assume that the cross-connect board to be replaced in slot 9 (slot 10) is the active cross-connect board. NOTE If the version is inconsistent. assume that the cross-connect board to be replaced in slot 9 is the active crossconnect board. NOTE For OptiX OSN 8800 T32. For more information regarding the replacement relation between board versions. the board software takes several minutes to be synchronized. replacing the board causes a service interruption. you need to determine if the board with different versions can be replaced.1 Under Board 1+1 Protection This section describes how to replace the cross-connect board when cross-connect board 1+1 protection is configured. Step 2 Query and record the current alarms on the NE. During board replacement. Equipment. If it has occurred. Check whether the BUS_ERR alarm has occurred to the subrack where the cross-connect board is located. and that the cross-connect board in slot 43 (slot 44) works normally and no BUS_ERR alarm is generated on the subrack.. assume that the XCS board to be replaced is located in slot 9 and it is the main XCS board. Ensure the name. Issue 02 (2011-10-31) In the Main Topology. U2000 Procedure Step 1 Select a spare board. NOTE For OptiX OSN 6800. 2. version and model number of the new board are the same as those of the original board.

4. right-click the desired Cross-Connect Board 1+1 Protection . If the Active Board is not the board to be replaced. optimize the electrical-layer ASON services traversing the NE to other paths (the preset restoration paths are preferred if the preset restoration paths of the services do not traverse the NE) before board replacement. The switching is successful. the only cross-connect board (suppose it is in IU9) on an NE. switch Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. – When IU10 is occupied by other boards. If the indicator is not steady on green. It takes four or five minutes for a new board to work normally after insertion. cross-connect board protection cannot be configured. Choose Configuration > Board 1+1 Protection from the Function Tree. the switching is successful. Check if services are normal. see "Indicators" of the Hardware Description.2 Under No Protection This section describes how to replace the cross-connect board when no protection is configured. In the Main Topology. Step 4 Inform the onsite maintenance engineer and replace the board. ----End 7. Query the alarms and performance events on the U2000. 5. see "Replacing a Board" of the Supporting Tasks. NOTE After the board is replaced.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 7 Replacing the Cross-Connect Board 3. Click Query. Ensure that the STAT indicator is steady on green. In Board 1+1 Protection. right-click the desired Cross-Connect Board 1+1 Protection. Impact on System When you replace the cross-connect board without protection. Step 6 Follow the steps below to cancel the switching. 164 . Then. 2. Ltd. Step 7 Query alarms and performances of the local NE and of the opposite NE and confirm that the original alarms or performances are cleared. Select Working/Protection Switching from the shortcut menu. Select Working/Protection Switching from the shortcut menu. l For OptiX OSN 6800. For details about the indicators. Click OK in the window displayed. the NE software delivers the configuration of the original board automatically.. Replacement of the cross-connect board causes interruption of traditional services. Prerequisite You must be an NMS user with "NE and network operator" authority or higher. 1. The NE Explorer window is displayed. − If the NE whose cross-connect board needs to be replaced is an intermediate NE of electrical-layer ASON services. right-click the desire NE and click NE Explorer from the shortcut menu. there must be no new abnormal alarms or performances. In Board 1+1 Protection. you need to reinsert the board or select a new replacement board. For details about how to replace a board. 3. that is. If services are normal. Click OK in the window displayed. Step 5 Check the indicators of the new board.

– When IU10 is not occupied by other boards. it is available for another cross-connect board to realize 1+1 protection with the cross-connect board in IU10. the board software takes several minutes to be synchronized. For more information. you need to determine if the board with different versions can be replaced. Ltd. For more information regarding the replacement relation between board versions. Equipment. At this point. see "Replacing a Board" of the Supporting Tasks. Ensure that the STAT indicator is steady on green.. the PROG indicator on the board is blinking green quickly. 165 . Ensure the name. Then the system automatically configures the cross-connect board 1+1 protection. U2000 Procedure Step 1 Select a spare board. If the indicator is not steady on green. the services will be interrupted during board replacement. Tools. refer to "Querying the Current Alarms" of the Supporting Tasks. When the crossconnect board has 1+1 protection and when the switching is normal. For details about how to replace a board. It takes four or five minutes for a new board to work normally after insertion. Step 2 Review and record the current alarms on the NE.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 7 Replacing the Cross-Connect Board the services back to the original paths after board replacement and verify that the services are running correctly.1 Under Board 1+1 Protection. For details about the indicators. − If the NE whose cross-connect board needs to be replaced is an NE where electricallayer ASON services are added or dropped. refer to the Hardware Description. and Materials ESD bag. you need to reinsert the board or select a new replacement board. NOTE If the version is inconsistent. the NE software delivers the configuration of the original board automatically. insert another cross-connect board in IU10. version and model number of the new board are the same as those of the original board. Step 6 Query alarms and performances of the local NE and of the opposite NE and confirm that the original alarms or performances are cleared. For steps to replace an cross-connect board that is configured with board 1+1 protection. ----End Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. If IU10 is not occupied by other boards. see 7. Step 4 Inform the onsite maintenance engineer and replace the board. Step 3 For OptiX OSN 6800. Step 5 Check the indicators of the new board. see "Indicators" of the Hardware Description. NOTE After the board is replaced. replacement of the cross-connect board does not cause service interruption During board replacement.

3 Under OWSP Protection This section describes how to replace an OTU board when OWSP protection is configured. You can replace the OTU board if: l l l l The client 1+1 protection is configured. Ltd. The replacing procedure is the same as that of unprotected OTU boards. 8.1 Under Client 1+1 Protection This section describes how to replace an OTU board when client 1+1 protection is configured.2 Under SNCP Protection This section describes how to replace an OTU board when SNCP protection is configured. Subnetwork connection protection (SNCP) is configured. replacing an OTU board brings a service interruption on the OTU. 8. 8. NOTE When intra-board 1+1 protection is provided.4 Under No Protection This section describes how to replace an OTU board when no protection is configured. There is no protection for the OTU board. Optical wavelength shared protection (OWSP) is configured. 166 .. 8.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 8 Replacing the Optical Transponder Board 8 Replacing the Optical Transponder Board About This Chapter This section describes how to replace the OTU boards. Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.

ensure that the wavelength of the new board is consistent with that of the original board. Ltd.1 Under Client 1+1 Protection This section describes how to replace an OTU board when client 1+1 protection is configured.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 8 Replacing the Optical Transponder Board 8. During board replacement.. the board software takes several minutes to be synchronized. Equipment and Materials ESD bag. Figure 8-1 Client 1+1 protection of the OTU TO1 RI1 TI O RO L O T U 1 OM OD OM OD F I U F I U OD OM OD OM O T U TO1 1 RI1 P TO2 RI2 O T U 2 F I U F I U O T U TO2 2 O RO L TI RI2 P Working wavelength Protection wavelength Tools. Prerequisite You must be an NMS user with "NE and network operator" authority or higher. see the Hardware Description. 167 . Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. see the Feature Description. For details of the client 1+1 protection mechanism. Impact on System When client 1+1 protection is configured. replacing an OTU board generally brings no impact on services. optical power meter Background Information Before replacing an OTU board. For details of the bar code. At this point. The wavelength of an OTU is printed on the front panel. the PROG indicator on the board is blinking green quickly. U2000.

you can distinguish the protection by Protection Type. If there are abnormal alarms. loosely connect the fiber to prevent the input optical power from crossing the overload point. This is to prevent abnormal protection switching caused by unstable operation of the protection group in the maintenance process. which must be taken with special caution to prevent the optical module from being burnt or damaged. You can also choose Inventory > WDM Statistic Report > WDM Protection Group Switching State Report from the main menu of U2000 to query the optical line protection switching state in the WDM Protection Group Switching State Report window. click the NE and choose Configuration > Port Protection from the Function Tree. model number. Procedure Step 1 Select a spare board. optical module and software version of the new board are the same as those of the original board. you can cancel the forcible switching to restore the normal state of the protection group when both the working and protection trails are normal. For more information regarding the replacement relation between board versions. 1. All port protection pairs are listed. the receiver optical module is burnt and damaged. refer to the Hardware Description. For more information. Step 3 Follow the steps below to query the working state of the OTU board to be replaced. For more information. refer to "Querying Optical Module Information" of the Supporting Tasks. operating wavelength. refer to "Querying the Current Alarms" of the Supporting Tasks. Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Click Query to query the switching state of each protection group and the state of working channel and protection channel. The overload optical power point of an APD receiver laser is only -9 dBm. TIP 2. CAUTION Before maintaining trails configured with protection. you need to determine if the board with different versions can be replaced. NOTE To replace a board in an upgrade. In the NE Explorer. version. After maintenance. Step 2 Review and record the current alarms on the NE. you need to handle these alarms before replacing the board.. perform forcible switching to ensure that services are on the stable and available trail.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 8 Replacing the Optical Transponder Board Precaution CAUTION When you connect a fiber to the input optical port of an OTU board. perform this operation to determine if abnormal alarms are generated on the NE where the board to be replaced resides and the downstream NE. 168 . NOTE If the version is inconsistent. Ensure the name. Ltd. otherwise. Query the optical module information.

the receiver optical module is burnt and damaged. For more information regarding how to replace a board. NOTE The channel status of the protection board must be normal. 1. Prevent the input optical power from crossing the overload point.. Step 5 If the board to be replaced is the current working board. go to Step 6. NOTE At the opposite end. replacing the faulty board causes a service interruption. Click Query on the right-hand interface. 2. Step 4 If the board to be replaced is the current working unit. click Close to finish the operation. Make sure that there are no new alarms or performance events and services are normal but only CLIENT_PORT_PS. Choose Configuration > Port Protection in the Function Tree. 5. The switching succeeds. the switching succeeds. Step 6 Test the input optical power. switching of the protection group may be triggered abnormally. Otherwise. 3. follow the steps below to perform an active/standby switching on the U2000. Query the U2000 for the alarms and performance events. refer to "Replacing a Board" of the Supporting Tasks. In the Main Topology. otherwise. 4. Click Function on the right-hand interface and select Manual to Protection Channel from the menu displayed. otherwise. Step 7 Inform the onsite maintenance engineer and replace the board. In the Operation Result dialog box. refer to the Testing Optical Power by Using an Optical Power Meter in Supporting Tasks. perform manual switching on the U2000 at the same time. 169 . For the procedure. If the value of Switching Status is Manual to Protection Channel. Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 8 Replacing the Optical Transponder Board CAUTION The optical power on the working and protection lines cannot exceed the normal range. If the board to be replaced is the current protection unit. Click OK on the interface displayed. The NE Explorer window is displayed. right-click the desire NE and click NE Explorer from the shortcut menu. Ltd. 3. go to Step 5.

When the replacement board is in service. l e. For other operations. the services of the active boards in other slots may be interrupted. 170 Issue 02 (2011-10-31) . l d. l h. see the previous steps b to i./Wavelength(nm)/ Frequency(THz) from the drop-down list. Right click the slot where the replacement board resides.. Install the spare board in any available slot of the OptiX OSN 6800 subrack of version V100R004C02 or later. Choose Delete from the shortcut menu. refer to "Indicators" of the Hardware Description. Choose Version from the shortcut menu to query the board software version information. For more information regarding the valid slots of the board. Double-click the icon of the optical NE in the Physical View. Ltd. l b. perform the following operations before replacing the board: l If the board is installed in the OptiX OSN 3800 subrack. If any indicator flashes abnormally. Choose Add Physical Board from the shortcut menu. Right-click the slot where the board to be replaced or the board with the same type as the board to be replaced resides. no operation is required. refer to "Replacing a Board" of the Supporting Tasks. Replace the fault board. see "Valid Slots" in the Hardware Description. see "Valid Slots" in the Hardware Description. no operation is required. l c. Make sure the wavelength is the same as that of the original board. Otherwise. 1. Choose Version from the shortcut menu. It takes ten minutes for a new board to work normally after insertion. For more information regarding indicator definitions. l f. For more information. 2. Install the spare board to any available slot of the OptiX OSN 6800 subrack of version V100R004C02 or later. Otherwise. Click the NE where the replacement board resides. Note that the master subrack of the NE where the OptiX OSN 6800 subrack is located cannot be OptiX OSN 8800 T64. you need to reinsert the board. review the indicators on the board. reset or replace the replacement board. you need to take the following actions on the replacement board before replacing any original board on the NE. For description of the indicators. For more information regarding the valid slots of the board. l g. l If the OptiX OSN 8800 T64 does not function as the master subrack. In the NE Explorer. and the board to be replaced is in any slot of the OptiX OSN 8800 T32 or OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack on the NE. and the process of the replacement board is complete. see "Indicator" in the Hardware Description. l a.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement NOTE 8 Replacing the Optical Transponder Board l If the software version of the spare board is V100R004C01 or earlier. Remove the replacement board. Right-click the slot where the replacement board resides. and then select Band Type/Wavelength No. Step 9 Review the wavelength of the new board on the U2000. and record the displayed version information. you need to perform the following operations on the replacement board before replacing the original board. Otherwise. Ensure that the STAT indicator is steady green. l If the OptiX OSN 8800 T64 functions as the master subrack. NOTE After the board is replaced. If the version is the same as that recorded in Step e. Right-click the slot where the replacement board resides. select the desired board and choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the Function Tree. Select By Function. l a. Step 8 Review the indicators of the new board. and the NE Panel is displayed. l b. it indicates that the process of the replacement board is successful. the services of the active boards in other slots may be interrupted. or replace the board again. l i. If the board is installed in the OptiX OSN 6800 subrack. reset or replace the replacement board. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. and repeat Steps a to g. If the indicator gives abnormal indication. the NE software delivers the configuration of the original board automatically.

Click Query to query the performance value for bit error on the NE side. 6. Choose the option from the drop-down list next to Monitored Object Filter Condition. Step 10 Follow the steps below to cancel the switching. Step 11 Query the 15-minute BER before FEC at the receive end of the link.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 8 Replacing the Optical Transponder Board 3. Click Query to view Band Type/Wavelength No. Replacing the OTU on other nodes brings no impact on services in case of a normal switching.. Choose Configuration > Port Protection in the Function Tree. Impact on System When SNCP protection is configured. 4. Replacing the OUT-A brings a service interruption. Click Count option button. Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Select the switched service. right-click the desire NE and click NE Explorer from the shortcut menu. In the Operation Result dialog box. the SCC delivers the wavelength configuration of the original board automatically. If the value is Idle. 3. In Monitor Period. 4. the OTU-A and OTU-B are configured with SNCP protection. replacing the OTU where the sink node is located brings a service interruption. The sink node is on the OTU-A. select 15-Minute. Choose Performance > Browse WDM Performance from the Main Menu of the U2000. ----End 8. In the Monitored Object. Replacing the OTU-B brings no impact on services in case of a normal switching. after the board is replaced. 1. FEC_BEF_COR_ER represents the BER before FEC. Click Query. Choose the desired boards in the left pane. Figure 8-2. the switching succeeds. 171 . and click the double-right-arrow button (red). 2. NOTE If the replaced board is a tunable OTU. and select Display Zero Data for the Display Options. Prerequisite You must be an NMS user with "NE and network operator" authority or higher. Make sure that the BER before FEC does not deteriorate greatly from the value before board replacement. Step 12 Query alarms and performances of the local NE and of the opposite NE and confirm that the original alarms or performances are cleared. and then click the Current Performance Data tab. The NE Explorer window is displayed. and click Function on the right-hand interface. 8. 3. 2. and review Switching Status. Select options under Performance Event Type. 5.2 Under SNCP Protection This section describes how to replace an OTU board when SNCP protection is configured. 1./Wavelength(nm)/Frequency(THz) of each optical port. Select Clear from the menu displayed. 7. Ltd. In the Main Topology. click Close to finish the operation.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 8 Replacing the Optical Transponder Board During board replacement. the receiver optical module is burnt and damaged. operating wavelength. For details of the SNCP protection mechanism. Procedure Step 1 Select a spare board. The wavelength of an OTU is printed on the front panel. see the Feature Description. see the Hardware Description. Ensure the name. Precaution CAUTION When you connect a fiber to the input optical port of an OTU board. U2000. otherwise.. ensure that the wavelength of the new board is consistent with that of the original board. which must be taken with special caution to prevent the optical module from being burnt or damaged. loosely connect the fiber to prevent the input optical power from crossing the overload point. optical power meter Background Information Before replacing an OTU board. the PROG indicator on the board is blinking green quickly. Equipment and Materials ESD bag. At this point. The overload optical power point of an APD receiver laser is only -9 dBm. optical module and software version of the new board are the same as those of the original board. Ltd. model number. 172 . For details of the bar code. Figure 8-2 SNCP protection on OTU boards F I U OA OADM B A OADM OA F I U OA OA West Working wavelength East Protection wavelength Tools. Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. the board software takes several minutes to be synchronized. version.

Step 4 If the service sink resides on the board to be replaced. 1. Step 5 If the board to be replaced is the working board and the service sink does no reside on the board. In the Main Topology. perform forcible switching to ensure that services are on the stable and available trail. If the service sink does not reside on the board to be replaced. go to Step 7. refer to "Querying the Current Alarms" of the Supporting Tasks. Step 3 Follow the steps below to query the working state of the OTU board to be replaced. Ltd. 1. 3. CAUTION Before maintaining trails configured with protection. you need to handle these alarms before replacing the board. refer to the Hardware Description. 173 . Click the SNCP Service Control tab. Click Query to obtain the SNCP protection state of each NE. If there are abnormal alarms. you can cancel the forcible switching to restore the normal state of the protection group when both the working and protection trails are normal. Then. Click Function on the right-hand interface and select Manual to Protection from the menu displayed. 4. Click OK on the interface displayed. Query the optical module information. NOTE To replace a board in an upgrade. refer to "Querying Optical Module Information" of the Supporting Tasks. Select Query Switching Status from the menu displayed. 2. replacing the faulty board causes a service interruption. In the Operation Result dialog box. Choose Configuration > WDM Service Management from the Function Tree. you can learn the service is working on active path or working on standby path. 2.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement NOTE 8 Replacing the Optical Transponder Board If the version is inconsistent. For more information regarding the replacement relation between board versions. 3. After maintenance. right-click the desire NE and click NE Explorer from the shortcut menu. you need to determine if the board with different versions can be replaced. In the NE Explorer. 4. or go to Step 7 when the board to be replaced is the current protection board. The NE Explorer window is displayed. go to Step 5 when the board to be replaced is the current working board. Select the desired service and click Function on the bottom of the right-hand pane. Otherwise. NOTE The channel status of the protection board must be normal. Click SNCP Service Control tab. For more information. Step 2 Review and record the current alarms on the NE. perform this operation to determine if abnormal alarms are generated on the NE where the board to be replaced resides and the downstream NE. This is to prevent abnormal protection switching caused by unstable operation of the protection group in the maintenance process. click Close to finish the operation. click the NE and choose Configuration > WDM Service Management from the Function Tree. Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. For more information. follow the steps below to perform an active/standby switching on the U2000..

Prevent the input optical power from crossing the overload point. For more information. Choose Delete from the shortcut menu. l h. no operation is required. l i. For the procedure. the services of the active boards in other slots may be interrupted. see "Valid Slots" in the Hardware Description. and record the displayed version information.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 8 Replacing the Optical Transponder Board 5. Choose Add Physical Board from the shortcut menu. l e. Right-click the slot where the replacement board resides. Double-click the icon of the optical NE in the Physical View. Remove the replacement board. l d. reset or replace the replacement board. Query the U2000 for the alarms and performance events. Otherwise. For more information regarding how to replace a board. Step 6 At the opposite end perform a manual switching on the U2000 to ensure that the working channel at the opposite end and is consistent with that at the local end. Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd. and the process of the replacement board is complete. Right click the slot where the replacement board resides. refer to "Replacing a Board" of the Supporting Tasks. For how to perform a manual switching. see "Valid Slots" in the Hardware Description. see the previous steps b to i. l a. Click the NE where the replacement board resides. l If the OptiX OSN 8800 T64 functions as the master subrack. it indicates that the process of the replacement board is successful. and the board to be replaced is in any slot of the OptiX OSN 8800 T32 or OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack on the NE. no operation is required. l b. Install the spare board to any available slot of the OptiX OSN 6800 subrack of version V100R004C02 or later. see "Indicator" in the Hardware Description. For more information regarding the valid slots of the board. l If the OptiX OSN 8800 T64 does not function as the master subrack. and repeat Steps a to g. For more information regarding the valid slots of the board. l b. perform the following operations before replacing the board: l If the board is installed in the OptiX OSN 3800 subrack. reset or replace the replacement board. l f. Right-click the slot where the replacement board resides. Step 8 Inform the onsite maintenance engineer and replace the board. If the version is the same as that recorded in Step e. For other operations. refer to the Testing Optical Power by Using an Optical Power Meter in Supporting Tasks. Note that the master subrack of the NE where the OptiX OSN 6800 subrack is located cannot be OptiX OSN 8800 T64. 6. refer to "Replacing a Board" of the Supporting Tasks.. If any indicator flashes abnormally. Choose Version from the shortcut menu. NOTE l If the software version of the spare board is V100R004C01 or earlier. Install the spare board in any available slot of the OptiX OSN 6800 subrack of version V100R004C02 or later. For description of the indicators. If the board is installed in the OptiX OSN 6800 subrack. the switching succeeds. Otherwise. If Manual(from working to protection) switching state is displayed in the Status field. l c. l g. Make sure that there are no new alarms or performance events and services are normal but only protection switching alarm. 174 . Step 7 Test the input optical power. Right-click the slot where the board to be replaced or the board with the same type as the board to be replaced resides. the receiver optical module is burnt and damaged. and the NE Panel is displayed. the services of the active boards in other slots may be interrupted. review the indicators on the board. Choose Version from the shortcut menu to query the board software version information. Click Function on the right-hand interface and select Query Switching Status from the menu displayed. you need to perform the following operations on the replacement board before replacing the original board. Replace the fault board. see Step 5. Otherwise. you need to take the following actions on the replacement board before replacing any original board on the NE. otherwise. When the replacement board is in service. l a.

Step 13 Query alarms and performances of the local NE and of the opposite NE and confirm that the original alarms or performances are cleared. Select By Function. 1. Step 11 Follow the steps below to cancel the switching. select 15-Minute. Ltd.. 5. after the board is replaced. click Close to finish the operation. 6.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement NOTE 8 Replacing the Optical Transponder Board After the board is replaced. right-click the desire NE and click NE Explorer from the shortcut menu. Step 12 Query the 15-minute BER before FEC at the receive end of the link. Select Clear from the menu displayed. Click Query to view Band Type/Wavelength No. In the Operation Result dialog box. Choose Performance > Browse WDM Performance from the Main Menu of the U2000. 8. and click Function on the right-hand interface./Wavelength(nm)/ Frequency(THz) from the drop-down list. the SCC delivers the wavelength configuration of the original board automatically. 4. Step 9 Review the indicators of the new board. Select options under Performance Event Type. and then click the Current Performance Data tab. 3. 5. In the Monitored Object. Choose the desired boards in the left pane. Click Query. If the indicator gives abnormal indication. the switching succeeds. In Monitor Period. and then select Band Type/Wavelength No. refer to "Indicators" of the Hardware Description. Click Query to query the performance value for bit error on the NE side. The NE Explorer window is displayed./Wavelength(nm)/Frequency(THz) of each optical port. Click SNCP Service Control tab. 4. select the desired board and choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the Function Tree. ----End Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Step 10 Review the wavelength of the new board on the U2000. and click the double-right-arrow button (red). 2. and select Display Zero Data for the Display Options. 3. Choose the option from the drop-down list next to Monitored Object Filter Condition. 3. you need to reinsert the board. Click Count option button. Choose Configuration > WDM Service Management in the Function Tree. It takes ten minutes for a new board to work normally after insertion. In the NE Explorer. the NE software delivers the configuration of the original board automatically. 1. or replace the board again. and review Status. For more information regarding indicator definitions. 2. 2. FEC_BEF_COR_ER represents the BER before FEC. Make sure that the BER before FEC does not deteriorate greatly from the value before board replacement. NOTE If the replaced board is a tunable OTU. In the Main Topology. 175 . If the value is Normal State. Ensure that the STAT indicator is steady green. Select the switched service. 1. Make sure the wavelength is the same as that of the original board. 7.

see the Feature Description. At this point. replacing an OTU board brings a service interruption on the OTU. Ltd. Replacing the OTU1 or OTU2 brings a service interruption. 176 .OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 8 Replacing the Optical Transponder Board 8. the PROG indicator on the board is blinking green quickly. the OTU1 and the OTU2 are configured with OWSP protection. Prerequisite You must be an NMS user with "NE and network operator" authority or higher.3 Under OWSP Protection This section describes how to replace an OTU board when OWSP protection is configured. Impact on System When OWSP protection is configured. In Figure 8-3. During board replacement.. the board software takes several minutes to be synchronized. For details of the OWSP protection mechanism. Figure 8-3 OWSP protection on OTU boards OTU1 OTU2 λ2 λ1 OADM (West) λ1 λ2 λ2 λ1 OADM (East) λ1 λ2 OTU1 OTU2 λ2/λ1 λ1/λ2 2 x DCP λ2/λ1 2 x DCP λ1/λ2 FIU FIU OADM λ2/λ1 (East) λ1/λ2 FIU OADM λ2/λ1 (West) λ1/λ2 FIU A D FIU OADM λ1/λ2 (West) λ2/λ1 2 x DCP λ2/λ1 λ1/λ2 B C FIU λ2/λ1 OADM λ1/λ2 (East) 2 x DCP λ2 λ1 OADM (East) λ1 λ2 FIU FIU λ2 λ1 OADM (West) λ1 λ2 OTU2 OTU1 OTU2 λ2/λ1 λ1/λ2 OTU1 Working wavelength Protection wavelength Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.

Prevent the input optical power from crossing the overload point. U2000. refer to the Hardware Description. For details of the bar code. loosely connect the fiber to prevent the input optical power from crossing the overload point. refer to "Querying the Current Alarms" of the Supporting Tasks. Precaution CAUTION When you connect a fiber to the input optical port of an OTU board. otherwise. ensure that the wavelength of the new board is consistent with that of the original board. If there are abnormal alarms. Step 2 Review and record the current alarms on the NE. optical module and software version of the new board are the same as those of the original board. otherwise. version. The wavelength of an OTU is printed on the front panel. For more information regarding how to replace a board. Step 4 Inform the onsite maintenance engineer and replace the board. Step 3 Test the input optical power. Ensure the name. For the procedure. Procedure Step 1 Select a spare board. model number. The overload optical power point of an APD receiver laser is only -9 dBm. NOTE To replace a board in an upgrade. refer to the Testing Optical Power by Using an Optical Power Meter in Supporting Tasks. Query the optical module information. For more information. NOTE If the version is inconsistent. refer to "Replacing a Board" of the Supporting Tasks. you need to determine if the board with different versions can be replaced. Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd.. optical power meter Background Information Before replacing an OTU board. 177 . you need to handle these alarms before replacing the board. see the Hardware Description. Equipment and Materials ESD bag. refer to "Querying Optical Module Information" of the Supporting Tasks.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 8 Replacing the Optical Transponder Board Tools. perform this operation to determine if abnormal alarms are generated on the NE where the board to be replaced resides and the downstream NE. which must be taken with special caution to prevent the optical module from being burnt or damaged. For more information. the receiver optical module is burnt and damaged. For more information regarding the replacement relation between board versions. the receiver optical module is burnt and damaged. operating wavelength.

Double-click the icon of the optical NE in the Physical View. see "Valid Slots" in the Hardware Description. Replace the fault board. Ensure that the STAT indicator is steady green. refer to "Replacing a Board" of the Supporting Tasks. If the version is the same as that recorded in Step e. no operation is required. Otherwise. refer to "Indicators" of the Hardware Description. Step 5 Review the indicators of the new board. no operation is required. you need to take the following actions on the replacement board before replacing any original board on the NE. l If the OptiX OSN 8800 T64 does not function as the master subrack. Choose Add Physical Board from the shortcut menu. For more information regarding indicator definitions. the NE software delivers the configuration of the original board automatically. Choose Version from the shortcut menu to query the board software version information. When the replacement board is in service. Make sure the wavelength is the same as that of the original board. l a. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co./Wavelength(nm)/ Frequency(THz) from the drop-down list. and the NE Panel is displayed. l g. see the previous steps b to i. and then select Band Type/Wavelength No. 1. Note that the master subrack of the NE where the OptiX OSN 6800 subrack is located cannot be OptiX OSN 8800 T64. 2. and record the displayed version information. and the process of the replacement board is complete. Install the spare board to any available slot of the OptiX OSN 6800 subrack of version V100R004C02 or later. l c. l If the OptiX OSN 8800 T64 functions as the master subrack. Choose Version from the shortcut menu. Install the spare board in any available slot of the OptiX OSN 6800 subrack of version V100R004C02 or later. Otherwise. Otherwise.. review the indicators on the board. Right-click the slot where the replacement board resides. l d. l b. NOTE After the board is replaced. If the indicator gives abnormal indication. l f. and repeat Steps a to g. For more information regarding the valid slots of the board. and the board to be replaced is in any slot of the OptiX OSN 8800 T32 or OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack on the NE. Step 6 Review the wavelength of the new board on the U2000. Ltd. l e. It takes ten minutes for a new board to work normally after insertion. it indicates that the process of the replacement board is successful. In the NE Explorer. For other operations.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement NOTE 8 Replacing the Optical Transponder Board l If the software version of the spare board is V100R004C01 or earlier. perform the following operations before replacing the board: l If the board is installed in the OptiX OSN 3800 subrack. Choose Delete from the shortcut menu. you need to perform the following operations on the replacement board before replacing the original board. Right click the slot where the replacement board resides. For more information. l b. or replace the board again. l a. Select By Function. you need to reinsert the board. reset or replace the replacement board. 178 Issue 02 (2011-10-31) . Click the NE where the replacement board resides. see "Indicator" in the Hardware Description. If any indicator flashes abnormally. l i. If the board is installed in the OptiX OSN 6800 subrack. select the desired board and choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the Function Tree. see "Valid Slots" in the Hardware Description. Remove the replacement board. Right-click the slot where the replacement board resides. For more information regarding the valid slots of the board. l h. Right-click the slot where the board to be replaced or the board with the same type as the board to be replaced resides. reset or replace the replacement board. the services of the active boards in other slots may be interrupted. the services of the active boards in other slots may be interrupted. For description of the indicators.

Select options under Performance Event Type. 6. During board replacement. and select Display Zero Data for the Display Options. the SCC delivers the wavelength configuration of the original board automatically. 179 . Choose the option from the drop-down list next to Monitored Object Filter Condition. 7. 5. Step 8 Query alarms and performances of the local NE and of the opposite NE and confirm that the original alarms or performances are cleared. Impact on System Replacing unprotected OTU boards brings a service interruption. For details about the bar code. Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. In the Monitored Object. Ltd. Tools. optical power meter Background Information Before replacing an OTU board. The wavelength of an OTU is printed on the front panel. Step 7 Query the 15-minute BER before FEC at the receive end of the link. the PROG indicator on the board is blinking green quickly. and click the double-right-arrow button (red). 8. ensure that the wavelength of the new board is consistent with that of the original board. 1. FEC_BEF_COR_ER represents the BER before FEC. select 15-Minute. Prerequisite You must be an NMS user with "NE and network operator" authority or higher. and Materials ESD bag. and then click the Current Performance Data tab. U2000. ----End 8. Choose Performance > Browse WDM Performance from the Main Menu of the U2000. At this point.. Click Count option button.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 8 Replacing the Optical Transponder Board 3. 4. Make sure that the BER before FEC does not deteriorate greatly from the value before board replacement. 3. NOTE If the replaced board is a tunable OTU. 2. the board software takes several minutes to be synchronized. Click Query to view Band Type/Wavelength No.4 Under No Protection This section describes how to replace an OTU board when no protection is configured. after the board is replaced. In Monitor Period. Click Query to query the performance value for bit error on the NE side. Choose the desired boards in the left pane. click Close to finish the operation./Wavelength(nm)/Frequency(THz) of each optical port. see the Hardware Description. Equipment. In the Operation Result dialog box.

Prevent the input optical power from crossing the overload point. optical module and software version of the new board are the same as those of the original board. refer to "Querying the Current Alarms" of the Supporting Tasks. which must be taken with special caution to prevent the optical module from being burnt or damaged. Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. model number. Procedure Step 1 Select a spare board. refer to "Querying Optical Module Information" of the Supporting Tasks. Step 2 Review and record the current alarms on the NE. you need to handle these alarms before replacing the board. For more information regarding the replacement relation between board versions. For more information. Ensure the name. 180 . Step 3 Test the input optical power. the receiver optical module is burnt and damaged. If there are abnormal alarms. refer to "Replacing a Board" of the Supporting Tasks. operating wavelength.. refer to the Hardware Description. Ltd. the receiver optical module is burnt and damaged.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 8 Replacing the Optical Transponder Board Precaution CAUTION When you connect a fiber to the input optical port of an OTU board. perform this operation to determine if abnormal alarms are generated on the NE where the board to be replaced resides and the downstream NE. refer to the Testing Optical Power by Using an Optical Power Meter in Supporting Tasks. NOTE If the version is inconsistent. NOTE To replace a board in an upgrade. Query the optical module information. For more information regarding how to replace a board. otherwise. Step 4 Inform the onsite maintenance engineer and replace the board. version. For the procedure. you need to determine if the board with different versions can be replaced. For more information. The overload optical power point of an APD receiver laser is only -9 dBm. loosely connect the fiber to prevent the input optical power from crossing the overload point. otherwise.

see "Valid Slots" in the Hardware Description. see the previous steps b to i. If the indicator gives abnormal indication. see "Valid Slots" in the Hardware Description. l g. Otherwise. refer to "Indicators" of the Hardware Description..OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement NOTE 8 Replacing the Optical Transponder Board l If the software version of the spare board is V100R004C01 or earlier. l b. reset or replace the replacement board. Right-click the slot where the replacement board resides. Make sure the wavelength is the same as that of the original board. Step 5 Review the indicators of the new board. If the board is installed in the OptiX OSN 6800 subrack. For more information. Right-click the slot where the board to be replaced or the board with the same type as the board to be replaced resides. select the desired board and choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the Function Tree. If any indicator flashes abnormally. the services of the active boards in other slots may be interrupted. Choose Add Physical Board from the shortcut menu. l b. perform the following operations before replacing the board: l If the board is installed in the OptiX OSN 3800 subrack. Select By Function. Choose Version from the shortcut menu to query the board software version information. 2. Click the NE where the replacement board resides. and then select Band Type/Wavelength No. no operation is required. l h. and the board to be replaced is in any slot of the OptiX OSN 8800 T32 or OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack on the NE. l f. For other operations. For description of the indicators. or replace the board again. and record the displayed version information. Right click the slot where the replacement board resides. l If the OptiX OSN 8800 T64 does not function as the master subrack. l If the OptiX OSN 8800 T64 functions as the master subrack. If the version is the same as that recorded in Step e. it indicates that the process of the replacement board is successful. Otherwise. Otherwise. the services of the active boards in other slots may be interrupted. Install the spare board to any available slot of the OptiX OSN 6800 subrack of version V100R004C02 or later. Double-click the icon of the optical NE in the Physical View. l a./Wavelength(nm)/ Frequency(THz) from the drop-down list. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Choose Delete from the shortcut menu. Note that the master subrack of the NE where the OptiX OSN 6800 subrack is located cannot be OptiX OSN 8800 T64. Choose Version from the shortcut menu. l c. l e. For more information regarding the valid slots of the board. NOTE After the board is replaced. the NE software delivers the configuration of the original board automatically. Ltd. reset or replace the replacement board. 181 Issue 02 (2011-10-31) . 1. l a. Ensure that the STAT indicator is steady green. For more information regarding the valid slots of the board. For more information regarding indicator definitions. you need to perform the following operations on the replacement board before replacing the original board. and repeat Steps a to g. Right-click the slot where the replacement board resides. you need to take the following actions on the replacement board before replacing any original board on the NE. you need to reinsert the board. When the replacement board is in service. Install the spare board in any available slot of the OptiX OSN 6800 subrack of version V100R004C02 or later. l i. Remove the replacement board. and the NE Panel is displayed. no operation is required. see "Indicator" in the Hardware Description. l d. In the NE Explorer. Step 6 Review the wavelength of the new board on the U2000. It takes ten minutes for a new board to work normally after insertion. and the process of the replacement board is complete. review the indicators on the board. Replace the fault board. refer to "Replacing a Board" of the Supporting Tasks.

select 15-Minute. FEC_BEF_COR_ER represents the BER before FEC. Select options under Performance Event Type. 2. and click the double-right-arrow button (red). 4. Click Query to query the performance value for bit error on the NE side. 182 . Choose the option from the drop-down list next to Monitored Object Filter Condition. 3.. Step 8 Query alarms and performances of the local NE and of the opposite NE and confirm that the original alarms or performances are cleared. Click Query to view Band Type/Wavelength No. and then click the Current Performance Data tab./Wavelength(nm)/Frequency(THz) of each optical port. ----End Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. In the Operation Result dialog box. In the Monitored Object. the SCC delivers the wavelength configuration of the original board automatically. and select Display Zero Data for the Display Options. 8.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 8 Replacing the Optical Transponder Board 3. click Close to finish the operation. Step 7 Query the 15-minute BER before FEC at the receive end of the link. Make sure that the BER before FEC does not deteriorate greatly from the value before board replacement. Ltd. Choose the desired boards in the left pane. after the board is replaced. In Monitor Period. 5. Click Count option button. Choose Performance > Browse WDM Performance from the Main Menu of the U2000. 1. NOTE If the replaced board is a tunable OTU. 7. 6.

5 Under DLAG Protection Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co..2 Under SNCP Protection This section describes how to replace a line board or a tributary board when SNCP protection is configured. a tributary or line board can be replaced when: l l l l l l l The client 1+1 protection is provided.1 Under Client 1+1 Protection This section describes how to replace a line board or a tributary board when client 1+1 protection is configured.3 Under ODUk SPRing Protection This section describes how to replace a line board or a tributary board when ODUk SPRing protection is configured. 9. SNCP protection is provided. ODUk SPRing Protection is provided DBPS Protection is provided DLAG Protection is provided Board-level Protection is provided No protection is provided. 9. 183 . SNCP protection is provided. Ltd. 9. For OptiX OSN 8800. For OptiX OSN 6800/3800.4 Under DBPS Protection This section describes how to replace the TBE board when no DBPS protection is configured. a tributary or line board can be replaced when: l l l l The client 1+1 protection is provided.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 9 Replacing the Tributary and Line Board 9 Replacing the Tributary and Line Board About This Chapter This section describes how to replace the tributary and line board. 9. 9. ODUk SPRing Protection is provided No protection is provided.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 184 . 9.7 Under No Protection This section describes how to replace a line board or a tributary board when no protection is configured. Ltd. 9.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 9 Replacing the Tributary and Line Board This section describes how to replace the TBE board when DLAG protection is configured..6 Under Board-Level Protection This section describes how to replace a TBE board when board-level protection is configured.

Impact on System When client 1+1 protection is provided. optical power meter Background Information When you replace a line board. At this point. Equipment and Materials ESD bag. check if the service from the line to a tributary board is provided with client 1+1 protection on the tributary board. see the Feature Description.1 Under Client 1+1 Protection This section describes how to replace a line board or a tributary board when client 1+1 protection is configured. If no protection is provided for the service. make sure that the wavelength of the new board is the same as that of the original board. replacing the line board generally brings no service interruption. Figure 9-1 Client 1+1 protection of the tributary and line boards TO1 RI1 OM RI1 RO L P TI O TO2 RI2 a b OD OM F I U F I U OD OM OD OM b a TO1 a b OD F I U F I U O RO L TI RI2 P b a TO2 a: Tributary board b: Line board Working wavelength Protection wavelength Tools.. During board replacement. replacing a tributary board generally brings no service interruption. the PROG indicator on the board is blinking green quickly. Prerequisite You must be an NMS user with "NE and network operator" authority or higher.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 9 Replacing the Tributary and Line Board 9. Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Before replacing a line board. U2000. If protection is provided for the service. For details of the client 1+1 protection mechanism. the board software takes several minutes to be synchronized. Ltd. 185 . replacing the line board brings a service interruption.

Select a spare board. remove these alarms before you replace the board. Ltd. Query the optical module information. version. The overload optical power point of an APD receiver laser is only -9 dBm. (1) Double click the ONE icon on the Physical View and the NE Panel tab is displayed. Test the input optical power. operating wavelength. loosely connect the fiber to prevent the input optical power from crossing the overload point. All port protection pairs are listed. the receiver optical module is burnt and damaged. For details. NOTE When a line or tributary board needs to be replaced for the upgrade purpose. see the "Testing Optical Power by Using an Optical Power Meter" in Supporting Tasks. model number. see "Querying Optical Module Information" of the Supporting Tasks. Query and record the current alarms on the NE. Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. (3) Choose Configuration > WDM Service Management from the Function Tree. For details. otherwise. perform this step to check whether abnormal alarms are generated on the NE where the board is located and the downstream NE. Record the tributary or OTU boards where the sink paths of the services are located.. you can distinguish the protection by Protection Type. If abnormal alarms are generated. For the procedure. which must be taken with special caution to prevent the optical module from being burnt or damaged. optical module and software version of the new board must be the same as those of the original board. 3. For details about the replacement relationship between board versions. the receiver optical module is burnt and damaged. 1. The name. 5. (4) Search all services with the source path on the line board to be replaced. 4. see "Querying the Current Alarms" of the Supporting Tasks. (2) Right-click the NE icon and select NE Explorer. 2. Follow the steps below to check on which tributary board or OTU the services with electrical cross-connections on the line board resides. Follow the steps below to query the working state of the tributary board or OTU. Click Query to query all electrical cross-connection services. click the NE and choose Configuration > Port Protection from the Function Tree. 186 . Procedure l Procedure for Replacing a Line Board. Prevent the input optical power from crossing the overload point. NOTE If the version is inconsistent. see the Hardware Description.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 9 Replacing the Tributary and Line Board Precaution CAUTION When you connect a fiber to the input optical port of a line board or tributary board. you need to check whether the board with different versions can be replaced. (1) In the NE Explorer. otherwise.

you can cancel the forcible switching to restore the normal state of the protection group when both the working and protection trails are normal. For details on how to replace a board.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 9 Replacing the Tributary and Line Board (2) Click Query to query the switching state of each protection group and the state of working channel and protection channel. Click OK on the interface displayed. TIP You can also choose Inventory > WDM Statistic Report > WDM Protection Group Switching State Report from the main menu of U2000 to query the optical line protection switching state in the WDM Protection Group Switching State Report window. replacing the faulty board causes a service interruption. (3) Click Function on the right-hand interface and select Manual to Protection Channel from the menu displayed. CAUTION Before maintaining trails configured with protection. Ltd. Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 6. NOTE 7. After maintenance. see "Replacing a Board" of the Supporting Tasks. If the tributary board or OTU corresponding to the line board to be replaced is the working unit. follow the steps below to perform an active/standby switching on the U2000. The NE Explorer window is displayed. Inform the onsite maintenance engineer and replace the board. (4) Click Query on the right-hand interface.. 187 . perform forcible switching to ensure that services are on the stable and available trail. 8. Make sure that there are no new alarms or performance events and services are normal but only CLIENT_PORT_PS. (1) In the Main Topology. If the tributary board or OTU is the current working board. click Close to finish the operation. switching of the protection group may be triggered abnormally. If the value of Switching Status is Manual to Protection Channel. go to Step 7. otherwise. Otherwise. The switching succeeds. (2) Choose Configuration > Port Protection in the Function Tree. (5) Query the U2000 for the alarms and performance events. right-click the desire NE and click NE Explorer from the shortcut menu. go to Step 8. If the tributary board corresponding to the line board to be replaced is the protection unit. the switching succeeds. This is to prevent abnormal protection switching caused by unstable operation of the protection group in the maintenance process. CAUTION The optical power on the working and protection lines cannot exceed the normal range. The channel status of the protection board to which the service is to be switched must be normal. (3) In the Operation Result dialog box.

Ensure that the STAT indicator is steady on green. For details of the valid slots of the board. no operation is required. 188 . 10. see "Valid Slots" in the Hardware Description. l a. see "Indicator" in the Hardware Description. l If the OptiX OSN 8800 T64 does not function as the master subrack. For description of the indicators. Right-click the slot where the replacement board resides. l h. Right-click the slot where the board to be replaced or the board with the same type as the board to be replaced resides. Otherwise. for details. check the indicators on the board. reset or replace the replacement board.. the services of the active boards in other slots may be interrupted. l f. l b. If any indicator blinks abnormally. l g. It takes approximately three or four minutes for a new board to work normally after insertion. l a. Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. reset or replace the replacement board. and the board to be replaced is in any slot of the OptiX OSN 8800 T32 or OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack on the NE. For details of the valid slots of the board. Replace the fault board. Choose Add Physical Board from the shortcut menu. If the board is installed in the OptiX OSN 6800 subrack. you need to perform the following operations on the replacement board before replacing the original board. Install the spare board in any available slot of the OptiX OSN 6800 subrack of version V100R004C02 or later.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement NOTE 9 Replacing the Tributary and Line Board l If the software version of the spare board is V100R004C01 or earlier. Remove the replacement board. Choose Version from the shortcut menu. Ltd. see "Replacing a Board" of the Supporting Tasks. Otherwise. Choose Version from the shortcut menu to query the board software version information. If the indicator is not steady on green. NOTE After the board is replaced. Choose Delete from the shortcut menu. the services of the active boards in other slots may be interrupted. see "Indicators" of the Hardware Description. the NE software delivers the configuration of the original board automatically. and the NE Panel is displayed. and repeat Steps a to g. View the indicators on the front panel of the new board. Make sure the wavelength is the same as that of the original board. For details about the indicators. you need to take the following actions on the replacement board before replacing any original board on the NE. see "Valid Slots" in the Hardware Description. see the previous steps b to i. When the replacement board is in service. Note that the master subrack of the NE where the OptiX OSN 6800 subrack is located cannot be OptiX OSN 8800 T64. perform the following operations before replacing the board: l If the board is installed in the OptiX OSN 3800 subrack. check on the U2000 the wavelength of the new board. Double-click the icon of the optical NE in the Physical View. Click the NE where the replacement board resides. When you replace a line board. you need to reinsert the board or select a new replacement board. no operation is required. l b. and record the displayed version information. 9. Right click the slot where the replacement board resides. l e. and the process of the replacement board is complete. If the version is the same as that recorded in Step e. Install the spare board to any available slot of the OptiX OSN 6800 subrack of version V100R004C02 or later. l c. it indicates that the process of the replacement board is successful. l i. l If the OptiX OSN 8800 T64 functions as the master subrack. l d. Otherwise. Right-click the slot where the replacement board resides. For other operations.

(2) Choose Configuration > Port Protection in the Function Tree. 13. the SCC delivers the wavelength configuration of the original board automatically. (6) Click Query to query the performance value for bit error on the NE side. (3) Click Query to view Band Type/Wavelength No. click Close to finish the operation. (2) Click the Basic Setting and Alarm Source tabs in turn on the Filter dialog box to set the filter conditions for the current alarms./Wavelength(nm)/ Frequency(THz) of each optical port. Ltd. (4) In Monitor Period. (1) In the Main Topology view. 189 . right-click the desire NE and click NE Explorer from the shortcut menu./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency(THz) from the drop-down list. 11. (4) Record the current alarms of the NE. Select Clear from the menu displayed. (2) Choose the desired boards in the left pane. At the receive end of the link. (1) Choose Performance > Browse WDM Performance from the Main Menu of the U2000. NOTE You can select the desired alarms and right-click to choose Save > Save Selected Records. and review Switching Status. or right-click to choose Save > Save All Records from the shortcut menu to save the current alarms of the NE. (2) Select By Function. select 15-Minute. and then select Band Type/Wavelength No. and click Function on the right-hand interface. and then click the Current Performance Data tab. l Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Procedure for Replacing a Tributary Board. (5) Click Count option button. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. and select Display Zero Data for the Display Options. (4) Click Query.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 9 Replacing the Tributary and Line Board (1) In the NE Explorer. (7) In the Operation Result dialog box.. the switching succeeds. and click the double-right-arrow button (red). Query board alarms of the local NE and of the opposite NE and confirm that the original alarms or performances are cleared. (8) In the Monitored Object. Follow the steps below to cancel the switching. FEC_BEF_COR_ER represents the BER before FEC. (3) Select the switched service. The NE Explorer window is displayed. (3) Click OK. query the 15-minute BER before correction to ensure that this data does not deteriorate after the board is replaced. after the board is replaced. (1) In the Main Topology. NOTE If the replaced board is a tunable line board. 12. If the value is Idle. (3) Choose the option from the drop-down list next to Monitored Object Filter Condition. select the desired board and choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the Function Tree. choose Fault > Browse Current Alarm from the Main Menu. Select options under Performance Event Type.

see the Hardware Description. For details about the replacement relationship between board versions. remove these alarms before you replace the board. 190 Issue 02 (2011-10-31) . you can cancel the forcible switching to restore the normal state of the protection group when both the working and protection trails are normal. If abnormal alarms are generated. 4.. Query the optical module information. NOTE When a line or tributary board needs to be replaced for the upgrade purpose. The name. NOTE If the version is inconsistent. click the NE and choose Configuration > Port Protection from the Function Tree. click Close to finish the operation. 3.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 9 Replacing the Tributary and Line Board 1. CAUTION Before maintaining trails configured with protection. follow the steps below to perform an active/standby switching on the U2000. If the board to be replaced is the current working unit. Ltd. see "Querying Optical Module Information" of the Supporting Tasks. (2) Click Query to query the switching state of each protection group and the state of working channel and protection channel. All port protection pairs are listed. you need to check whether the board with different versions can be replaced. 2. After maintenance. go to Step 6. Select a spare board. optical module and software version of the new board must be the same as those of the original board. go to Step 5. model number. version. If the board to be replaced is the current protection unit. perform forcible switching to ensure that services are on the stable and available trail. This is to prevent abnormal protection switching caused by unstable operation of the protection group in the maintenance process. Follow the steps below to query the working state of the board to be replaced: (1) In the NE Explorer. TIP You can also choose Inventory > WDM Statistic Report > WDM Protection Group Switching State Report from the main menu of U2000 to query the optical line protection switching state in the WDM Protection Group Switching State Report window. 5. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. you can distinguish the protection by Protection Type. For details. switching of the protection group may be triggered abnormally. Query and record the current alarms on the NE. perform this step to check whether abnormal alarms are generated on the NE where the board is located and the downstream NE. (3) In the Operation Result dialog box. otherwise. For details. If the board to be replaced is the current working board. see "Querying the Current Alarms" of the Supporting Tasks. CAUTION The optical power on the working and protection lines cannot exceed the normal range.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement

9 Replacing the Tributary and Line Board

(1) In the Main Topology, right-click the desire NE and click NE Explorer from the shortcut menu. The NE Explorer window is displayed. (2) Choose Configuration > Port Protection in the Function Tree. (3) Click Function on the right-hand interface and select Manual to Protection Channel from the menu displayed. Click OK on the interface displayed. (4) Click Query on the right-hand interface. If the value of Switching Status is Manual to Protection Channel, the switching succeeds. (5) Query the U2000 for the alarms and performance events. Make sure that there are no new alarms or performance events and services are normal but only CLIENT_PORT_PS. The switching succeeds. 6. Inform the onsite maintenance engineer and replace the board. For details on how to replace a board, see "Replacing a Board" of the Supporting Tasks.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

191

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement
NOTE

9 Replacing the Tributary and Line Board

l If the software version of the spare board is V100R004C01 or earlier, perform the following operations before replacing the board: l If the board is installed in the OptiX OSN 3800 subrack, no operation is required. l If the OptiX OSN 8800 T64 functions as the master subrack, you need to take the following actions on the replacement board before replacing any original board on the NE. Otherwise, the services of the active boards in other slots may be interrupted. l a. Install the spare board to any available slot of the OptiX OSN 6800 subrack of version V100R004C02 or later. Note that the master subrack of the NE where the OptiX OSN 6800 subrack is located cannot be OptiX OSN 8800 T64. For details of the valid slots of the board, see "Valid Slots" in the Hardware Description. l b. When the replacement board is in service, check the indicators on the board. If any indicator blinks abnormally, reset or replace the replacement board. For description of the indicators, see "Indicator" in the Hardware Description. l c. Double-click the icon of the optical NE in the Physical View, and the NE Panel is displayed. Click the NE where the replacement board resides. l d. Right-click the slot where the replacement board resides. Choose Add Physical Board from the shortcut menu. l e. Right-click the slot where the replacement board resides. Choose Version from the shortcut menu to query the board software version information, and record the displayed version information. l f. Right click the slot where the replacement board resides. Choose Delete from the shortcut menu. l g. Right-click the slot where the board to be replaced or the board with the same type as the board to be replaced resides. Choose Version from the shortcut menu. If the version is the same as that recorded in Step e, it indicates that the process of the replacement board is successful. Otherwise, reset or replace the replacement board, and repeat Steps a to g. l h. Remove the replacement board, and the process of the replacement board is complete. l i. Replace the fault board, for details, see "Replacing a Board" of the Supporting Tasks. l If the OptiX OSN 8800 T64 does not function as the master subrack, and the board to be replaced is in any slot of the OptiX OSN 8800 T32 or OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack on the NE, you need to perform the following operations on the replacement board before replacing the original board. Otherwise, the services of the active boards in other slots may be interrupted. If the board is installed in the OptiX OSN 6800 subrack, no operation is required. l a. Install the spare board in any available slot of the OptiX OSN 6800 subrack of version V100R004C02 or later. For details of the valid slots of the board, see "Valid Slots" in the Hardware Description. l b. For other operations, see the previous steps b to i.
NOTE

After the board is replaced, the NE software delivers the configuration of the original board automatically.

7.

View the indicators on the front panel of the new board. It takes approximately three or four minutes for a new board to work normally after insertion. Ensure that the STAT indicator is steady on green. If the indicator is not steady on green, you need to reinsert the board or select a new replacement board. For details about the indicators, see "Indicators" of the Hardware Description. Follow the steps below to cancel the switching. (1) In the Main Topology, right-click the desire NE and click NE Explorer from the shortcut menu. The NE Explorer window is displayed.

8.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

192

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement

9 Replacing the Tributary and Line Board

(2) Choose Configuration > Port Protection in the Function Tree. (3) Select the switched service, and click Function on the right-hand interface. Select Clear from the menu displayed. (4) Click Query, and review Switching Status. If the value is Idle, the switching succeeds. 9. At the receive end of the link, query the 15-minute BER before correction to ensure that this data does not deteriorate after the board is replaced. (1) Choose Performance > Browse WDM Performance from the Main Menu of the U2000, and then click the Current Performance Data tab. (2) Choose the desired boards in the left pane, and click the double-right-arrow button (red). (3) Choose the option from the drop-down list next to Monitored Object Filter Condition. (4) In Monitor Period, select 15-Minute. (5) Click Count option button. Select options under Performance Event Type, and select Display Zero Data for the Display Options. (6) Click Query to query the performance value for bit error on the NE side. (7) In the Operation Result dialog box, click Close to finish the operation. (8) In the Monitored Object, FEC_BEF_COR_ER represents the BER before FEC. 10. Query board alarms and performance events of the local NE and of the opposite NE and confirm that the original alarms or performances are cleared. (1) In the Main Topology view, choose Fault > Browse Current Alarm from the Main Menu. (2) Click the Basic Setting and Alarm Source tabs in turn on the Filter dialog box to set the filter conditions for the current alarms. (3) Click OK. (4) Record the current alarms of the NE.
NOTE

You can select the desired alarms and right-click to choose Save > Save Selected Records, or right-click to choose Save > Save All Records from the shortcut menu to save the current alarms of the NE.

----End

9.2 Under SNCP Protection
This section describes how to replace a line board or a tributary board when SNCP protection is configured.

Prerequisite
You must be an NMS user with "NE and network operator" authority or higher.

Impact on System
When SNCP protection is configured, replacing a tributary board brings a service interruption. Replacing a line board generally brings no service interruption.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 193

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement

9 Replacing the Tributary and Line Board

During board replacement, the board software takes several minutes to be synchronized. At this point, the PROG indicator on the board is blinking green quickly. For details of the SNCP protection mechanism, see the Feature Description. Figure 9-2 SNCP protection of the tributary and line boards

F I U

OA

Tributary board Line OADM board 1

Line OADM board 2

OA

F I U

OA

OA

Working wavelength

Protection wavelength

Tools, Equipment and Materials
ESD bag, U2000, optical power meter

Background Information
When you replace a line board, make sure that the wavelength of the new board is the same as that of the original board.

Precaution

CAUTION
When you connect a fiber to the input optical port of a line board or tributary board, loosely connect the fiber to prevent the input optical power from crossing the overload point; otherwise, the receiver optical module is burnt and damaged. The overload optical power point of an APD receiver laser is only -9 dBm, which must be taken with special caution to prevent the optical module from being burnt or damaged.

Procedure
Step 1 Select a spare board. Ensure the name, version, model number, operating wavelength, optical module and software version of the new board are the same as those of the original board.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 194

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement
NOTE

9 Replacing the Tributary and Line Board

If the version is inconsistent, you need to determine if the board with different versions can be replaced. For more information regarding the replacement relation between board versions, refer to the Hardware Description. Query the optical module information. For more information, refer to "Querying Optical Module Information" of the Supporting Tasks.

Step 2 Review and record the current alarms on the NE. For more information, refer to "Querying the Current Alarms" of the Supporting Tasks.
NOTE

To replace a board in an upgrade, perform this operation to determine if abnormal alarms are generated on the NE where the board to be replaced resides and the downstream NE. If there are abnormal alarms, you need to handle these alarms before replacing the board.

Step 3 Test the input optical power. Prevent the input optical power from crossing the overload point, otherwise, the receiver optical module is burnt and damaged. For the procedure, refer to the Testing Optical Power by Using an Optical Power Meter in Supporting Tasks. Step 4 If you want to replace a line board, go to Step 5. If you want to replace a tributary board, go to Step 9. Step 5 Follow the steps below to query the working state of the board to be replaced. 1. 2. In the NE Explorer, click the NE and choose Configuration > WDM Service Management from the Function Tree. Click the SNCP Service Control tab. Click Query to obtain the SNCP protection state of each NE.

CAUTION
Before maintaining trails configured with protection, perform forcible switching to ensure that services are on the stable and available trail. This is to prevent abnormal protection switching caused by unstable operation of the protection group in the maintenance process. After maintenance, you can cancel the forcible switching to restore the normal state of the protection group when both the working and protection trails are normal. 3. Select the desired service and click Function on the bottom of the right-hand pane. Select Query Switching Status from the menu displayed. Then, you can learn the service is working on active path or working on standby path. In the Operation Result dialog box, click Close to finish the operation.

4.

Step 6 If the board is the current working board, go to Step 7. If the board is the current protection board, go to Step 9. Step 7 If the board to be replaced is the current working board, follow the steps below to perform an active/standby switching on the U2000.
NOTE

The channel status of the protection board must be normal. Otherwise, replacing the faulty board causes a service interruption.

1. 2.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)

In the Main Topology, right-click the desire NE and click NE Explorer from the shortcut menu. The NE Explorer window is displayed. Choose Configuration > WDM Service Management from the Function Tree.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 195

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement

9 Replacing the Tributary and Line Board

3. 4. 5.

Click SNCP Service Control tab. Click Function on the right-hand interface and select Manual to Protection from the menu displayed. Click OK on the interface displayed. Click Function on the right-hand interface and select Query Switching Status from the menu displayed. If Manual(from working to protection) switching state is displayed in the Status field, the switching succeeds. Query the U2000 for the alarms and performance events. Make sure that there are no new alarms or performance events and services are normal but only protection switching alarm.

6.

Step 8 At the opposite end perform a manual switching on the U2000 to ensure that the working channel at the opposite end and is consistent with that at the local end. For how to perform a manual switching, see Step 7.
NOTE

You do not need to perform a manual switching at the opposite end before replacing the tributary board in the SNCP protection group.

Step 9 Inform the onsite maintenance engineer and replace the board. For more information regarding how to replace a board, refer to "Replacing a Board" of the Supporting Tasks.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

196

and repeat Steps a to g. Otherwise. Otherwise. Choose Version from the shortcut menu to query the board software version information.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement NOTE 9 Replacing the Tributary and Line Board l If the software version of the spare board is V100R004C01 or earlier. see "Valid Slots" in the Hardware Description. NOTE After the board is replaced. and the board to be replaced is in any slot of the OptiX OSN 8800 T32 or OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack on the NE. reset or replace the replacement board. If the board is installed in the OptiX OSN 6800 subrack. l a. Right click the slot where the replacement board resides. Step 10 Review the indicators of the new board. Note that the master subrack of the NE where the OptiX OSN 6800 subrack is located cannot be OptiX OSN 8800 T64. l d. If the indicator gives abnormal indication. review on the U2000 the wavelength of the new board. l b. see the previous steps b to i./Wavelength(nm)/ Frequency(THz) from the drop-down list. For description of the indicators. or replace the board again. Ltd. refer to "Indicators" of the Hardware Description. it indicates that the process of the replacement board is successful. see "Indicator" in the Hardware Description. It takes ten minutes for a new board to work normally after insertion. you need to perform the following operations on the replacement board before replacing the original board. the services of the active boards in other slots may be interrupted. l If the OptiX OSN 8800 T64 does not function as the master subrack. If any indicator flashes abnormally. review the indicators on the board. Select By Function. Choose Add Physical Board from the shortcut menu. For more information regarding indicator definitions. l If the OptiX OSN 8800 T64 functions as the master subrack. Right-click the slot where the replacement board resides. Otherwise. and then select Band Type/Wavelength No. Right-click the slot where the board to be replaced or the board with the same type as the board to be replaced resides. no operation is required. Remove the replacement board. For other operations. perform the following operations before replacing the board: l If the board is installed in the OptiX OSN 3800 subrack. the NE software delivers the configuration of the original board automatically. Make sure the wavelength is the same as that of the original board. l g. refer to "Replacing a Board" of the Supporting Tasks. l b. For more information regarding the valid slots of the board. When the replacement board is in service. Install the spare board in any available slot of the OptiX OSN 6800 subrack of version V100R004C02 or later. l e. For more information. l h. you need to reinsert the board. you need to take the following actions on the replacement board before replacing any original board on the NE. For more information regarding the valid slots of the board. l f. Choose Version from the shortcut menu. Install the spare board to any available slot of the OptiX OSN 6800 subrack of version V100R004C02 or later. Step 11 When you replace a line board. reset or replace the replacement board. l c. l i. Choose Delete from the shortcut menu. 1. and record the displayed version information. see "Valid Slots" in the Hardware Description. Replace the fault board. and the process of the replacement board is complete. 197 Issue 02 (2011-10-31) . Ensure that the STAT indicator is steady green. In the NE Explorer. and the NE Panel is displayed. the services of the active boards in other slots may be interrupted. If the version is the same as that recorded in Step e. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. l a. 2. Double-click the icon of the optical NE in the Physical View. Click the NE where the replacement board resides. no operation is required.. select the desired board and choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the Function Tree. Right-click the slot where the replacement board resides.

FEC_BEF_COR_ER represents the BER before FEC. 4. 198 . Step 14 Query alarms and performances of the local NE and of the opposite NE and confirm that the original alarms or performances are cleared. replacing a tributary board or a line board brings a service interruption. 2. In the Main Topology. In the case of four-fiber ring. Ltd. Impact on System When ODUk SPRing protection is configured. Click Query to view Band Type/Wavelength No. the SCC delivers the wavelength configuration of the original board automatically. Select options under Performance Event Type. and then click the Current Performance Data tab. In Monitor Period. Select Clear from the menu displayed. Click Count option button. 6. select 15-Minute. 5. Select the switched service. l l Issue 02 (2011-10-31) In the case of two-fiber ring. 4. 1.3 Under ODUk SPRing Protection This section describes how to replace a line board or a tributary board when ODUk SPRing protection is configured. ----End 9. and click the double-right-arrow button (red). Choose Configuration > WDM Service Management in the Function Tree. Choose the desired boards in the left pane. and click Function on the right-hand interface. click Close to finish the operation. Step 12 Follow the steps below to cancel the switching. The NE Explorer window is displayed. 3.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 9 Replacing the Tributary and Line Board 3. the switching succeeds. Click Query. NOTE If the replaced board is a tunable line board. 1. 3. 7. Choose Performance > Browse WDM Performance from the Main Menu of the U2000. Prerequisite You must be an NMS user with "NE and network operator" authority or higher. 5. right-click the desire NE and click NE Explorer from the shortcut menu. Click SNCP Service Control tab. If the value is Normal State.. Choose the option from the drop-down list next to Monitored Object Filter Condition./Wavelength(nm)/Frequency(THz) of each optical port. and review Status. and select Display Zero Data for the Display Options. 2. Click Query to query the performance value for bit error on the NE side. In the Operation Result dialog box. replacing a tributary board brings a service interruption. Make sure that the BER before FEC does not deteriorate greatly from the value before board replacement. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. In the Monitored Object. Step 13 Query the 15-minute BER before FEC at the receive end of the link. after the board is replaced. 8.

199 . Figure 9-3 illustrates an application of four-fiber ring.. Figure 9-3 ODUk SPRing protection of the tributary and line boards West TOM NS2 NS2 East NS2 NS2 Working ODUk Proteciotn ODUk Tools. At this point. Equipment and Materials ESD bag.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 9 Replacing the Tributary and Line Board Replacing a line board brings no service interruption in case of a normal switching. make sure that the wavelength of the new board is the same as that of the original board. see the Feature Description. otherwise. U2000. Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Replacing the NS2 brings no service interruption in case of a normal switching. which must be taken with special caution to prevent the optical module from being burnt or damaged. Ltd. optical power meter Background Information When you replace a line board. loosely connect the fiber to prevent the input optical power from crossing the overload point. the NS2 is configured with ODUk SPRing protection. Replacing the TOM brings a service interruption. the board software takes several minutes to be synchronized. As shown in the figure. the receiver optical module is burnt and damaged. The overload optical power point of an APD receiver laser is only -9 dBm. Precaution CAUTION When you connect a fiber to the input optical port of a line board or tributary board. For details of the ODUk SPRing protection mechanism. the PROG indicator on the board is blinking green quickly. During board replacement.

perform this operation to determine if abnormal alarms are generated on the NE where the board to be replaced resides and the downstream NE. Click OK on the interface displayed. If Manual Switching –Ring is displayed. Click Query on the right-hand interface. NOTE If the version is inconsistent. version. The NE Explorer window is displayed. In the Main Topology. 4. 200 Issue 02 (2011-10-31) . 2.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 9 Replacing the Tributary and Line Board Procedure Step 1 Select a spare board. 3. refer to the Hardware Description. Ensure the name. Step 4 Follow the steps below to query the working state of the board to be replaced: 1. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Step 3 If you want to replace a line board. For more information.. Ltd. After maintenance. NOTE To replace a board in an upgrade. This is to prevent abnormal protection switching caused by unstable operation of the protection group in the maintenance process. CAUTION Before maintaining trails configured with protection. For more information regarding the replacement relation between board versions. Step 5 If the board is the current working board. go to Step 6. Click Query to query the switching status of the current protection group. Right-click the desired Protection Unit and select Manual Switching –Ringfrom the menu displayed. If the board is the current protection board. Step 6 If the board to be replaced is the current working board. In the NE Explorer. you need to determine if the board with different versions can be replaced. right-click the desire NE and click NE Explorer from the shortcut menu. click the NE and choose Configuration > ODUk SPRing from the Function Tree. NOTE The channel status of the protection board must be normal. perform forcible switching to ensure that services are on the stable and available trail. 1. optical module and software version of the new board are the same as those of the original board. Query the optical module information. refer to "Querying the Current Alarms" of the Supporting Tasks. Step 2 Review and record the current alarms on the NE. model number. operating wavelength. If you want to replace a tributary board. the switching succeeds. For more information. go to Step 7. replacing the faulty board causes a service interruption. you need to handle these alarms before replacing the board. you can cancel the forcible switching to restore the normal state of the protection group when both the working and protection trails are normal. follow the steps below to perform an active/standby switching on the U2000. go to Step 4. go to Step 7. 2. Choose Configuration > ODUk SPRing from the Function Tree. If there are abnormal alarms. refer to "Querying Optical Module Information" of the Supporting Tasks. Otherwise.

When the replacement board is in service. Step 7 Test the input optical power. If the version is the same as that recorded in Step e. Ltd. l i. For other operations. If the board is installed in the OptiX OSN 6800 subrack. Remove the replacement board. review the indicators on the board. l g. The switching succeeds. the receiver optical module is burnt and damaged. l h. Choose Add Physical Board from the shortcut menu. see "Valid Slots" in the Hardware Description. l a. the services of the active boards in other slots may be interrupted. Choose Delete from the shortcut menu. Right-click the slot where the replacement board resides. refer to the Testing Optical Power by Using an Optical Power Meter in Supporting Tasks. l If the OptiX OSN 8800 T64 functions as the master subrack. l c. reset or replace the replacement board. see "Indicator" in the Hardware Description. Right-click the slot where the board to be replaced or the board with the same type as the board to be replaced resides. you need to perform the following operations on the replacement board before replacing the original board. and repeat Steps a to g. Click the NE where the replacement board resides. Otherwise.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 9 Replacing the Tributary and Line Board 5. Step 8 Inform the onsite maintenance engineer and replace the board. refer to "Replacing a Board" of the Supporting Tasks. If the indicator gives abnormal Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. NOTE After the board is replaced. and the process of the replacement board is complete. Install the spare board in any available slot of the OptiX OSN 6800 subrack of version V100R004C02 or later. Install the spare board to any available slot of the OptiX OSN 6800 subrack of version V100R004C02 or later. Choose Version from the shortcut menu. For the procedure. Right click the slot where the replacement board resides. For more information. If any indicator flashes abnormally. see the previous steps b to i. and record the displayed version information. Make sure that there are no new alarms or performance events and services are normal but only ODUKSP_PS. For more information regarding how to replace a board. no operation is required. Choose Version from the shortcut menu to query the board software version information. Replace the fault board. otherwise. Query the U2000 for the alarms and performance events. refer to "Replacing a Board" of the Supporting Tasks. the services of the active boards in other slots may be interrupted. no operation is required. Otherwise. l f. It takes ten minutes for a new board to work normally after insertion. Note that the master subrack of the NE where the OptiX OSN 6800 subrack is located cannot be OptiX OSN 8800 T64. reset or replace the replacement board. 201 . the NE software delivers the configuration of the original board automatically. it indicates that the process of the replacement board is successful. Right-click the slot where the replacement board resides. l b. Prevent the input optical power from crossing the overload point. l e. you need to take the following actions on the replacement board before replacing any original board on the NE. Otherwise. Ensure that the STAT indicator is steady green. l d. For description of the indicators. NOTE l If the software version of the spare board is V100R004C01 or earlier. perform the following operations before replacing the board: l If the board is installed in the OptiX OSN 3800 subrack. Double-click the icon of the optical NE in the Physical View. For more information regarding the valid slots of the board. l b. Step 9 Review the indicators of the new board. and the NE Panel is displayed. see "Valid Slots" in the Hardware Description. l If the OptiX OSN 8800 T64 does not function as the master subrack. l a. and the board to be replaced is in any slot of the OptiX OSN 8800 T32 or OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack on the NE.. For more information regarding the valid slots of the board.

and then select Band Type/Wavelength No. For more information regarding indicator definitions. Choose the option from the drop-down list next to Monitored Object Filter Condition. the switching succeeds. 4. Click Query. 2. If the value is Idle. Step 13 Query alarms and performances of the local NE and of the opposite NE and confirm that the original alarms or performances are cleared. NOTE If the replaced board is a tunable line board. Prerequisite l Issue 02 (2011-10-31) You must be an NMS user with "NE and network operator" authority or higher. Step 10 When you replace a line board. after the board is replaced. and select Display Zero Data for the Display Options. Select By Function. In Monitor Period. select 15-Minute. 4. FEC_BEF_COR_ER represents the BER before FEC. In the Operation Result dialog box. 6. right-click the desire NE and click NE Explorer from the shortcut menu. the SCC delivers the wavelength configuration of the original board automatically. 3. 2. The NE Explorer window is displayed. Select options under Performance Event Type. Make sure the wavelength is the same as that of the original board. Right-click the switched service. 3. ----End 9. 202 . Make sure that the BER before FEC does not deteriorate greatly from the value before board replacement. 2. 3. select the desired board and choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the Function Tree. review on the U2000 the wavelength of the new board. refer to "Indicators" of the Hardware Description. you need to reinsert the board. Step 12 Query the 15-minute BER before FEC at the receive end of the link. 1./Wavelength(nm)/Frequency(THz) of each optical port. Click Count option button. 8. In the Main Topology.. and then click the Current Performance Data tab. Click Query to query the performance value for bit error on the NE side. 1. or replace the board again. Click Query to view Band Type/Wavelength No. 1. 7.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 9 Replacing the Tributary and Line Board indication. click Close to finish the operation. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. and select Clear from the menu displayed. and check Switching Status. Choose the desired boards in the left pane.4 Under DBPS Protection This section describes how to replace the TBE board when no DBPS protection is configured. In the Monitored Object. Choose Performance > Browse WDM Performance from the Main Menu of the U2000. Step 11 Follow the steps below to cancel the switching./Wavelength(nm)/ Frequency(THz) from the drop-down list. Ltd. 5. In the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > ODUk SPRing from the Function Tree. and click the double-right-arrow button (red).

4: TBE 2. see the Feature Description. For details of DBPS protection mechanism. Replacing a TBE board generally brings no impact on services. Ltd. 6: OTU Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 203 . 3. the TBE board is configured with DBPS protection. 5. the PROG indicator on the board is blinking green quickly.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 9 Replacing the Tributary and Line Board Impact on System DBPS protection is designed for protecting TBE boards. During board replacement. At this point. In Figure 9-4. Replacing a TBE board generally brings no impact on services.. Figure 9-4 Application of the TBE board in the cross-subrack or cross-NE DBPS protection Protection 1 OADM 2 R2 Working R1 4 OADM 3 F F I I U F F I I U OADM OADM 5 6 West B East Working signal West A East Protection signal 1. the board software takes several minutes to be synchronized.

Equipment and Materials ESD bag. refer to "Querying Optical Module Information" of the Supporting Tasks. 4: OTU Tools. Step 2 Review and record the current alarms on the NE. which must be taken with special caution to prevent the optical module from being burnt or damaged. refer to the Hardware Description. NOTE If the version is inconsistent. optical power meter Precaution CAUTION When you connect a fiber to the input optical port of a line board or tributary board. loosely connect the fiber to prevent the input optical power from crossing the overload point. otherwise. optical module and software version of the new board are the same as those of the original board. 204 . U2000. For more information regarding the replacement relation between board versions. Query the optical module information. you need to determine if the board with different versions can be replaced. Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. For more information. the receiver optical module is burnt and damaged. For more information. model number.. The overload optical power point of an APD receiver laser is only -9 dBm. Ensure the name. 2: TBE Protection signal 3. Procedure Step 1 Select a spare board. version. Ltd.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 9 Replacing the Tributary and Line Board Figure 9-5 Application of the TBE board in the intra-subrack DBPS protection Protection R1 1 OADM 3 2 R2 Working OADM 4 West East Working signal 1. refer to "Querying the Current Alarms" of the Supporting Tasks.

Click Query to obtain the created DBPS protection group and associated VLAN of the protection group. replacing the faulty board causes a service interruption. you need to handle these alarms before replacing the board. Step 3 Follow the steps below to query the working state of the board to be replaced: 1. and the service will switch to the current protection board. Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. If the working status of the board to be replaced is not Master. Cover a fiber with a protection cap immediately after you remove it. Step 4 If the working status of the board to be replaced is Master.. refer to the Testing Optical Power by Using an Optical Power Meter in Supporting Tasks. refer to "Replacing a Board" of the Supporting Tasks. Otherwise. the receiver optical module is burnt and damaged. For more information regarding how to replace a board. perform this operation to determine if abnormal alarms are generated on the NE where the board to be replaced resides and the downstream NE. For detailed procedures. 205 . 2. For the procedure. Step 5 Remove the fiber in the board to be replaced which connect to the BRAS. go to Step 5. otherwise. The switching succeeds. Make sure that there are no new alarms or performance events and services are normal.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement NOTE 9 Replacing the Tributary and Line Board To replace a board in an upgrade. Prevent the input optical power from crossing the overload point. click the NE and choose Configuration > Distributed Board-Level Protection from the Function Tree. go to Step 7. Step 7 Test the input optical power. NOTE The channel status of the protection board must be Slave. In the NE Explorer. Step 8 Inform the onsite maintenance engineer and replace the board. see "Querying the Current Alarms" of the Supporting Tasks. Step 6 Query the U2000 for the alarms and performance events. Ltd. If there are abnormal alarms.

. 3. For more information regarding the valid slots of the board. Otherwise. and repeat Steps a to g. If any indicator flashes abnormally. it indicates that the process of the replacement board is successful. It takes ten minutes for a new board to work normally after insertion. Right-click the slot where the replacement board resides. see the previous steps b to i. refer to "Indicators" of the Hardware Description. and the process of the replacement board is complete. you need to take the following actions on the replacement board before replacing any original board on the NE. you need to perform the following operations on the replacement board before replacing the original board. Right-click the slot where the board to be replaced or the board with the same type as the board to be replaced resides. Choose the option from the drop-down list next to Monitored Object Filter Condition. l If the OptiX OSN 8800 T64 functions as the master subrack. l If the OptiX OSN 8800 T64 does not function as the master subrack. If the indicator gives abnormal indication. the services of the active boards in other slots may be interrupted. NOTE After the board is replaced. l e. review the indicators on the board. l a. When the replacement board is in service. 2. and record the displayed version information. Note that the master subrack of the NE where the OptiX OSN 6800 subrack is located cannot be OptiX OSN 8800 T64. l h. Click the NE where the replacement board resides.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement NOTE 9 Replacing the Tributary and Line Board l If the software version of the spare board is V100R004C01 or earlier. Choose Version from the shortcut menu. l b. the services of the active boards in other slots may be interrupted. reset or replace the replacement board. Install the spare board in any available slot of the OptiX OSN 6800 subrack of version V100R004C02 or later. Ltd. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Double-click the icon of the optical NE in the Physical View. l a. no operation is required. and then click the Current Performance Data tab. Choose the desired boards in the left pane. l f. Choose Add Physical Board from the shortcut menu. reset or replace the replacement board. Ensure that the STAT indicator is steady green. Right-click the slot where the replacement board resides. and the NE Panel is displayed. or replace the board again. the NE software delivers the configuration of the original board automatically. Replace the fault board. l d. Make sure that the BER before FEC does not deteriorate greatly from the value before board replacement. For other operations. Choose Delete from the shortcut menu. and the board to be replaced is in any slot of the OptiX OSN 8800 T32 or OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack on the NE. see "Valid Slots" in the Hardware Description. l c. 1. Choose Version from the shortcut menu to query the board software version information. 206 . Right click the slot where the replacement board resides. see "Indicator" in the Hardware Description. refer to "Replacing a Board" of the Supporting Tasks. For more information. l g. perform the following operations before replacing the board: l If the board is installed in the OptiX OSN 3800 subrack. and click the double-right-arrow button (red). For more information regarding indicator definitions. Step 9 Review the indicators of the new board. If the version is the same as that recorded in Step e. Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Choose Performance > Browse WDM Performance from the Main Menu of the U2000. see "Valid Slots" in the Hardware Description. Otherwise. If the board is installed in the OptiX OSN 6800 subrack. For description of the indicators. Install the spare board to any available slot of the OptiX OSN 6800 subrack of version V100R004C02 or later. you need to reinsert the board. Otherwise. l b. Remove the replacement board. For more information regarding the valid slots of the board. l i. Step 10 Query the 15-minute BER before FEC at the receive end of the link. no operation is required.

5. Impact on System DLAG protection is designed for protecting TBE boards. the PROG indicator on the board is blinking green quickly. Click Count option button. 7. Select options under Performance Event Type. During board replacement. click Close to finish the operation. Step 11 Query alarms and performances of the local NE and of the opposite NE and confirm that the original alarms or performances are cleared.5 Under DLAG Protection This section describes how to replace the TBE board when DLAG protection is configured. 6. Click Query to query the performance value for bit error on the NE side. the board software takes several minutes to be synchronized. 207 . Ltd. ----End 9. Prerequisite l You must be an NMS user with "NE and network operator" authority or higher. and select Display Zero Data for the Display Options. FEC_BEF_COR_ER represents the BER before FEC. At this point. For details of DLAG protection mechanism. Figure 9-6 DLAG protection of the TBE board DSLAM Working 1 Protection 2 4 OADM 3 OADM West Working signal East Protection signal 1. select 15-Minute.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 9 Replacing the Tributary and Line Board 4. In the Operation Result dialog box. 2: TBE 3. Replacing a TBE board generally brings no impact on services. see the Feature Description. In Monitor Period. In the Monitored Object.. 8. 4: OTU Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.

otherwise. go to Step 5. Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. model number. The overload optical power point of an APD receiver laser is only -9 dBm. Step 2 Review and record the current alarms on the NE. optical module and software version of the new board are the same as those of the original board. optical power meter Precaution CAUTION When you connect a fiber to the input optical port of a line board or tributary board. you need to determine if the board with different versions can be replaced. version. For more information. replacing the faulty board causes a service interruption. NOTE Query the current alarms on the U2000. If there are abnormal alarms. Equipment and Materials ESD bag. 208 . For more information. refer to "Querying Optical Module Information" of the Supporting Tasks. NOTE To replace a board in an upgrade. Cover a fiber with a protection cap immediately after you remove it. NOTE If the version is inconsistent. Step 4 If the board to be replaced is the working board. For details. you need to handle these alarms before replacing the board. The parameters of the current protection group can be queried. Ltd. click the NE and choose Configuration > Ethernet Distributed Link Aggregation Management from the Function Tree. loosely connect the fiber to prevent the input optical power from crossing the overload point. Ensure the name. For more information regarding the replacement relation between board versions. 2. and the service will switch to the current protection board. There must be no DLAG_PROTECT_FAIL alarm reported.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 9 Replacing the Tributary and Line Board Tools. If the board to be replaced is not the working board. otherwise. Step 3 Follow the steps below to query the working state of the board to be replaced: 1. go to Step 6. which must be taken with special caution to prevent the optical module from being burnt or damaged. Step 5 Remove the fiber in the board to be replaced which connect to the DSLAM. refer to the Hardware Description. refer to "Querying the Current Alarms" of the Supporting Tasks. Click Query in the right pane. perform this operation to determine if abnormal alarms are generated on the NE where the board to be replaced resides and the downstream NE. In the NE Explorer.. see"Querying the Current Alarms" of the Supporting Tasks. U2000. Query the optical module information. the receiver optical module is burnt and damaged. Procedure Step 1 Select a spare board.

NOTE After the board is replaced. reset or replace the replacement board. For more information regarding the valid slots of the board. l f. otherwise. Double-click the icon of the optical NE in the Physical View. l a. If any indicator flashes abnormally. refer to "Replacing a Board" of the Supporting Tasks. Step 9 Query the 15-minute BER before FEC at the receive end of the link. see the previous steps b to i. Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 209 . you need to reinsert the board. For more information regarding how to replace a board. the services of the active boards in other slots may be interrupted. For more information regarding the valid slots of the board. Step 7 Inform the onsite maintenance engineer and replace the board. Choose Version from the shortcut menu to query the board software version information. the NE software delivers the configuration of the original board automatically. no operation is required. Otherwise. Make sure that the BER before FEC does not deteriorate greatly from the value before board replacement. and the NE Panel is displayed. For description of the indicators. see "Indicator" in the Hardware Description. review the indicators on the board. Prevent the input optical power from crossing the overload point. Choose Version from the shortcut menu. the services of the active boards in other slots may be interrupted. For other operations.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 9 Replacing the Tributary and Line Board Step 6 Test the input optical power. refer to the Testing Optical Power by Using an Optical Power Meter in Supporting Tasks. Right-click the slot where the replacement board resides. see "Valid Slots" in the Hardware Description. If the indicator gives abnormal indication.. NOTE l If the software version of the spare board is V100R004C01 or earlier. no operation is required. l e. the receiver optical module is burnt and damaged. If the board is installed in the OptiX OSN 6800 subrack. Step 8 Review the indicators of the new board. It takes ten minutes for a new board to work normally after insertion. refer to "Indicators" of the Hardware Description. Choose Delete from the shortcut menu. and the board to be replaced is in any slot of the OptiX OSN 8800 T32 or OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack on the NE. l h. l a. Install the spare board in any available slot of the OptiX OSN 6800 subrack of version V100R004C02 or later. Choose Add Physical Board from the shortcut menu. it indicates that the process of the replacement board is successful. l g. For more information. l b. Click the NE where the replacement board resides. l i. Ensure that the STAT indicator is steady green. Otherwise. If the version is the same as that recorded in Step e. l If the OptiX OSN 8800 T64 does not function as the master subrack. Otherwise. or replace the board again. you need to take the following actions on the replacement board before replacing any original board on the NE. For more information regarding indicator definitions. perform the following operations before replacing the board: l If the board is installed in the OptiX OSN 3800 subrack. l c. l If the OptiX OSN 8800 T64 functions as the master subrack. Replace the fault board. Right-click the slot where the board to be replaced or the board with the same type as the board to be replaced resides. l d. see "Valid Slots" in the Hardware Description. reset or replace the replacement board. and record the displayed version information. and the process of the replacement board is complete. Right click the slot where the replacement board resides. Ltd. Remove the replacement board. and repeat Steps a to g. Install the spare board to any available slot of the OptiX OSN 6800 subrack of version V100R004C02 or later. Note that the master subrack of the NE where the OptiX OSN 6800 subrack is located cannot be OptiX OSN 8800 T64. refer to "Replacing a Board" of the Supporting Tasks. When the replacement board is in service. Right-click the slot where the replacement board resides. l b. you need to perform the following operations on the replacement board before replacing the original board. For the procedure.

----End 9. 6. 7. During board replacement. Impact on System Board-level protection is designed for protecting TBE boards. Select options under Performance Event Type. 3. Click Query to query the performance value for bit error on the NE side. Click Count option button.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 9 Replacing the Tributary and Line Board 1. 8. In the Monitored Object. In Monitor Period. In the Operation Result dialog box. the board software takes several minutes to be synchronized. Choose the desired boards in the left pane. and select Display Zero Data for the Display Options. click Close to finish the operation. and click the double-right-arrow button (red). For details of board-level protection mechanism. Ltd. Choose the option from the drop-down list next to Monitored Object Filter Condition. Prerequisite l You must be an NMS user with "NE and network operator" authority or higher. 5. see the Feature Description. the PROG indicator on the board is blinking green quickly. Replacing a TBE board brings no service interruption in case of a normal switching.. Figure 9-7 Board-level protection of the TBE board R1 TBE1 OM OD F I U OD TBE2 F I U OM L 4 G TBE2 TBE1 TBE1 TBE2 TBE1 TBE2 R1 R2 L 4 G R2 Working signal Protection signal Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. select 15-Minute. Choose Performance > Browse WDM Performance from the Main Menu of the U2000. Step 10 Query alarms and performances of the local NE and of the opposite NE and confirm that the original alarms or performances are cleared. At this point. 4. 2. and then click the Current Performance Data tab. 210 . FEC_BEF_COR_ER represents the BER before FEC.6 Under Board-Level Protection This section describes how to replace a TBE board when board-level protection is configured.

you need to handle these alarms before replacing the board. Ensure the name. This is to prevent abnormal protection switching caused by unstable operation of the protection group in the maintenance process. you can cancel the forcible switching to restore the normal state of the protection group when both the working and protection trails are normal. Step 2 Review and record the current alarms on the NE. which must be taken with special caution to prevent the optical module from being burnt or damaged. Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 211 . For more information. otherwise. version. CAUTION Before maintaining trails configured with protection.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 9 Replacing the Tributary and Line Board Tools. optical module and software version of the new board are the same as those of the original board. refer to "Querying Optical Module Information" of the Supporting Tasks. Ltd. you need to determine if the board with different versions can be replaced. perform this operation to determine if abnormal alarms are generated on the NE where the board to be replaced resides and the downstream NE. refer to the Hardware Description. Step 4 If the board is the current working board. NOTE To replace a board in an upgrade. perform forcible switching to ensure that services are on the stable and available trail. go to Step 6. If the board is the current protection board. Equipment and Materials ESD bag. loosely connect the fiber to prevent the input optical power from crossing the overload point. Step 3 Follow the steps below to query the working state of the board to be replaced: 1. Procedure Step 1 Select a spare board. model number. The overload optical power point of an APD receiver laser is only -9 dBm. Click Query to query the switching status of the current protection group. In the NE Explorer. the receiver optical module is burnt and damaged. After maintenance. go to Step 5. Query the optical module information. optical power meter Precaution CAUTION When you connect a fiber to the input optical port of a line board or tributary board.. If there are abnormal alarms. For more information regarding the replacement relation between board versions. click the NE and choose Configuration > Board-Level Protection from the Function Tree. For more information. refer to "Querying the Current Alarms" of the Supporting Tasks. NOTE If the version is inconsistent. 2. U2000.

The switching succeeds. If Manual Switch Request is displayed. right-click the desire NE and click NE Explorer from the shortcut menu. 5. the switching succeeds. otherwise. NOTE The channel status of the protection board must be Normal. follow the steps below to perform an active/standby switching on the U2000.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 9 Replacing the Tributary and Line Board Step 5 If the board to be replaced is the current working board. 1. Make sure that there are no new alarms or performance events and services are normal. Prevent the input optical power from crossing the overload point. 2. Query the U2000 for the alarms and performance events. In the Main Topology. 212 . Ltd. Otherwise. For the procedure. Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. For more information regarding how to replace a board. Click Function on the right-hand interface and select Manual Switching to Protection from the menu displayed. Click Query on the right-hand interface. 4. Step 7 Inform the onsite maintenance engineer and replace the board. Choose Configuration > Board-Level Protection from the Function Tree. the receiver optical module is burnt and damaged. Step 6 Test the input optical power. replacing the faulty board causes a service interruption. 3. Click OK on the interface displayed. refer to the Testing Optical Power by Using an Optical Power Meter in Supporting Tasks. The NE Explorer window is displayed.. refer to "Replacing a Board" of the Supporting Tasks.

4. Ensure that the STAT indicator is steady green. The NE Explorer window is displayed. refer to "Replacing a Board" of the Supporting Tasks. you need to take the following actions on the replacement board before replacing any original board on the NE. Step 9 Follow the steps below to cancel the switching. For other operations. l If the OptiX OSN 8800 T64 functions as the master subrack. Install the spare board to any available slot of the OptiX OSN 6800 subrack of version V100R004C02 or later. see "Valid Slots" in the Hardware Description. Remove the replacement board. Ltd. right-click the desire NE and click NE Explorer from the shortcut menu. the NE software delivers the configuration of the original board automatically. and the process of the replacement board is complete. Otherwise. l c. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. For more information regarding the valid slots of the board. l e. see "Valid Slots" in the Hardware Description. Issue 02 (2011-10-31) In the Main Topology. 213 . Step 8 Review the indicators of the new board. 2. Choose Version from the shortcut menu to query the board software version information. Double-click the icon of the optical NE in the Physical View. and the NE Panel is displayed. the services of the active boards in other slots may be interrupted.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement NOTE 9 Replacing the Tributary and Line Board l If the software version of the spare board is V100R004C01 or earlier. If the board is installed in the OptiX OSN 6800 subrack. l i. Click Query. the services of the active boards in other slots may be interrupted. and select Clear from the menu displayed. Install the spare board in any available slot of the OptiX OSN 6800 subrack of version V100R004C02 or later. l d. or replace the board again. Otherwise. refer to "Indicators" of the Hardware Description. When the replacement board is in service. and the board to be replaced is in any slot of the OptiX OSN 8800 T32 or OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack on the NE. Click the NE where the replacement board resides. Choose Add Physical Board from the shortcut menu. and repeat Steps a to g. perform the following operations before replacing the board: l If the board is installed in the OptiX OSN 3800 subrack. If the value is Idle. no operation is required. For more information regarding indicator definitions. and record the displayed version information. reset or replace the replacement board. Right-click the switched service. Replace the fault board. NOTE After the board is replaced. It takes ten minutes for a new board to work normally after insertion. you need to reinsert the board. Right-click the slot where the replacement board resides. For description of the indicators. Choose Delete from the shortcut menu. Otherwise. review the indicators on the board. see "Indicator" in the Hardware Description. Choose Version from the shortcut menu. you need to perform the following operations on the replacement board before replacing the original board. 3. it indicates that the process of the replacement board is successful. Right click the slot where the replacement board resides. For more information regarding the valid slots of the board. Right-click the slot where the replacement board resides. reset or replace the replacement board. 1. the switching is successful. Choose Configuration > Board-Level Protection from the Function Tree. l b. Right-click the slot where the board to be replaced or the board with the same type as the board to be replaced resides. see the previous steps b to i. If the indicator gives abnormal indication. l a. For more information. l If the OptiX OSN 8800 T64 does not function as the master subrack. l h. and check Switching Status. l b. l f. l g. l a. no operation is required. If the version is the same as that recorded in Step e.. If any indicator flashes abnormally. Note that the master subrack of the NE where the OptiX OSN 6800 subrack is located cannot be OptiX OSN 8800 T64.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 9 Replacing the Tributary and Line Board Step 10 Query the 15-minute BER before FEC at the receive end of the link. Step 11 Query alarms and performances of the local NE and of the opposite NE and confirm that the original alarms or performances are cleared. and select Display Zero Data for the Display Options. 8. Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. During board replacement. Tools. and click the double-right-arrow button (red). Select options under Performance Event Type. 7. If the board to be replaced is a tributary board. click Close to finish the operation. 3. If the board to be replaced is a line board without protection and carries electrical-layer ASON services. Equipment and Materials ESD bag. 4. 6. the services will be interrupted during board replacement. Choose the option from the drop-down list next to Monitored Object Filter Condition. FEC_BEF_COR_ER represents the BER before FEC. At this point. make sure that the wavelength of the new board is the same as that of the original board. In the Monitored Object. switch the services back to the original paths after board replacement. Impact on System Replacing an unprotected tributary or line board brings interruption of traditional services. optimize the electrical-layer ASON services traversing the board to other line boards (the preset restoration paths of the services are preferred if they do not traverse the line board to be replaced) before board replacement. Choose Performance > Browse WDM Performance from the Main Menu of the U2000. the board software takes several minutes to be synchronized. Prerequisite You must be an NMS user with "NE and network operator" authority or higher. Make sure that the BER before FEC does not deteriorate greatly from the value before board replacement. Click Count option button. Then. In the Operation Result dialog box. and then click the Current Performance Data tab. optical power meter Background Information When you replace a line board. In Monitor Period. select 15-Minute.. Click Query to query the performance value for bit error on the NE side. the PROG indicator on the board is blinking green quickly. Choose the desired boards in the left pane. 214 . 5. 2. 1. Ltd.7 Under No Protection This section describes how to replace a line board or a tributary board when no protection is configured. ----End 9. U2000.

NOTE To replace a board in an upgrade. Query the optical module information. Procedure Step 1 Select a spare board. Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Prevent the input optical power from crossing the overload point. For more information regarding the replacement relation between board versions.. optical module and software version of the new board are the same as those of the original board. For more information regarding how to replace a board. Step 4 Inform the onsite maintenance engineer and replace the board. model number. otherwise.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 9 Replacing the Tributary and Line Board Precaution CAUTION When you connect a fiber to the input optical port of a line board or tributary board. NOTE If the version is inconsistent. Ltd. you need to handle these alarms before replacing the board. you need to determine if the board with different versions can be replaced. loosely connect the fiber to prevent the input optical power from crossing the overload point. the receiver optical module is burnt and damaged. 215 . refer to the Testing Optical Power by Using an Optical Power Meter in Supporting Tasks. otherwise. Ensure the name. The overload optical power point of an APD receiver laser is only -9 dBm. refer to "Replacing a Board" of the Supporting Tasks. refer to "Querying Optical Module Information" of the Supporting Tasks. For the procedure. Step 3 Test the input optical power. refer to "Querying the Current Alarms" of the Supporting Tasks. perform this operation to determine if abnormal alarms are generated on the NE where the board to be replaced resides and the downstream NE. If there are abnormal alarms. For more information. operating wavelength. refer to the Hardware Description. For more information. which must be taken with special caution to prevent the optical module from being burnt or damaged. Step 2 Review and record the current alarms on the NE. version. the receiver optical module is burnt and damaged.

Ensure that the STAT indicator is steady green. you need to perform the following operations on the replacement board before replacing the original board. l d. For more information regarding the valid slots of the board. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. and record the displayed version information. Make sure the wavelength is the same as that of the original board. 216 Issue 02 (2011-10-31) .OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement NOTE 9 Replacing the Tributary and Line Board l If the software version of the spare board is V100R004C01 or earlier. Otherwise. NOTE After the board is replaced. For more information. Choose Delete from the shortcut menu. l e. For other operations. perform the following operations before replacing the board: l If the board is installed in the OptiX OSN 3800 subrack. it indicates that the process of the replacement board is successful. see the previous steps b to i. Choose Add Physical Board from the shortcut menu. the services of the active boards in other slots may be interrupted. Step 6 When you replace a line board. Step 5 Review the indicators of the new board. Note that the master subrack of the NE where the OptiX OSN 6800 subrack is located cannot be OptiX OSN 8800 T64. For more information regarding the valid slots of the board. no operation is required. l h. and the NE Panel is displayed. the NE software delivers the configuration of the original board automatically. and the process of the replacement board is complete. If any indicator flashes abnormally. 1.. It takes ten minutes for a new board to work normally after insertion. reset or replace the replacement board. If the indicator gives abnormal indication. Remove the replacement board. refer to "Replacing a Board" of the Supporting Tasks. you need to reinsert the board. and then select Band Type/Wavelength No. l a. Choose Version from the shortcut menu to query the board software version information. Otherwise. For more information regarding indicator definitions. If the version is the same as that recorded in Step e. see "Valid Slots" in the Hardware Description. l If the OptiX OSN 8800 T64 does not function as the master subrack. If the board is installed in the OptiX OSN 6800 subrack. For description of the indicators. Select By Function. Otherwise. Click the NE where the replacement board resides. When the replacement board is in service. Right-click the slot where the board to be replaced or the board with the same type as the board to be replaced resides. reset or replace the replacement board. Double-click the icon of the optical NE in the Physical View. Install the spare board to any available slot of the OptiX OSN 6800 subrack of version V100R004C02 or later. review the indicators on the board. Ltd. l a. Replace the fault board. Right-click the slot where the replacement board resides. Choose Version from the shortcut menu. refer to "Indicators" of the Hardware Description. l b. the services of the active boards in other slots may be interrupted. you need to take the following actions on the replacement board before replacing any original board on the NE./Wavelength(nm)/ Frequency(THz) from the drop-down list. l If the OptiX OSN 8800 T64 functions as the master subrack. Right click the slot where the replacement board resides. l b. l i. Install the spare board in any available slot of the OptiX OSN 6800 subrack of version V100R004C02 or later. no operation is required. see "Valid Slots" in the Hardware Description. l c. review on the U2000 the wavelength of the new board. and the board to be replaced is in any slot of the OptiX OSN 8800 T32 or OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack on the NE. and repeat Steps a to g. or replace the board again. Right-click the slot where the replacement board resides. l f. l g. select the desired board and choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the Function Tree. see "Indicator" in the Hardware Description. 2. In the NE Explorer.

FEC_BEF_COR_ER represents the BER before FEC. Click Count option button. Make sure that the BER before FEC does not deteriorate greatly from the value before board replacement. 217 . and select Display Zero Data for the Display Options./Wavelength(nm)/Frequency(THz) of each optical port. Choose Performance > Browse WDM Performance from the Main Menu of the U2000. Step 8 Query alarms and performances of the local NE and of the opposite NE and confirm that the original alarms or performances are cleared. NOTE If the replaced board is a tunable line board. after the board is replaced. Choose the option from the drop-down list next to Monitored Object Filter Condition. Select options under Performance Event Type. and click the double-right-arrow button (red). the SCC delivers the wavelength configuration of the original board automatically. In the Monitored Object. Click Query to query the performance value for bit error on the NE side. select 15-Minute. ----End Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Step 7 Query the 15-minute BER before FEC at the receive end of the link. click Close to finish the operation.. Click Query to view Band Type/Wavelength No. 4. In Monitor Period. 7. In the Operation Result dialog box. and then click the Current Performance Data tab. 5. Choose the desired boards in the left pane. 2. 6. 3.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 9 Replacing the Tributary and Line Board 3. 1. Ltd. 8.

replacing only a PID board.1 Under ODUk SNCP Protection This section describes how to replace a PID board when ODUk SNCP protection is configured. 10. Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd.2 Under No Protection This section describes how to replace a PID board when no protection is configured. Involved application scenarios are as follows: replacing a PID board and a PQ2 sub-board at the same time. Methods of replacing the PID board are described under the following scenarios: There is no protection for the PID board. replacing only a PQ2 sub-board. 218 .. Replacing the PID Board This section describes how to replace the PID board. replacing only a PQ2 sub-board. Involved application scenarios are as follows: replacing a PID board and a PQ2 sub-board at the same time. 10.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 10 Replacing the PID Board 10 About This Chapter l l ODUk SNCP is configured. replacing only a PID board.

Prerequisite You must be an NMS user with "NE and network operator" authority or higher. U2000. . Equipment. New Board TN54NPO201 TN54NPO202 TN54NPO203 TN54NPO204 TN54NPO205 TN54NPO206 Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Original TN55NPO2S01+TN54PQ2 TN55NPO2S02/TN55NPO2L02+TN54PQ2 TN55NPO2S03+TN54PQ2 TN55NPO2S04/TN55NPO2L04+TN54PQ2 TN55NPO2S05+TN54PQ2 TN55NPO2S06/TN55NPO2L06+TN54PQ2 219 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. ensure receive optical power of each channel is lower than 1 dBm.1 Under ODUk SNCP Protection This section describes how to replace a PID board when ODUk SNCP protection is configured. the PROG indicator on the board is blinking green quickly. optical power meter Background In the following scenarios. ESD bag. During board replacement. the board software takes several minutes to be synchronized. replacing only a PID board. replacing only a PQ2 sub-board. refer to the ODUk SNCP Protection in Feature Description. ensure receive optical power of each channel is lower than 0 dBm. When an ENQ2 board needs to be replaced on a 120 Gbit/s NE configured with a PID board. and Materials ESD wrist strap. see the following table. For details on board substitution relationships. when a PID board works with an OBU1P1 board on an NE. Tools. replacing a PID board generally brings no service interruption. you must configure the PQ2 sub-board to support four wavelengths. At this point. For details of the ODUk SNCP protection.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 10 Replacing the PID Board 10. l When substituting the TN55NPO2 board for the TN54NPO2 board.. Ltd. Impact on System When ODUk SNCP protection is configured. check optical power of the PID board before you replace the PID board to avoid optical power overload during board replacement: l When a TN55NPO2L06 or TN55NPO2L08 board needs to be replaced on a 200 Gbit/s NE configured with a PID board. Involved application scenarios are as follows: replacing a PID board and a PQ2 sub-board at the same time.

For more information. perform this operation to determine if abnormal alarms are generated on the NE where the board to be replaced resides and the downstream NE. otherwise. Review and record the current alarms on the NE.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 10 Replacing the PID Board New Board TN54NPO207 TN54NPO208 Original TN55NPO2S07+TN54PQ2 TN55NPO2S08/TN55NPO2L08+TN54PQ2 NOTE When you replace the NPO2/NPO2E board and the ENQ2 board at the same time. 3. Test the input optical power. Procedure (Replacing a PID Board and a PQ2 Sub-board) 1. If there are abnormal alarms. and software version of the new board are the same as those of the original board. version. For more information on board versions. Select a spare board. it is recommended to replace the NPO2/NPO2E board first. loosely connect the fiber to prevent the input optical power from crossing the overload point. otherwise. Ltd. For the procedure. (2) Click Query to obtain the SNCP protection state of each NE.. Ensure the name. refer to "Querying the Current Alarms" of the Supporting Tasks. the receiver optical module is burnt and damaged. (1) In the NE Explorer. refer to the Hardware Description. If the version is inconsistent. Prevent the input optical power from crossing the overload point. you need to determine if the board with different versions can be replaced. 220 . you need to handle these alarms before replacing the board. To replace a board in an upgrade. the receiver optical module is burnt and damaged. Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 4. click the NE and choose Configuration > WDM Service Management from the Function Tree. Precautions CAUTION When you connect a fiber to the input optical port of an NPO2 or NPO2E board. Click the SNCP Service Control tab. Query the working status of each channel on the board to be replaced. NOTE 2. refer to the Testing Optical Power by Using an Optical Power Meter in Supporting Tasks.

If the board is the current working board. (4) Click Function on the right-hand interface and select Manual to Protection from the menu displayed. This is to prevent abnormal protection switching caused by unstable operation of the protection group in the maintenance process. 8. Then. Inform the onsite maintenance engineer and replace the board. right-click the desire NE and click NE Explorer from the shortcut menu. For how to perform manual switching. If an ENQ2 board needs to be replaced. After maintenance. the switching succeeds. (3) Click SNCP Service Control tab. follow the steps below to perform active/standby switching on the U2000.. 7. 5. (3) Select the desired service and click Function on the bottom of the right-hand pane. Select Query Switching Status from the menu displayed. Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. go to 8. see 6. If Manual(from working to protection) switching state is displayed in the Status field. If the board is the current protection board. 6. (4) In the Operation Result dialog box. you can learn the service is working on active path or working on standby path. NOTE The channel status of the protection board must be normal. For more information regarding how to replace a board. Click OK on the interface displayed. The NE Explorer window is displayed. perform forcible switching to ensure that services are on the stable and available trail. (1) In the Main Topology. refer to "Replacing a Board" of the Supporting Tasks. Ltd. switch services on the working channel only over the ENQ2 board to the protection channel. (2) Choose Configuration > WDM Service Management from the Function Tree. you can cancel the forcible switching to restore the normal state of the protection group when both the working and protection trails are normal. switch services on the working channels of PID boards to protection channels.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 10 Replacing the PID Board CAUTION Before maintaining trails configured with protection. NOTE If an NPO2/NPO2E board needs to be replaced. replacing the faulty board causes a service interruption. Otherwise. Make sure that there are no new alarms or performance events and services are normal but only protection switching alarm. (5) Click Function on the right-hand interface and select Query Switching Status from the menu displayed. 221 . If the board to be replaced is the current working board. click Close to finish the operation. (6) Query the U2000 for the alarms and performance events. At the opposite end perform manual switching on the U2000 to ensure that the working channel at the opposite end and is consistent with that at the local end. go to 6.

If the value is Normal State. If the indicator gives abnormal indication. To replace an ENQ2 board. right-click the desire NE and click NE Explorer from the shortcut menu. FEC_BEF_COR_ER represents the BER before FEC. 12. 11. (4) Select the switched service. refer to Indicators of the Hardware Description. 222 . l Before inserting a board. and select Display Zero Data for the Display Options. and click the double-right-arrow button (red). l After the board is replaced. Ensure that the STAT indicator of the PID board and the PQ2 subboard is green. ensure that there is no fiber jumper on the optical ports on the board. Review the indicators of the new board. (6) Click Query to query the performance value for bit error on the NE side. Select Clear from the menu displayed. Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. perform steps 1. (5) Click Query. and click Function on the right-hand interface. Make sure that the BER before FEC does not deteriorate greatly from the value before board replacement. (5) Click Count option button. (4) In Monitor Period. (7) In the Operation Result dialog box. For more information about restarting of PID IPA. and 12. Release the switching on the local and opposite NEs. click Close to finish the operation. (3) Click SNCP Service Control tab. 10. and restore the fiber jumpers of the optical ports based on the fiber labels. Ltd. clean the fiber connectors using a fiber cleaning tissue. refer to Restarting of PID IPA of the Feature Description. a manual restarting at two stations is required after the board is replaced. 9. the NE software delivers the configuration of the original board automatically. When the Restart Mode of PID IPA is set to Manual. (1) Choose Performance > Browse WDM Performance from the Main Menu of the U2000. It takes ten minutes for a new board to work normally after insertion. you need to reinsert the board. 4– 10. select 15-Minute. (8) In the Monitored Object. Select options under Performance Event Type. NOTE The ENQ2 board does not support the PQ2 sub-board. Query alarms and performances of the local NE and of the opposite NE and confirm that the original alarms or performances are cleared. (3) Choose the option from the drop-down list next to Monitored Object Filter Condition. (1) In the Main Topology. or replace the board again. ensure that the fiber jumpers connecting to the optical ports on the board are removed. (2) Choose the desired boards in the left pane. the switching succeeds. and then click the Current Performance Data tab. (2) Choose Configuration > WDM Service Management in the Function Tree. The NE Explorer window is displayed. l After the board is replaced. and review Status.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement NOTE 10 Replacing the PID Board l Before removing a board. Query the 15-minute BER before FEC at the receive end of the link. For more information regarding indicator definitions.. 2.

If an ENQ2 board needs to be replaced. refer to the Hardware Description. and software version of the new board are the same as those of the original board. you need to handle these alarms before replacing the board. perform forcible switching to ensure that services are on the stable and available trail. If there are abnormal alarms. If the version is inconsistent.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 10 Replacing the PID Board Procedure (Replacing Only a PID Board) 1. Click the SNCP Service Control tab. For more information on board versions. The NE Explorer window is displayed. the receiver optical module is burnt and damaged. NOTE If an NPO2/NPO2E board needs to be replaced. (2) Click Query to obtain the SNCP protection state of each NE. 6. 3. go to 6. Review and record the current alarms on the NE. NOTE The channel status of the protection board must be normal. go to 8. Then. For more information. (4) In the Operation Result dialog box. (2) Choose Configuration > WDM Service Management from the Function Tree. switch services on the working channels of PID boards to protection channels. 4. After maintenance. Select a spare board. you can learn the service is working on active path or working on standby path. (3) Select the desired service and click Function on the bottom of the right-hand pane. follow the steps below to perform active/standby switching on the U2000. If the board is the current working board. This is to prevent abnormal protection switching caused by unstable operation of the protection group in the maintenance process. Query the working status of each channel on the board to be replaced. version. Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Test the input optical power. Ltd. switch services on the working channel only over the ENQ2 board to the protection channel. For the procedure. 223 . Ensure the name. right-click the desire NE and click NE Explorer from the shortcut menu. refer to the Testing Optical Power by Using an Optical Power Meter in Supporting Tasks. Select Query Switching Status from the menu displayed. NOTE 2. If the board to be replaced is the current working board. otherwise. CAUTION Before maintaining trails configured with protection. you can cancel the forcible switching to restore the normal state of the protection group when both the working and protection trails are normal. Prevent the input optical power from crossing the overload point. To replace a board in an upgrade. you need to determine if the board with different versions can be replaced. click Close to finish the operation. refer to "Querying the Current Alarms" of the Supporting Tasks. If the board is the current protection board. (1) In the NE Explorer. (1) In the Main Topology. click the NE and choose Configuration > WDM Service Management from the Function Tree. Otherwise. perform this operation to determine if abnormal alarms are generated on the NE where the board to be replaced resides and the downstream NE. 5.. replacing the faulty board causes a service interruption.

(5) After board replacement is complete. If the value is Normal State. and click Function on the right-hand interface. (4) Select the switched service. Inform the onsite maintenance engineer and replace the board. (3) Click SNCP Service Control tab. (1) In the Main Topology. (1) Choose Performance > Browse WDM Performance from the Main Menu of the U2000. Click OK on the interface displayed. the switching succeeds. clean the fiber connector using a fiber cleaning tissue and reconnect the pigtail to the optical port based on the fiber labels. Review the indicators of the new board. Make sure that the BER before FEC does not deteriorate greatly from the value before board replacement. refer to Indicators of the Hardware Description. After the board is replaced.. Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. The NE Explorer window is displayed. If the indicator gives abnormal indication. For details on how to remove and insert a new board. For more information regarding indicator definitions. 10. (2) Choose the desired boards in the left pane. (5) Click Query. right-click the desire NE and click NE Explorer from the shortcut menu. (6) Query the U2000 for the alarms and performance events. 11. 9. At the opposite end perform manual switching on the U2000 to ensure that the working channel at the opposite end and is consistent with that at the local end. (4) Click Function on the right-hand interface and select Manual to Protection from the menu displayed. 224 . For how to perform manual switching. Ensure that the STAT indicator of the PID board and the sub-board is green. or replace the board again. see 6. and then click the Current Performance Data tab. see "Replacing a Board" of the Supporting Tasks. (2) Choose Configuration > WDM Service Management in the Function Tree. you need to reinsert the board. the switching succeeds. (4) Insert the new board to the original slot. (5) Click Function on the right-hand interface and select Query Switching Status from the menu displayed. (2) Loosen the screws on the PQ2 sub-board and remove the board. NOTE 8. Select Clear from the menu displayed. Ltd. Release the switching on the local and opposite NEs. (3) Install the PQ2 sub-board on the new board and tighten the screws on the PQ2 subboard. (3) Choose the option from the drop-down list next to Monitored Object Filter Condition. and click the double-right-arrow button (red).OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 10 Replacing the PID Board (3) Click SNCP Service Control tab. the NE software delivers the configuration of the original board automatically. (1) Remove the pigtail connected to the optical port and remove the board to be replaced. Make sure that there are no new alarms or performance events and services are normal but only protection switching alarm. If Manual(from working to protection) switching state is displayed in the Status field. and review Status. It takes ten minutes for a new board to work normally after insertion. 7. Query the 15-minute BER before FEC at the receive end of the link.

2. refer to Restarting of PID IPA of the Feature Description. Ltd. (8) In the Monitored Object. (4) In the Operation Result dialog box. perform this operation to determine if abnormal alarms are generated on the NE where the board to be replaced resides and the downstream NE. This is to prevent abnormal protection switching caused by unstable operation of the protection group in the maintenance process. Select options under Performance Event Type. Then.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 10 Replacing the PID Board (4) In Monitor Period. 12. 3. NOTE To replace a board in an upgrade. If the NPO2/NPO2E board where the PQ2 sub-board to be replaced resides is the working board. For more information.. (2) Click Query to obtain the SNCP protection state of each NE. NOTE When the Restart Mode of PID IPA is set to Manual. If the board is the protection NPO2 or NPO2E board. click the NE and choose Configuration > WDM Service Management from the Function Tree. you need to handle these alarms before replacing the board. Query alarms and performances of the local NE and of the opposite NE and confirm that the original alarms or performances are cleared. (3) Select the desired service and click Function on the bottom of the right-hand pane. 4. For more information about restarting of PID IPA. (6) Click Query to query the performance value for bit error on the NE side. Procedure (Replacing Only a PQ2 Sub-board) 1. Review and record the current alarms on the NE. go to 6. refer to "Querying the Current Alarms" of the Supporting Tasks. you need to switch services on all working channels of PID boards to protection channels. If there are abnormal alarms. go to 4. CAUTION Before maintaining trails configured with protection. After maintenance. perform forcible switching to ensure that services are on the stable and available trail. and select Display Zero Data for the Display Options. Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 225 . select 15-Minute. click Close to finish the operation. (5) Click Count option button. (1) In the NE Explorer. FEC_BEF_COR_ER represents the BER before FEC. Select Query Switching Status from the menu displayed. perform manual switching on the NPO2/NPO2E board in U2000. If the board is the working NPO2 or NPO2E board. NOTE In this step. a manual restarting at two stations is required after the board is replaced. Click the SNCP Service Control tab. you can cancel the forcible switching to restore the normal state of the protection group when both the working and protection trails are normal. Query the working status of the NPO2/NPO2E board where the PQ2 sub-board resides. you can learn the service is working on active path or working on standby path. click Close to finish the operation. (7) In the Operation Result dialog box.

5. right-click the desire NE and click NE Explorer from the shortcut menu. (2) Choose Configuration > WDM Service Management from the Function Tree. (1) In the Main Topology. and review Status. The NE Explorer window is displayed. It takes three minutes for a new board to work normally after insertion. (5) Click Function on the right-hand interface and select Query Switching Status from the menu displayed. (1) Loosen the screws on the PQ2 sub-board and remove the board. replacing the faulty board causes a service interruption. Click OK on the interface displayed. (5) Click Query. NOTE 6. Select Clear from the menu displayed. (2) Install the new PQ2 sub-board on the original board and tighten the screws on the PQ2 sub-board. When the Restart Mode of PID IPA is set to Manual. At the opposite end perform manual switching on the U2000 to ensure that the working channel at the opposite end and is consistent with that at the local end. Otherwise. The NE Explorer window is displayed. refer to Indicators of the Hardware Description. For more information about restarting of PID IPA. Review the indicators of the new board. (6) Query the U2000 for the alarms and performance events. the switching succeeds. (2) Choose Configuration > WDM Service Management in the Function Tree. (4) Select the switched service. Query alarms and performances of the local NE and of the opposite NE and confirm that the original alarms or performances are cleared. and click Function on the right-hand interface. refer to Restarting of PID IPA of the Feature Description. (1) In the Main Topology. Release the switching on the local and opposite NEs. (3) Click SNCP Service Control tab. For more information regarding indicator definitions. If the value is Normal State.. see 4. Ensure that the STAT indicator of the PQ2 sub-board is green. 226 . Make sure that there are no new alarms or performance events and services are normal but only protection switching alarm. 8. (4) Click Function on the right-hand interface and select Manual to Protection from the menu displayed. 7. If Manual(from working to protection) switching state is displayed in the Status field. 9. Inform the onsite maintenance engineer and replace the PQ2 sub-board. or replace the board again. If the indicator gives abnormal indication. Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. the switching succeeds. For how to perform manual switching. you need to reinsert the board. a manual restarting at two stations is required after the board is replaced. Ltd. (3) Click SNCP Service Control tab. right-click the desire NE and click NE Explorer from the shortcut menu.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement NOTE 10 Replacing the PID Board The channel status of the protection board must be normal.

when a PID board works with an OBU1P1 board on an NE. see the following table. Ltd. For details on board substitution relationships. you must configure the PQ2 sub-board to support four wavelengths. check optical power of the PID board before you replace the PID board to avoid optical power overload during board replacement: l When a TN55NPO2L06 or TN55NPO2L08 board needs to be replaced on a 200 Gbit/s NE configured with a PID board. ensure receive optical power of each channel is lower than 1 dBm. Replacing only a PQ2 subboard will interrupt channels 5 to 8 on the NPO2 or NPO2E board. replacing only a PID board. Impact on System Replacing a PID board without protection will interrupt services. the PROG indicator on the board is blinking green quickly.. At this point. Involved application scenarios are as follows: replacing a PID board and a PQ2 sub-board at the same time. Tools.2 Under No Protection This section describes how to replace a PID board when no protection is configured. optical power meter Background In the following scenarios. l When substituting the TN55NPO2 board for the TN54NPO2 board. During board replacement. New Board TN54NPO201 TN54NPO202 TN54NPO203 TN54NPO204 TN54NPO205 TN54NPO206 TN54NPO207 Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Original TN55NPO2S01+TN54PQ2 TN55NPO2S02/TN55NPO2L02+TN54PQ2 TN55NPO2S03+TN54PQ2 TN55NPO2S04/TN55NPO2L04+TN54PQ2 TN55NPO2S05+TN54PQ2 TN55NPO2S06/TN55NPO2L06+TN54PQ2 TN55NPO2S07+TN54PQ2 227 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. the board software takes several minutes to be synchronized. Prerequisite You must be an NMS user with "NE and network operator" authority or higher.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 10 Replacing the PID Board 10. and Materials ESD wrist strap. replacing only a PQ2 sub-board. ESD bag. . ensure receive optical power of each channel is lower than 0 dBm. Equipment. When an ENQ2 board needs to be replaced on a 120 Gbit/s NE configured with a PID board. U2000.

If the version is inconsistent. otherwise. NOTE 4.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 10 Replacing the PID Board New Board TN54NPO208 Original TN55NPO2S08/TN55NPO2L08+TN54PQ2 NOTE When you replace the NPO2/NPO2E board and the ENQ2 board at the same time. Inform the onsite maintenance engineer and replace the board. the receiver optical module is burnt and damaged. l Before inserting a board. For more information regarding the replacement relationship between board versions. For more information. refer to "Replacing a Board" of the Supporting Tasks. l After the board is replaced. refer to "Querying the Current Alarms" of the Supporting Tasks. For more information regarding how to replace a board. refer to the Testing Optical Power by Using an Optical Power Meter in Supporting Tasks. 5. perform this operation to determine if abnormal alarms are generated on the NE where the board to be replaced resides and the downstream NE. Ensure the name. you need to handle these alarms before replacing the board. loosely connect the fiber to prevent the input optical power from crossing the overload point. ensure that there is no fiber jumper on the optical ports on the board. ensure that the fiber jumpers connecting to the optical ports on the board are removed. or replace Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd. l After the board is replaced. For the procedure. Review and record the current alarms on the NE. Ensure that the STAT indicator of the PID board and the PQ2 is green. the NE software delivers the configuration of the original board automatically. Procedure (Replacing a PID Board and a PQ2 Sub-board) 1. 3. It takes ten minutes for a new board to work normally after insertion. Prevent the input optical power from crossing the overload point. the receiver optical module is burnt and damaged. version. If the indicator gives abnormal indication. 228 Issue 02 (2011-10-31) . refer to the Hardware Description. it is recommended to replace the NPO2/NPO2E board first. Precautions CAUTION When you connect a fiber to the input optical port of an NPO2 or NPO2E board. To replace a board in an upgrade. If there are abnormal alarms. NOTE 2. and restore the fiber jumpers of the optical ports based on the fiber labels. Test the input optical power. you need to determine if the board with different versions can be replaced. and software version of the new board are the same as those of the original board.. otherwise. l Before removing a board. you need to reinsert the board. Review the indicators of the new board. Select a spare board. clean the fiber connectors using a fiber cleaning tissue.

Ensure the name. NOTE 2. For more information about restarting of PID IPA. (3) Choose the option from the drop-down list next to Monitored Object Filter Condition. (4) In Monitor Period. select 15-Minute. When the Restart Mode of PID IPA is set to Manual. (5) Click Count option button. 6. 2. Query the 15-minute BER before FEC at the receive end of the link. Prevent the input optical power from crossing the overload point. refer to the Testing Optical Power by Using an Optical Power Meter in Supporting Tasks. the receiver optical module is burnt and damaged. NOTE The ENQ2 board does not support the PQ2 sub-board. To replace an ENQ2 board. a manual restarting at two stations is required after the board is replaced. For more information regarding the replacement relationship between board versions. Query alarms and performances of the local NE and of the opposite NE and confirm that the original alarms or performances are cleared. 4. and click the double-right-arrow button (red). If there are abnormal alarms.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 10 Replacing the PID Board the board again. (3) Install the PQ2 sub-board on the new board and tighten the screws on the PQ2 subboard. refer to Restarting of PID IPA of the Feature Description. refer to "Querying the Current Alarms" of the Supporting Tasks. Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. (1) Choose Performance > Browse WDM Performance from the Main Menu of the U2000. (2) Choose the desired boards in the left pane. click Close to finish the operation. and select Display Zero Data for the Display Options. (7) In the Operation Result dialog box. To replace a board in an upgrade. If the version is inconsistent. (6) Click Query to query the performance value for bit error on the NE side. FEC_BEF_COR_ER represents the BER before FEC. Procedure (Replacing Only a PID Board) 1. Test the input optical power. (8) In the Monitored Object. 229 . refer to the Hardware Description. Review and record the current alarms on the NE. Make sure that the BER before FEC does not deteriorate greatly from the value before board replacement. Select a spare board. refer to Indicators of the Hardware Description. perform this operation to determine if abnormal alarms are generated on the NE where the board to be replaced resides and the downstream NE. Select options under Performance Event Type. perform steps 1. For more information. (1) Remove the pigtail connected to the optical port and remove the board to be replaced. you need to determine if the board with different versions can be replaced. For the procedure. 4. and software version of the new board are the same as those of the original board. Ltd. For more information regarding indicator definitions. version. and then click the Current Performance Data tab. (2) Loosen the screws on the PQ2 sub-board and remove the board.. 7. 3. otherwise. 5 and 7. you need to handle these alarms before replacing the board. Inform the onsite maintenance engineer and replace the board.

(3) Choose the option from the drop-down list next to Monitored Object Filter Condition.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 10 Replacing the PID Board (4) Insert the new board to the original slot. It takes three minutes for a new board to work normally after insertion. NOTE After the board is replaced. It takes ten minutes for a new board to work normally after insertion. For more information regarding indicator definitions. Inform the onsite maintenance engineer and replace the PQ2 sub-board. If there are abnormal alarms. perform this operation to determine if abnormal alarms are generated on the NE where the board to be replaced resides and the downstream NE. For details on how to remove and insert a new board. Select options under Performance Event Type. (5) Click Count option button. 2. For more information about restarting of PID IPA. the NE software delivers the configuration of the original board automatically. Procedure (Replacing Only a PQ2 Sub-board) 1. NOTE To replace a board in an upgrade.. (2) Choose the desired boards in the left pane. 6. (1) Choose Performance > Browse WDM Performance from the Main Menu of the U2000. Make sure that the BER before FEC does not deteriorate greatly from the value before board replacement. 7. click Close to finish the operation. refer to "Querying the Current Alarms" of the Supporting Tasks. (6) Click Query to query the performance value for bit error on the NE side. (5) After board replacement is complete. Review the indicators of the new board. (2) Install the new PQ2 sub-board on the original board and tighten the screws on the PQ2 sub-board. Review the indicators of the new board. If the indicator gives abnormal indication. (7) In the Operation Result dialog box. you need to reinsert the board. and then click the Current Performance Data tab. select 15-Minute. FEC_BEF_COR_ER represents the BER before FEC. For more information. Ensure that the STAT indicator of the PQ2 sub-board is green. Ensure that the STAT indicator of the PID board and the PQ2 subboard is green. clean the fiber connector using a fiber cleaning tissue and reconnect the pigtail to the optical port based on the fiber labels. 3. (1) Loosen the screws on the PQ2 sub-board and remove the board. Query the 15-minute BER before FEC at the receive end of the link. a manual restarting at two stations is required after the board is replaced. refer to Restarting of PID IPA of the Feature Description. and select Display Zero Data for the Display Options. refer to Indicators of the Hardware Description. Review and record the current alarms on the NE. (4) In Monitor Period. you need to handle these alarms before replacing the board. Ltd. (8) In the Monitored Object. and click the double-right-arrow button (red). 230 Issue 02 (2011-10-31) . 5. If Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. NOTE When the Restart Mode of PID IPA is set to Manual. see "Replacing a Board" of the Supporting Tasks. Query alarms and performances of the local NE and of the opposite NE and confirm that the original alarms or performances are cleared. or replace the board again.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement

10 Replacing the PID Board

the indicator gives abnormal indication, you need to reinsert the board, or replace the board again. For more information regarding indicator definitions, refer to Indicators of the Hardware Description. 4. Query alarms and performances of the local NE and of the opposite NE and confirm that the original alarms or performances are cleared.
NOTE

When the Restart Mode of PID IPA is set to Manual, a manual restarting at two stations is required after the board is replaced. For more information about restarting of PID IPA, refer to Restarting of PID IPA of the Feature Description.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

231

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement

11 Replacing the SDH Board

11
About This Chapter
l l Protection is configured.

Replacing the SDH Board

This section describes how to replace the SDH board. The SDH board can be replaced when: There is no protection for the SDH board.

11.1 Under Protection This section describes how to replace an SDH board when protection is configured for the SDH board. 11.2 Under No Protection This section describes how to replace an SDH board when no protection is configured for the SDH board.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

232

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement

11 Replacing the SDH Board

11.1 Under Protection
This section describes how to replace an SDH board when protection is configured for the SDH board.

Prerequisite
You must be an NMS user with "NE and network operator" authority or higher.

Impact on System
If an SDH board is configured with protection at the network level, replacing the board does not affect services in case of a normal switching. During board replacement, the board software takes several minutes to be synchronized. At this point, the PROG indicator on the board is blinking green quickly.

Tools, Equipment and Materials
ESD bag, U2000

Procedure
Step 1 Select a spare board. Ensure the name, version, model number, operating wavelength, optical module and software version of the new board are the same as those of the original board.
NOTE

If the version is inconsistent, you need to determine if the board with different versions can be replaced. For more information regarding the replacement relation between board versions, refer to the Hardware Description. Query the optical module information. For more information, refer to "Querying Optical Module Information" of the Supporting Tasks.

Step 2 Review and record the current alarms on the NE. For more information, refer to "Querying the Current Alarms" of the Supporting Tasks. Step 3 Follow the steps below to query the working state of the SDH board to be replaced. The procedure for querying the information about Linear MSP protection is considered as an example. 1. 2. Choose Service > SDH Protection Subnet > Maintain SDH Protection Subnet from the Main menu. Select the subnet name in the left pane, and then click Query to query the switching status of each node.

Step 4 If the board to be replaced is the current working unit, go to Step 5. If the board to be replaced is the current protection unit, go to Step 6. Step 5 If the board to be replaced is the current working board, follow the steps below to perform an active/standby switching on the U2000.
NOTE

The channel status of the board to which the service is to be switched must be Normal. Otherwise, replacing the faulty board causes a service interruption.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

233

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement

11 Replacing the SDH Board

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

In the Main Topology, right-click the desire NE and click NE Explorer from the shortcut menu. The NE Explorer window is displayed. Choose Configuration > Linear MS from the Function Tree. Select a channel in Slot Mapping Settings, and choose Exercise Switching from the shortcut menu. In the displayed dialog box, click Close. Click Query > Query Switching Status. If Exercise Switching is displayed in West Switching Status, it indicates that the exercise Linear MSP switching is in process. Query the alarms and performance events on the U2000. If only the alarms and performance events relevant to the exercise switching occur (that is, no other alarms or performance events occur) and the services are normal, it indicates that the switching is successful. In Slot Mapping Settings, select the channel. Then, choose Manual to Protection from the shortcut menu. In the Operation Result dialog box that is displayed, click Close. Click Query > Query Switching Status. If Manual Switching is displayed in West Switching Status, it indicates that the manual Linear MSP switching is in process.

6. 7.

Step 6 Inform the onsite maintenance engineer and replace the board. For details on how to replace a board, see "Replacing a Board" of the Supporting Tasks. Step 7 Review the indicators of the new board. It takes ten minutes for a new board to work normally after insertion. Ensure that the STAT indicator is steady green. If the indicator gives abnormal indication, you need to reinsert the board, or replace the board again. For more information regarding indicator definitions, refer to "Indicators" of the Hardware Description. Step 8 Query alarms and performances of the local NE and of the opposite NE and confirm that the original alarms or performances are cleared. Step 9 Optional: Follow the steps below to cancel the switching. 1. 2. 3. 4. In the Main Topology, right-click the desire NE and click NE Explorer from the shortcut menu. The NE Explorer window is displayed. Choose Configuration > Linear MS from the Function Tree. Select a channel in Slot Mapping Settingsship, and choose Clear from the shortcut menu. In the displayed dialog box, click Close. Click Query > Query Switching Status. If Normal is displayed in the node switching status field, it indicates that the switching is cleared.

Step 10 Query alarms and performances of the local NE and of the opposite NE and confirm that the original alarms or performances are cleared. ----End

11.2 Under No Protection
This section describes how to replace an SDH board when no protection is configured for the SDH board.

Prerequisite
You must be an NMS user with "NE and network operator" authority or higher.

Impact on System
Replacing unprotected SDH boards brings a service interruption.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 234

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement

11 Replacing the SDH Board

During board replacement, the board software takes several minutes to be synchronized. At this point, the PROG indicator on the board is blinking green quickly.

Tools, Equipment and Materials
ESD bag, U2000

Procedure
Step 1 Select a spare board. Ensure the name, version, model number, operating wavelength, optical module and software version of the new board are the same as those of the original board.
NOTE

If the version is inconsistent, you need to determine if the board with different versions can be replaced. For more information regarding the replacement relation between board versions, refer to the Hardware Description. Query the optical module information. For more information, refer to "Querying Optical Module Information" of the Supporting Tasks.

Step 2 Review and record the current alarms on the NE. For more information, refer to "Querying the Current Alarms" of the Supporting Tasks. Step 3 Inform field maintenance engineers and replace the board. For details on how to replace a board, see "Replacing a Board" of the Supporting Tasks.
NOTE

After the board is replaced, the NE software delivers the configuration of the original board automatically.

Step 4 Review the indicators of the new board. It takes ten minutes for a new board to work normally after insertion. Ensure that the STAT indicator is steady green. If the indicator gives abnormal indication, you need to reinsert the board, or replace the board again. For more information regarding indicator definitions, refer to "Indicators" of the Hardware Description. Step 5 Query alarms and performances of the local NE and of the opposite NE and confirm that the original alarms or performances are cleared. ----End

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

235

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement

12 Replacing the BPA Board

12
Prerequisite Impact on System

Replacing the BPA Board

This section describes how to replace the BPA board.

You must be an NMS user with "NE and network operator" authority or higher.

If the board is not configured with protection, the services are interrupted or signals are degraded when you replace the board. During board replacement, the board software takes several minutes to be synchronized. At this point, the PROG indicator on the board is blinking green quickly.

Tools, Equipment and Materials
ESD bag, U2000

Procedure
Step 1 Select a spare board. Ensure the name, version and model number of the new board are the same as those of the original board.
NOTE

If the version is inconsistent, you need to determine if the board with different versions can be replaced. For more information regarding the replacement relation between board versions, refer to the Hardware Description.

Step 2 Review and record the current alarms on the NE. For more information, refer to "Querying the Current Alarms" of the Supporting Tasks. Step 3 Query the protection configuration of the network. Query whether the equipment is configured with protection by using the U2000. If the equipment is not configured with protection, go to Step 5. The following example describes how to query the MSP protection. 1. 2. Choose Service > SDH Protection Subnet > Maintain SDH Protection Subnet from the Main menu. Select the subnet name in the left pane, and then click Query to query the switching status of each node.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 236

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)

Ltd. the APS_INDI alarm is reported. Right-click the board to be replaced and choose Exercise-Ring from the shortcut menu. 3. 5. the MSP switching is normal. click Close. If the switching status of the node is displayed as Exercise-Ring. the MSP switching is normal. When you perform the forced switching to protection-ring. The following example describes how to start the MSP protection switching. If there are no new alarms and performance events and the services are normal. the switching is successful. Query the alarms and performance events on the U2000. Choose Configuration > Ring MS from the Function Tree. refer to "Replacing a Board" of the Supporting Tasks. In the Main Topology. For more information regarding how to replace a board. Step 5 Inform the onsite maintenance engineer and replace the board. 1. NOTE 6. The NE Explorer window is displayed.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 12 Replacing the BPA Board Step 4 Start the network switching on the U2000 if the switching is not performed. 237 . 2. If the switching status of the node is displayed as Forced Switching-ring.. Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. right-click the desire NE and click NE Explorer from the shortcut menu. click Close. Choose Query > Query Switching Status. In the Operation Result dialog box that is displayed. 4. Select the board to be replaced and choose Forced Switching to Protection-Ring from the shortcut menu. In the Operation Result dialog box that is displayed. Click Query > Query Switching Status. and check whether there are any new alarms and performance events besides the alarms (such as APS_INDI) generated in the exercise switching. 7.

l After the board is replaced. l f. and the board to be replaced is in any slot of the OptiX OSN 8800 T32 or OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack on the NE. For more information. NOTE l Before removing a board. l a. For other operations. Choose Version from the shortcut menu. refer to "Replacing a Board" of the Supporting Tasks. Choose Add Physical Board from the shortcut menu. Replace the fault board. l If the OptiX OSN 8800 T64 functions as the master subrack. l h. When the replacement board is in service. Ltd. Right click the slot where the replacement board resides. Otherwise. Right-click the slot where the replacement board resides. you need to take the following actions on the replacement board before replacing any original board on the NE. reset or replace the replacement board. you need to perform the following operations on the replacement board before replacing the original board. Install the spare board to any available slot of the OptiX OSN 6800 subrack of version V100R004C02 or later. Otherwise. l i. and the process of the replacement board is complete. 2. Right-click the slot where the replacement board resides. see the previous steps b to i. If the version is the same as that recorded in Step e. Choose Version from the shortcut menu to query the board software version information. If any indicator flashes abnormally. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. For more information regarding the valid slots of the board. Click the NE where the replacement board resides. and record the displayed version information. For description of the indicators. the NE software delivers the configuration of the original board automatically. and repeat Steps a to g. l b.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement NOTE 12 Replacing the BPA Board l If the software version of the spare board is V100R004C01 or earlier. 238 . no operation is required. Step 6 Clear the MSP switching by using the U2000. l After the board is replaced. Otherwise. Choose Delete from the shortcut menu. l Before inserting a board. Remove the replacement board. The NE Explorer window is displayed. the services of the active boards in other slots may be interrupted. l e. l g. see "Valid Slots" in the Hardware Description. ensure that there are no fiber jumpers on the optical interfaces on the board. ensure that the fiber jumpers connecting to the optical interfaces on the board are removed. clean the fiber connectors using a fiber cleaning tissue. l If the OptiX OSN 8800 T64 does not function as the master subrack. and the NE Panel is displayed.. l a. right-click the desire NE and click NE Explorer from the shortcut menu. Note that the master subrack of the NE where the OptiX OSN 6800 subrack is located cannot be OptiX OSN 8800 T64. l b. it indicates that the process of the replacement board is successful. review the indicators on the board. Issue 02 (2011-10-31) In the Main Topology. reset or replace the replacement board. l c. perform the following operations before replacing the board: l If the board is installed in the OptiX OSN 3800 subrack. Install the spare board in any available slot of the OptiX OSN 6800 subrack of version V100R004C02 or later. see "Valid Slots" in the Hardware Description. Double-click the icon of the optical NE in the Physical View. Right-click the slot where the board to be replaced or the board with the same type as the board to be replaced resides. see "Indicator" in the Hardware Description. For more information regarding the valid slots of the board. Choose Configuration > Ring MS from the Function Tree. the services of the active boards in other slots may be interrupted. If the board is installed in the OptiX OSN 6800 subrack. l d. no operation is required. and restore the fiber jumpers of the optical interfaces based on the fiber labels. 1.

Check the STAT indicator on the board.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 12 Replacing the BPA Board 3. Step 8 Query alarms and performances of the local NE and of the opposite NE and confirm that the original alarms or performances are cleared. ----End Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. the MSP switching is cleared.. If the switching status of the node is displayed as Normal. Click Query > Query Switching Status. Ltd. Ensure that the STAT indicator is green and blinks once every other second. you need to reinsert the board or select a new replacement board. Step 7 View the indicators on the front panel of the new board. For details about the indicators. see "Indicators" of the Hardware Description. Check whether the board works normally. In the Operation Result dialog box that is displayed. It takes approximately three or four minutes for a new board to work normally after insertion. If the indicator is on and green. 4. 239 . click Close. Right-click the replaced board and choose Clear All from the shortcut menu. the board works normally. 5. If the indicator is not steady on green.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd. 13.1 Under Protection This section describes how to replace an EGSH board when protection is configured for the EGSH board. 240 . There is no protection for the EGSH board. The EGSH board can be replaced when: Protection is configured.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 13 Replacing the EGSH Board 13 About This Chapter l l Replacing the EGSH Board This section describes how to replace the EGSH board. 13..2 Under No Protection This section describes how to replace an EGSH board when no protection is configured for the EGSH board.

optical module and software version of the new board are the same as those of the original board. refer to "Querying the Current Alarms" of the Supporting Tasks. 241 . Equipment and Materials ESD bag. replacing the board does not affect services in case of a normal switching. model number. version. Ltd. Step 4 If the board to be replaced is the current working unit. operating wavelength.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 13 Replacing the EGSH Board 13. Prerequisite You must be an NMS user with "NE and network operator" authority or higher. and the service will switch to the current protection board. In the NE Explorer. For details. The procedure for configuring protection for the LAG board is considered as an example. refer to the Hardware Description. During board replacement. Step 3 Follow the steps below to query the working state of the EGSH board to be replaced. At this point. NOTE If the version is inconsistent. refer to "Querying Optical Module Information" of the Supporting Tasks. Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. go to Step 5. Query the optical module information. see "Querying the Current Alarms" of the Supporting Tasks. Step 5 Remove the fiber in the board to be replaced which connect to the DSLAM. For more information regarding the replacement relation between board versions. Step 2 Review and record the current alarms on the NE. If the board to be replaced is the current protection unit. Cover a fiber with a protection cap immediately after you remove it. The parameters of the current protection group can be queried. Tools. Ensure the name. Impact on System If an EGSH board is configured with protection at the network level. Click Query in the right pane. click the NE and choose Configuration > Ethernet Distributed Link Aggregation Management from the Function Tree. For more information. 1. NOTE Query the current alarms on the U2000. For more information. the board software takes several minutes to be synchronized. go to Step 6.. 2. you need to determine if the board with different versions can be replaced. U2000 Procedure Step 1 Select a spare board.1 Under Protection This section describes how to replace an EGSH board when protection is configured for the EGSH board. the PROG indicator on the board is blinking green quickly.

It takes ten minutes for a new board to work normally after insertion. 242 . Step 3 Inform field maintenance engineers and replace the board. NOTE After the board is replaced. optical module and software version of the new board are the same as those of the original board. Ltd.. During board replacement. or replace the board again. the NE software delivers the configuration of the original board automatically. refer to "Indicators" of the Hardware Description. Query the optical module information. If the indicator gives abnormal Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ensure that the STAT indicator is steady green. refer to the Hardware Description. you need to reinsert the board. Step 7 Review the indicators of the new board. Equipment and Materials ESD bag. Step 4 Review the indicators of the new board. refer to "Querying Optical Module Information" of the Supporting Tasks. Impact on System Replacing unprotected EGSH boards brings a service interruption. the board software takes several minutes to be synchronized. For more information regarding the replacement relation between board versions. NOTE If the version is inconsistent.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 13 Replacing the EGSH Board Step 6 Inform the onsite maintenance engineer and replace the board. model number. Prerequisite You must be an NMS user with "NE and network operator" authority or higher. operating wavelength. U2000 Procedure Step 1 Select a spare board. Step 2 Review and record the current alarms on the NE. For details on how to replace a board. For details on how to replace a board. the PROG indicator on the board is blinking green quickly. Ensure the name. see "Replacing a Board" of the Supporting Tasks. Tools. version. refer to "Querying the Current Alarms" of the Supporting Tasks. you need to determine if the board with different versions can be replaced. It takes ten minutes for a new board to work normally after insertion. Step 8 Query alarms and performances of the local NE and of the opposite NE and confirm that the original alarms or performances are cleared. see "Replacing a Board" of the Supporting Tasks. For more information regarding indicator definitions. ----End 13.2 Under No Protection This section describes how to replace an EGSH board when no protection is configured for the EGSH board. Ensure that the STAT indicator is steady green. If the indicator gives abnormal indication. For more information. At this point. For more information.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement

13 Replacing the EGSH Board

indication, you need to reinsert the board, or replace the board again. For more information regarding indicator definitions, refer to "Indicators" of the Hardware Description. Step 5 Query alarms and performances of the local NE and of the opposite NE and confirm that the original alarms or performances are cleared. ----End

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

243

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement

14 Replacing the Optical Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Board

14
Prerequisite

Replacing the Optical Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Board

This section describes how to replace the optical multiplexer and demultiplexer board.

You must be an NMS user with "NE and network operator" authority or higher.

Impact on System
Replacement of boards that process services causes interruption of traditional services. If ASON services traverse the board to be replaced, optimize the ASON services traversing the board to other paths (the preset restoration paths of the services are preferred if they do not traverse the board to be replaced) before board replacement. For optical-layer ASON services, the new paths must be commissioned; otherwise, the services may be interrupted. After board replacement, preset the insertion loss of the new board and re-commission the original paths. Then, switch the ASON services back to the original paths. If no other paths are available during board replacement, the ASON services will be interrupted. During board replacement, the board software takes several minutes to be synchronized. At this point, the PROG indicator on the board is blinking green quickly.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials
ESD bag, U2000

Procedure
Step 1 Select a spare board. Ensure the name, version and model number of the new board are the same as those of the original board.
NOTE

If the version is inconsistent, you need to determine if the board with different versions can be replaced. For more information regarding the replacement relation between board versions, refer to the Hardware Description.

Step 2 Review and record the current alarms on the NE. For more information, refer to "Querying the Current Alarms" of the Supporting Tasks.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 244

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement

14 Replacing the Optical Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Board

Step 3 Inform the onsite maintenance engineer and replace the board. For more information regarding how to replace a board, refer to "Replacing a Board" of the Supporting Tasks.
NOTE

l If the software version of the spare board is V100R004C01 or earlier, perform the following operations before replacing the board: l If the board is installed in the OptiX OSN 3800 subrack, no operation is required. l If the OptiX OSN 8800 T64 functions as the master subrack, you need to take the following actions on the replacement board before replacing any original board on the NE. Otherwise, the services of the active boards in other slots may be interrupted. l a. Install the spare board to any available slot of the OptiX OSN 6800 subrack of version V100R004C02 or later. Note that the master subrack of the NE where the OptiX OSN 6800 subrack is located cannot be OptiX OSN 8800 T64. For more information regarding the valid slots of the board, see "Valid Slots" in the Hardware Description. l b. When the replacement board is in service, review the indicators on the board. If any indicator flashes abnormally, reset or replace the replacement board. For description of the indicators, see "Indicator" in the Hardware Description. l c. Double-click the icon of the optical NE in the Physical View, and the NE Panel is displayed. Click the NE where the replacement board resides. l d. Right-click the slot where the replacement board resides. Choose Add Physical Board from the shortcut menu. l e. Right-click the slot where the replacement board resides. Choose Version from the shortcut menu to query the board software version information, and record the displayed version information. l f. Right click the slot where the replacement board resides. Choose Delete from the shortcut menu. l g. Right-click the slot where the board to be replaced or the board with the same type as the board to be replaced resides. Choose Version from the shortcut menu. If the version is the same as that recorded in Step e, it indicates that the process of the replacement board is successful. Otherwise, reset or replace the replacement board, and repeat Steps a to g. l h. Remove the replacement board, and the process of the replacement board is complete. l i. Replace the fault board. For more information, refer to "Replacing a Board" of the Supporting Tasks. l If the OptiX OSN 8800 T64 does not function as the master subrack, and the board to be replaced is in any slot of the OptiX OSN 8800 T32 or OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack on the NE, you need to perform the following operations on the replacement board before replacing the original board. Otherwise, the services of the active boards in other slots may be interrupted. If the board is installed in the OptiX OSN 6800 subrack, no operation is required. l a. Install the spare board in any available slot of the OptiX OSN 6800 subrack of version V100R004C02 or later. For more information regarding the valid slots of the board, see "Valid Slots" in the Hardware Description. l b. For other operations, see the previous steps b to i.
NOTE

l Before removing a board, ensure that the fiber jumpers connecting to the optical interfaces on the board are removed. l Before inserting a board, ensure that there are no fiber jumpers on the optical interfaces on the board. l After the board is replaced, clean the fiber connectors using a fiber cleaning tissue, and restore the fiber jumpers of the optical interfaces based on the fiber labels. l After the board is replaced, the NE software delivers the configuration of the original board automatically.

Step 4 Review the indicators of the new board. It takes ten minutes for a new board to work normally after insertion. Ensure that the STAT indicator is steady green. If the indicator gives abnormal indication, you need to reinsert the board, or replace the board again. For more information regarding indicator definitions, refer to "Indicators" of the Hardware Description.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 245

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement

14 Replacing the Optical Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Board

Step 5 Query alarms and performances of the local NE and of the opposite NE and confirm that the original alarms or performances are cleared. ----End

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

246

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement

15 Replacing the Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Board

15
Prerequisite Impact on System

Replacing the Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Board

This section describes how to replace the optical add and drop multiplexing board.

You must be an NMS user with "NE and network operator" authority or higher.

Replacement of boards that process services causes interruption of traditional services. If ASON services traverse the board to be replaced, optimize the ASON services traversing the board to other paths (the preset restoration paths of the services are preferred if they do not traverse the board to be replaced) before board replacement. For optical-layer ASON services, the new paths must be commissioned; otherwise, the services may be interrupted. After board replacement, preset the insertion loss of the new board and re-commission the original paths. Then, switch the ASON services back to the original paths. If no other paths are available during board replacement, the ASON services will be interrupted. During board replacement, the board software takes several minutes to be synchronized. At this point, the PROG indicator on the board is blinking green quickly.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials
ESD bag, U2000

Procedure
Step 1 Select a spare board. Ensure the name, version and model number of the new board are the same as those of the original board.
NOTE

If the version is inconsistent, you need to determine if the board with different versions can be replaced. For more information regarding the replacement relation between board versions, refer to the Hardware Description.

Step 2 Review and record the current alarms on the NE. For more information, refer to "Querying the Current Alarms" of the Supporting Tasks.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 247

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement

15 Replacing the Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Board

Step 3 Inform the onsite maintenance engineer and replace the board. For more information regarding how to replace a board, refer to "Replacing a Board" of the Supporting Tasks.
NOTE

l If the software version of the spare board is V100R004C01 or earlier, perform the following operations before replacing the board: l If the board is installed in the OptiX OSN 3800 subrack, no operation is required. l If the OptiX OSN 8800 T64 functions as the master subrack, you need to take the following actions on the replacement board before replacing any original board on the NE. Otherwise, the services of the active boards in other slots may be interrupted. l a. Install the spare board to any available slot of the OptiX OSN 6800 subrack of version V100R004C02 or later. Note that the master subrack of the NE where the OptiX OSN 6800 subrack is located cannot be OptiX OSN 8800 T64. For more information regarding the valid slots of the board, see "Valid Slots" in the Hardware Description. l b. When the replacement board is in service, review the indicators on the board. If any indicator flashes abnormally, reset or replace the replacement board. For description of the indicators, see "Indicator" in the Hardware Description. l c. Double-click the icon of the optical NE in the Physical View, and the NE Panel is displayed. Click the NE where the replacement board resides. l d. Right-click the slot where the replacement board resides. Choose Add Physical Board from the shortcut menu. l e. Right-click the slot where the replacement board resides. Choose Version from the shortcut menu to query the board software version information, and record the displayed version information. l f. Right click the slot where the replacement board resides. Choose Delete from the shortcut menu. l g. Right-click the slot where the board to be replaced or the board with the same type as the board to be replaced resides. Choose Version from the shortcut menu. If the version is the same as that recorded in Step e, it indicates that the process of the replacement board is successful. Otherwise, reset or replace the replacement board, and repeat Steps a to g. l h. Remove the replacement board, and the process of the replacement board is complete. l i. Replace the fault board. For more information, refer to "Replacing a Board" of the Supporting Tasks. l If the OptiX OSN 8800 T64 does not function as the master subrack, and the board to be replaced is in any slot of the OptiX OSN 8800 T32 or OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack on the NE, you need to perform the following operations on the replacement board before replacing the original board. Otherwise, the services of the active boards in other slots may be interrupted. If the board is installed in the OptiX OSN 6800 subrack, no operation is required. l a. Install the spare board in any available slot of the OptiX OSN 6800 subrack of version V100R004C02 or later. For more information regarding the valid slots of the board, see "Valid Slots" in the Hardware Description. l b. For other operations, see the previous steps b to i.
NOTE

l Before removing a board, ensure that the fiber jumpers connecting to the optical interfaces on the board are removed. l Before inserting a board, ensure that there are no fiber jumpers on the optical interfaces on the board. l After the board is replaced, clean the fiber connectors using a fiber cleaning tissue, and restore the fiber jumpers of the optical interfaces based on the fiber labels. l After the board is replaced, the NE software delivers the configuration of the original board automatically.

Step 4 Review the indicators of the new board. It takes ten minutes for a new board to work normally after insertion. Ensure that the STAT indicator is steady green. If the indicator gives abnormal indication, you need to reinsert the board, or replace the board again. For more information regarding indicator definitions, refer to "Indicators" of the Hardware Description.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 248

. ----End Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd. 249 .OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 15 Replacing the Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Board Step 5 Query alarms and performances of the local NE and of the opposite NE and confirm that the original alarms or performances are cleared.

preset the insertion loss of the new board and re-commission the original paths. Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. the PROG indicator on the board is blinking green quickly. You must be an NMS user with "NE and network operator" authority or higher. U2000 Procedure Step 1 Select a spare board. Then. 250 . Ltd.. otherwise. the board software takes several minutes to be synchronized. If ASON services traverse the board to be replaced. the services may be interrupted. refer to "Replacing a Board" of the Supporting Tasks. and Materials ESD bag. For more information regarding the replacement relation between board versions. During board replacement. After board replacement. At this point. Step 3 Inform the onsite maintenance engineer and replace the board. optimize the ASON services traversing the board to other paths (the preset restoration paths of the services are preferred if they do not traverse the board to be replaced) before board replacement. version and model number of the new board are the same as those of the original board. Equipment. the ASON services will be interrupted.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 16 Replacing the Optical Amplifier Board 16 Prerequisite Replacing the Optical Amplifier Board This section describes how to replace the optical amplifier board. Ensure the name. Impact on System Replacement of boards that process services causes interruption of traditional services. For more information regarding how to replace a board. Tools. you need to determine if the board with different versions can be replaced. the new paths must be commissioned. For more information. Step 2 Review and record the current alarms on the NE. If no other paths are available during board replacement. NOTE If the version is inconsistent. refer to the Hardware Description. refer to "Querying the Current Alarms" of the Supporting Tasks. For optical-layer ASON services. switch the ASON services back to the original paths.

l Before inserting a board. see "Valid Slots" in the Hardware Description. For more information regarding the valid slots of the board. l If the OptiX OSN 8800 T64 functions as the master subrack. Choose Version from the shortcut menu to query the board software version information. see "Indicator" in the Hardware Description. Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Step 4 View the indicators on the front panel of the new board. If the board is installed in the OptiX OSN 6800 subrack. Otherwise. l a. Choose Version from the shortcut menu. ensure that there are no fiber jumpers on the optical interfaces on the board. When the replacement board is in service. Double-click the icon of the optical NE in the Physical View. you need to perform the following operations on the replacement board before replacing the original board. Right click the slot where the replacement board resides. Replace the fault board. Otherwise. you need to take the following actions on the replacement board before replacing any original board on the NE. Install the spare board to any available slot of the OptiX OSN 6800 subrack of version V100R004C02 or later. Click the NE where the replacement board resides. For description of the indicators. and the NE Panel is displayed. review the indicators on the board. no operation is required. Ensure that the STAT indicator is green and blinks once every other second. Choose Add Physical Board from the shortcut menu. ensure that the fiber jumpers connecting to the optical interfaces on the board are removed. l c. 251 . l f. l e. reset or replace the replacement board. clean the fiber connectors using a fiber cleaning tissue. perform the following operations before replacing the board: l If the board is installed in the OptiX OSN 3800 subrack. it indicates that the process of the replacement board is successful.. refer to "Replacing a Board" of the Supporting Tasks. and restore the fiber jumpers of the optical interfaces based on the fiber labels. For other operations.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement NOTE 16 Replacing the Optical Amplifier Board l If the software version of the spare board is V100R004C01 or earlier. see the previous steps b to i. l h. l After the board is replaced. no operation is required. l i. reset or replace the replacement board. Right-click the slot where the replacement board resides. the NE software delivers the configuration of the original board automatically. l If the OptiX OSN 8800 T64 does not function as the master subrack. If any indicator flashes abnormally. NOTE l Before removing a board. and the process of the replacement board is complete. For more information regarding the valid slots of the board. Install the spare board in any available slot of the OptiX OSN 6800 subrack of version V100R004C02 or later. l b. l a. If the version is the same as that recorded in Step e. Choose Delete from the shortcut menu. the services of the active boards in other slots may be interrupted. For more information. If the indicator is not steady on green. For details about the indicators. and record the displayed version information. you need to reinsert the board or select a new replacement board. It takes approximately three or four minutes for a new board to work normally after insertion. Right-click the slot where the replacement board resides. l After the board is replaced. see "Valid Slots" in the Hardware Description. l b. the services of the active boards in other slots may be interrupted. l d. Otherwise. Remove the replacement board. Ltd. l g. see "Indicators" of the Hardware Description. and repeat Steps a to g. and the board to be replaced is in any slot of the OptiX OSN 8800 T32 or OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack on the NE. Right-click the slot where the board to be replaced or the board with the same type as the board to be replaced resides. Note that the master subrack of the NE where the OptiX OSN 6800 subrack is located cannot be OptiX OSN 8800 T64.

. Ltd. 252 .OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 16 Replacing the Optical Amplifier Board Step 5 Query alarms and performances of the local NE and of the opposite NE and confirm that the original alarms or performances are cleared. ----End Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.

After board replacement. and Materials ESD bag. the services may be interrupted. Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 17 Replacing the Raman Amplifier Board 17 Prerequisite Replacing the Raman Amplifier Board This section provides information on how to replace the Raman amplifier board. Ltd. Be aware of the laser security level. Be familiar with the fiber connection between the local Raman amplifier board and remote board. Impact on System Replacement of boards that process services causes interruption of traditional services. If ASON services traverse the board to be replaced. If no other paths are available during board replacement. the laser may bring damage to human body. Tools. Be familiar with the location of the connector. Otherwise. 253 . Equipment. optimize the ASON services traversing the board to other paths (the preset restoration paths of the services are preferred if they do not traverse the board to be replaced) before board replacement. the new paths must be commissioned. U2000 Precautions WARNING When replacing the Raman amplifier board or before removing or inserting the Raman amplifier board shut down the pump laser on the CRPC.. Take the drawings into the room. Confirm the amount of adopted Raman amplifier board. the ASON services will be interrupted. For optical-layer ASON services. switch the ASON services back to the original paths. otherwise. You must be an NMS user with "NE and network operator" authority or higher. possible injury and protective precautions.

Continue? dialog box is displayed. and set the value to Enabled or Disabled. In the NE Explorer. Ensure that the RUN indicator is green. the You are starting up to a high power Optical Fibre Communications System. click Close on the Operation Result dialog box. Remove the Raman amplifier board and put it into the ESD bag. In the Basic Attributes tab. double-click the Laser Status field of the CRPC-1(LINE/ LINE)-1 port and the CRPC-1(LINE/LINE)-2 port. Then. Click Apply. 4. double-click the field of Enable/ Disable. Ensure the name. Click Close. The Result dialog box is displayed telling you that the operation was successful. Step 2 Review and record the current alarms on the NE. repeat the steps above. select an NE and choose Configuration > IPA Management from the Function Tree. Click Close. click Close on the displayed Operation Result dialog box. the You can turn on a laser again only when the board belongs to an IPA pair. 4. Connect the fibers at the LINE port and the SYS port. Then. Select the IPA that you want to enable or disable. 5. The Result dialog box is displayed. Step 4 Shutting down the Raman laser. The NE Panel tab is displayed. Double-click the Optical NE icon on the Main Topology. 3. Insert the new Raman amplifier board. 2. For more information regarding the replacement relation between board versions. Select Channel from the drop-down list. refer to "Querying the Current Alarms" of the Supporting Tasks. Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. l After you close the laser. 2. The Warning dialog box is displayed and click Yes.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 17 Replacing the Raman Amplifier Board Procedure Step 1 Select a spare board. 4. 3. You must ensure that the fibre is continuous. NOTE If the version is inconsistent. l After you open the laser. In the NE Explorer of the opposite NE. 254 . Step 5 Replacing the Raman amplifier board. 3.. 1. Click OK. version and model number of the new board are the same as those of the original board. For more information. you need to determine if the board with different versions can be replaced. 2. Click By Board/Port(Channel). Click Query to query the created IPA information. 1. In the NE Explorer. 5. and then choose On or Off from the drop-down list to change the laser state. Click Apply. Step 3 Disabling the IPA. 1. Right-click the NE icon and select NE Explorer. refer to the Hardware Description. It takes approximately three or four minutes for a new board to work normally after insertion. Click OK. select the desired CRPC board and choose Configuration > WDM interface from the Function Tree. Do you wish to continue and enable this system? dialog box is displayed. Ltd. Step 6 View the indicators on the front panel of the new board. Disconnect the fibers at the LINE port and the SYS port.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 17 Replacing the Raman Amplifier Board If the indicator is not green.Optical power on the SYS interface when the Raman laser is disabled Step 8 Query alarms and performances of the local NE and of the opposite NE and confirm that the original alarms or performances are cleared.. If not. Ltd. you need to reinsert the board or select a new replacement board. NOTE On-off gain = Optical power on the SYS interface when the laser is enabled . turn on the Raman laser. For details about the indicators. adjust the on-off gain of the board. ----End Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. see "Indicators" of the Hardware Description. 255 . Check whether the on-off gain of the Raman amplifier board complies with the specification requirement for the on-off gain of the board. Step 9 Checking and ensuring that the traffic is correct. Step 7 Enable the IPA function. NOTE If there are any other problems. For the detailed adjusting procedure. see the Commissioning Guide. contact Huawei Technical Support.

version and model number of the new board are the same as those of the original board. At this point. If no other paths are available during board replacement. the ASON services will be interrupted. the services may be interrupted. the new paths must be commissioned. you need to determine if the board with different versions can be replaced. U2000 Procedure Step 1 Select a spare board. For more information. the board software takes several minutes to be synchronized. Ltd. You must be an NMS user with "NE and network operator" authority or higher. Step 2 Review and record the current alarms on the NE. Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. and Materials ESD bag. refer to the Hardware Description. Replacement of boards that process services causes interruption of traditional services. If ASON services traverse the board to be replaced. otherwise. Then. 256 . Tools.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 18 Replacing the Variable Optical Attenuator Board 18 Prerequisite Impact on System Replacing the Variable Optical Attenuator Board This section describes how to replace the variable optical attenuator board. After board replacement. optimize the ASON services traversing the board to other paths (the preset restoration paths of the services are preferred if they do not traverse the board to be replaced) before board replacement. For optical-layer ASON services. NOTE If the version is inconsistent. refer to "Querying the Current Alarms" of the Supporting Tasks. the PROG indicator on the board is blinking green quickly. Equipment. switch the ASON services back to the original paths. preset the insertion loss of the new board and re-commission the original paths. During board replacement. For more information regarding the replacement relation between board versions.. Ensure the name.

For more information regarding how to replace a board. see the previous steps b to i. l After the board is replaced. l b. Right-click the slot where the board to be replaced or the board with the same type as the board to be replaced resides. you need to perform the following operations on the replacement board before replacing the original board. For more information regarding indicator definitions. you need to take the following actions on the replacement board before replacing any original board on the NE. refer to "Replacing a Board" of the Supporting Tasks. refer to "Indicators" of the Hardware Description. NOTE l Before removing a board. If the board is installed in the OptiX OSN 6800 subrack. l If the OptiX OSN 8800 T64 does not function as the master subrack. see "Indicator" in the Hardware Description. perform the following operations before replacing the board: l If the board is installed in the OptiX OSN 3800 subrack. For more information. l e. l Before inserting a board. For more information regarding the valid slots of the board. and restore the fiber jumpers of the optical interfaces based on the fiber labels. 257 . If the version is the same as that recorded in Step e. l c. Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.. the NE software delivers the configuration of the original board automatically. l b. When the replacement board is in service. reset or replace the replacement board. Otherwise. l a. and the NE Panel is displayed. Otherwise. and the board to be replaced is in any slot of the OptiX OSN 8800 T32 or OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack on the NE. If the indicator gives abnormal indication. Note that the master subrack of the NE where the OptiX OSN 6800 subrack is located cannot be OptiX OSN 8800 T64. and repeat Steps a to g. For other operations. no operation is required. reset or replace the replacement board. NOTE l If the software version of the spare board is V100R004C01 or earlier. l i. ensure that the fiber jumpers connecting to the optical interfaces on the board are removed. Replace the fault board. Double-click the icon of the optical NE in the Physical View. review the indicators on the board. Choose Version from the shortcut menu to query the board software version information. Right-click the slot where the replacement board resides. the services of the active boards in other slots may be interrupted. Choose Delete from the shortcut menu. Choose Version from the shortcut menu. l After the board is replaced. see "Valid Slots" in the Hardware Description. and the process of the replacement board is complete. l a. Step 4 Review the indicators of the new board. clean the fiber connectors using a fiber cleaning tissue. and record the displayed version information. Remove the replacement board. see "Valid Slots" in the Hardware Description. ensure that there are no fiber jumpers on the optical interfaces on the board. refer to "Replacing a Board" of the Supporting Tasks. l g. l If the OptiX OSN 8800 T64 functions as the master subrack. Ensure that the STAT indicator is steady green. It takes ten minutes for a new board to work normally after insertion. Right-click the slot where the replacement board resides. l f. Otherwise. no operation is required. Install the spare board in any available slot of the OptiX OSN 6800 subrack of version V100R004C02 or later. Install the spare board to any available slot of the OptiX OSN 6800 subrack of version V100R004C02 or later. it indicates that the process of the replacement board is successful. l d. If any indicator flashes abnormally. For description of the indicators.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 18 Replacing the Variable Optical Attenuator Board Step 3 Inform the onsite maintenance engineer and replace the board. l h. Ltd. Click the NE where the replacement board resides. Choose Add Physical Board from the shortcut menu. the services of the active boards in other slots may be interrupted. or replace the board again. you need to reinsert the board. Right click the slot where the replacement board resides. For more information regarding the valid slots of the board.

258 . ----End Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 18 Replacing the Variable Optical Attenuator Board Step 5 Query alarms and performances of the local NE and of the opposite NE and confirm that the original alarms or performances are cleared.. Ltd.

. Ensure the name. For more information regarding the replacement relation between board versions. U2000 Procedure Step 1 Select a spare board. During board replacement. and Materials ESD bag. refer to "Querying the Current Alarms" of the Supporting Tasks. Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. version and model number of the new board are the same as those of the original board. 259 . NOTE If the version is inconsistent. Step 3 Inform the onsite maintenance engineer and replace the board. refer to the Hardware Description. At this point. Equipment. the board software takes several minutes to be synchronized.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 19 Replacing the Optical Supervisory Channel Board 19 Prerequisite Impact on System Replacing the Optical Supervisory Channel Board This section describes how to replace the optical supervisory channel board. refer to "Replacing a Board" of the Supporting Tasks. Ltd. You must be an NMS user with "NE and network operator" authority or higher. For more information regarding how to replace a board. If the OSC board to be replaced is housed on an optical-layer ASON NE. Step 2 Review and record the current alarms on the NE. Replacement of boards causes interruption of the optical supervisory channel services. you need to determine if the board with different versions can be replaced. Tools. the PROG indicator on the board is blinking green quickly. For more information. TE links on the FIU board connected to the OSC board are interrupted or downgraded.

and record the displayed version information. If the indicator gives abnormal indication. clean the fiber connectors using a fiber cleaning tissue. It takes ten minutes for a new board to work normally after insertion. Right-click the slot where the replacement board resides. you need to take the following actions on the replacement board before replacing any original board on the NE. Install the spare board in any available slot of the OptiX OSN 6800 subrack of version V100R004C02 or later. see "Indicator" in the Hardware Description. Right-click the slot where the replacement board resides. Otherwise. For more information. l a. When the replacement board is in service. Install the spare board to any available slot of the OptiX OSN 6800 subrack of version V100R004C02 or later. Otherwise.. reset or replace the replacement board. l g. l If the OptiX OSN 8800 T64 functions as the master subrack. l b. For more information regarding the valid slots of the board. no operation is required. Choose Delete from the shortcut menu.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement NOTE 19 Replacing the Optical Supervisory Channel Board l If the software version of the spare board is V100R004C01 or earlier. For more information regarding indicator definitions. you need to reinsert the board. see the previous steps b to i. Right-click the slot where the board to be replaced or the board with the same type as the board to be replaced resides. see "Valid Slots" in the Hardware Description. l After the board is replaced. l Before inserting a board. For other operations. refer to "Replacing a Board" of the Supporting Tasks. see "Valid Slots" in the Hardware Description. If the version is the same as that recorded in Step e. l c. Ensure that the STAT indicator is steady green. l d. Step 4 Review the indicators of the new board. If any indicator flashes abnormally. Choose Version from the shortcut menu to query the board software version information. Choose Version from the shortcut menu. ensure that there are no fiber jumpers on the optical interfaces on the board. the services of the active boards in other slots may be interrupted. ensure that the fiber jumpers connecting to the optical interfaces on the board are removed. For more information regarding the valid slots of the board. the NE software delivers the configuration of the original board automatically. Click the NE where the replacement board resides. Double-click the icon of the optical NE in the Physical View. Note that the master subrack of the NE where the OptiX OSN 6800 subrack is located cannot be OptiX OSN 8800 T64. l f. l If the OptiX OSN 8800 T64 does not function as the master subrack. If the board is installed in the OptiX OSN 6800 subrack. l b. and restore the fiber jumpers of the optical interfaces based on the fiber labels. and repeat Steps a to g. Remove the replacement board. Right click the slot where the replacement board resides. 260 . Ltd. no operation is required. For description of the indicators. you need to perform the following operations on the replacement board before replacing the original board. l After the board is replaced. the services of the active boards in other slots may be interrupted. Choose Add Physical Board from the shortcut menu. l h. Step 5 Query alarms and performances of the local NE and of the opposite NE and confirm that the original alarms or performances are cleared. l e. review the indicators on the board. it indicates that the process of the replacement board is successful. Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. NOTE l Before removing a board. reset or replace the replacement board. l a. and the board to be replaced is in any slot of the OptiX OSN 8800 T32 or OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack on the NE. and the NE Panel is displayed. l i. perform the following operations before replacing the board: l If the board is installed in the OptiX OSN 3800 subrack. Otherwise. refer to "Indicators" of the Hardware Description. Replace the fault board. or replace the board again. and the process of the replacement board is complete.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 19 Replacing the Optical Supervisory Channel Board Step 6 If the NE is an ASON NE. Ltd. ----End Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. synchronize TE links and verify that the status of the TE links and control links corresponding to the board after replacement is correct in the TE link management window. 261 .. for an optical-layer ASON NE.

and that the clock board in slot 86 works normally and the subrack where it is located has no BUS_ERR alarm. 1+1 protection is configured for STG boards. Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. see the Hardware Description. U2000. Screwdriver Procedure Step 1 Select a spare board. NOTE If the version is inconsistent. Step 2 Query and record the current alarms on the NE. model number. perform an active/standby switching on the U2000. At this point. Replacing an STG board will trigger switching on the active and standby STG boards and therefore services are not affected. During board replacement. The name. You must be an NMS user with "NE and network operator" authority or higher. the board software takes several minutes to be synchronized. 262 . Equipment. assume that the clock board to be replaced is located in slot 75 and it is the main cross-connect board. NOTE For OptiX OSN 8800 T64. the PROG indicator on the board is blinking green quickly. NOTE For OptiX OSN 8800 T32. Generally. and Materials ESD bag. For details. For details about the replacement relationship between board versions. version. Step 3 For OptiX OSN 8800. and that the clock board in slot 44 works normally and the subrack where it is located has no BUS_ERR alarm. and software version of the new board must be the same as those of the original board. Tools.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 20 Replacing the Clock Board 20 Prerequisite Impact on System Replacing the Clock Board This section describes how to replace the clock board. assume that the clock board to be replaced is located in slot 42 and it is the main cross-connect board. Ltd. you need to check whether the board with different versions can be replaced.. see "Querying the Current Alarms" of the Supporting Tasks.

Click OK in the window displayed. 263 . If services are normal. Ensure that the STAT indicator is steady green. For details about how to replace a board. Click Query.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 20 Replacing the Clock Board 1. Step 4 Inform the onsite maintenance engineer and replace the board. right-click the desire NE and click NE Explorer from the shortcut menu. the NE software delivers the configuration of the original board automatically. NOTE After the board is replaced. the switching is successful. In the Main Topology. right-click the desired Clock Board 1+1 Protection. 2.. 5. you need to reinsert the board. or replace the board again. 3. Check if services are normal. The switching is successful. refer to "Indicators" of the Hardware Description. there must be no new abnormal alarms or performances. Choose Configuration > Board 1+1 Protection from the Function Tree. It takes ten minutes for a new board to work normally after insertion. 4. Ltd. ----End Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. For more information regarding indicator definitions. Select Working/Protection Switching from the shortcut menu. If the indicator gives abnormal indication. Step 5 Review the indicators of the new board. Query the alarms and performance events on the U2000. see "Replacing a Board" of the Supporting Tasks. The NE Explorer window is displayed. In Board 1+1 Protection. If the Active Board is not the board to be replaced. Step 6 Query alarms and performances of the local NE and of the opposite NE and confirm that the original alarms or performances are cleared.

Ensure the name. the PROG indicator on the board is blinking green quickly. Step 2 Review and record the current alarms on the NE. refer to the Hardware Description.. For more information. Ltd. For more information regarding the replacement relation between board versions. refer to "Replacing a Board" of the Supporting Tasks. Impact on System Replacement of boards that process services causes service interruption. During board replacement. the board software takes several minutes to be synchronized. NOTE If the version is inconsistent. version and model number of the new board are the same as those of the original board. Step 3 Inform the onsite maintenance engineer and replace the board. You must be an NMS user with "NE and network operator" authority or higher. Tools. At this point. Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. you need to determine if the board with different versions can be replaced. refer to "Querying the Current Alarms" of the Supporting Tasks. U2000 Procedure Step 1 Select a spare board. 264 . For more information regarding how to replace a board. Equipment.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 21 Replacing the Optical Protection Board 21 Prerequisite Replacing the Optical Protection Board This section describes how to replace the optical protection board. and Materials ESD bag.

Right-click the slot where the board to be replaced or the board with the same type as the board to be replaced resides. the NE software delivers the configuration of the original board automatically. the services of the active boards in other slots may be interrupted. Click the NE where the replacement board resides. refer to "Replacing a Board" of the Supporting Tasks. Note that the master subrack of the NE where the OptiX OSN 6800 subrack is located cannot be OptiX OSN 8800 T64. Ensure that the STAT indicator is steady green. Choose Version from the shortcut menu. review the indicators on the board. ensure that the fiber jumpers connecting to the optical interfaces on the board are removed. reset or replace the replacement board. and the process of the replacement board is complete. l After the board is replaced. see the previous steps b to i. NOTE l Before removing a board. and the board to be replaced is in any slot of the OptiX OSN 8800 T32 or OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack on the NE. you need to reinsert the board. clean the fiber connectors using a fiber cleaning tissue. l a.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement NOTE 21 Replacing the Optical Protection Board l If the software version of the spare board is V100R004C01 or earlier. and the NE Panel is displayed. l f. Otherwise. Choose Delete from the shortcut menu. the services of the active boards in other slots may be interrupted. perform the following operations before replacing the board: l If the board is installed in the OptiX OSN 3800 subrack.. If the indicator gives abnormal indication. For more information regarding the valid slots of the board. Right-click the slot where the replacement board resides. reset or replace the replacement board. l h. It takes ten minutes for a new board to work normally after insertion. no operation is required. Install the spare board to any available slot of the OptiX OSN 6800 subrack of version V100R004C02 or later. For more information. Replace the fault board. and repeat Steps a to g. l After the board is replaced. l c. Right-click the slot where the replacement board resides. If any indicator flashes abnormally. l d. see "Indicator" in the Hardware Description. or replace the board again. If the board is installed in the OptiX OSN 6800 subrack. When the replacement board is in service. l If the OptiX OSN 8800 T64 functions as the master subrack. Right click the slot where the replacement board resides. l a. l e. Remove the replacement board. Step 4 Review the indicators of the new board. Otherwise. For more information regarding the valid slots of the board. no operation is required. Choose Version from the shortcut menu to query the board software version information. l i. and record the displayed version information. you need to take the following actions on the replacement board before replacing any original board on the NE. For other operations. Install the spare board in any available slot of the OptiX OSN 6800 subrack of version V100R004C02 or later. l If the OptiX OSN 8800 T64 does not function as the master subrack. For more information regarding indicator definitions. l Before inserting a board. Otherwise. Choose Add Physical Board from the shortcut menu. l b. you need to perform the following operations on the replacement board before replacing the original board. l g. If the version is the same as that recorded in Step e. and restore the fiber jumpers of the optical interfaces based on the fiber labels. it indicates that the process of the replacement board is successful. Double-click the icon of the optical NE in the Physical View. Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. see "Valid Slots" in the Hardware Description. Ltd. l b. see "Valid Slots" in the Hardware Description. For description of the indicators. ensure that there are no fiber jumpers on the optical interfaces on the board. 265 . refer to "Indicators" of the Hardware Description.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 21 Replacing the Optical Protection Board Step 5 Query alarms and performances of the local NE and of the opposite NE and confirm that the original alarms or performances are cleared. ----End Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd. 266 ..

Impact on System During board replacement. For more information regarding the replacement relation between board versions. For more information regarding how to replace a board. refer to the Hardware Description.. At this point.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 22 Replacing the Spectrum Analyzer Board 22 Prerequisite Replacing the Spectrum Analyzer Board This section describes how to replace the spectrum analyzer board. U2000 Procedure Step 1 Select a spare board. Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. NOTE If the version is inconsistent. 267 . Step 3 Inform the onsite maintenance engineer and replace the board. the board software takes several minutes to be synchronized. Ltd. and Materials ESD bag. refer to "Replacing a Board" of the Supporting Tasks. You must be an NMS user with "NE and network operator" authority or higher. Ensure the name. For more information. you need to determine if the board with different versions can be replaced. Tools. the PROG indicator on the board is blinking green quickly. refer to "Querying the Current Alarms" of the Supporting Tasks. Step 2 Review and record the current alarms on the NE. Equipment. version and model number of the new board are the same as those of the original board.

If the board is installed in the OptiX OSN 6800 subrack. the NE software delivers the configuration of the original board automatically. and the NE Panel is displayed. you need to perform the following operations on the replacement board before replacing the original board. Otherwise. l b. Step 4 Review the indicators of the new board. it indicates that the process of the replacement board is successful. If any indicator flashes abnormally. NOTE l Before removing a board. reset or replace the replacement board. For more information. l i. and the board to be replaced is in any slot of the OptiX OSN 8800 T32 or OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack on the NE. If the version is the same as that recorded in Step e. Note that the master subrack of the NE where the OptiX OSN 6800 subrack is located cannot be OptiX OSN 8800 T64. refer to "Indicators" of the Hardware Description. For more information regarding the valid slots of the board. When the replacement board is in service. ensure that the fiber jumpers connecting to the optical interfaces on the board are removed. l If the OptiX OSN 8800 T64 does not function as the master subrack. For more information regarding the valid slots of the board. l g. Double-click the icon of the optical NE in the Physical View. Otherwise. see the previous steps b to i. and the process of the replacement board is complete.. clean the fiber connectors using a fiber cleaning tissue. Choose Add Physical Board from the shortcut menu. 268 . Ltd. l e. It takes ten minutes for a new board to work normally after insertion. no operation is required. If the indicator gives abnormal indication. Install the spare board in any available slot of the OptiX OSN 6800 subrack of version V100R004C02 or later. Choose Delete from the shortcut menu. the services of the active boards in other slots may be interrupted. Click the NE where the replacement board resides. and restore the fiber jumpers of the optical interfaces based on the fiber labels. l If the OptiX OSN 8800 T64 functions as the master subrack. For other operations. l Before inserting a board. see "Valid Slots" in the Hardware Description. see "Indicator" in the Hardware Description. Install the spare board to any available slot of the OptiX OSN 6800 subrack of version V100R004C02 or later. l d. Replace the fault board. For more information regarding indicator definitions. l After the board is replaced. Right-click the slot where the board to be replaced or the board with the same type as the board to be replaced resides. l a. l a. Choose Version from the shortcut menu to query the board software version information. l c. and repeat Steps a to g. For description of the indicators. l h. ensure that there are no fiber jumpers on the optical interfaces on the board. review the indicators on the board. you need to reinsert the board. Choose Version from the shortcut menu. the services of the active boards in other slots may be interrupted. Right-click the slot where the replacement board resides. Ensure that the STAT indicator is steady green. refer to "Replacing a Board" of the Supporting Tasks. Otherwise. or replace the board again. Right click the slot where the replacement board resides. see "Valid Slots" in the Hardware Description.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement NOTE 22 Replacing the Spectrum Analyzer Board l If the software version of the spare board is V100R004C01 or earlier. reset or replace the replacement board. Right-click the slot where the replacement board resides. l b. and record the displayed version information. Remove the replacement board. perform the following operations before replacing the board: l If the board is installed in the OptiX OSN 3800 subrack. l f. you need to take the following actions on the replacement board before replacing any original board on the NE. Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. no operation is required. l After the board is replaced.

----End Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd..OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 22 Replacing the Spectrum Analyzer Board Step 5 Query alarms and performances of the local NE and of the opposite NE and confirm that the original alarms or performances are cleared. 269 .

the new paths must be commissioned. version and model number of the new board are the same as those of the original board. switch the ASON services back to the original paths. If ASON services traverse the board to be replaced. At this point. After board replacement. the board software takes several minutes to be synchronized. the ASON services will be interrupted. Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. otherwise. For more information. the services may be interrupted.. Equipment. the PROG indicator on the board is blinking green quickly. If no other paths are available during board replacement. and Materials ESD bag. refer to "Querying the Current Alarms" of the Supporting Tasks. you need to determine if the board with different versions can be replaced. NOTE If the version is inconsistent. Tools. Replacement of boards that process services causes interruption of traditional services. Ensure the name. For more information regarding the replacement relation between board versions. Ltd. optimize the ASON services traversing the board to other paths (the preset restoration paths of the services are preferred if they do not traverse the board to be replaced) before board replacement. refer to the Hardware Description. You must be an NMS user with "NE and network operator" authority or higher. Step 2 Review and record the current alarms on the NE. For optical-layer ASON services. U2000 Procedure Step 1 Select a spare board.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 23 Replacing the Optical Power and Dispersion Equalizing Board 23 Prerequisite Impact on System Replacing the Optical Power and Dispersion Equalizing Board This section describes how to replace the optical power and dispersion equalizing board. 270 . During board replacement.

Step 4 Query alarms and performances of the local NE and of the opposite NE and confirm that the original alarms or performances are cleared. Click the NE where the replacement board resides. refer to "Replacing a Board" of the Supporting Tasks. see "Valid Slots" in the Hardware Description. l a. For description of the indicators. and the NE Panel is displayed. the services of the active boards in other slots may be interrupted. ensure that there are no fiber jumpers on the optical interfaces on the board. and repeat Steps a to g. see "Valid Slots" in the Hardware Description. NOTE l If the software version of the spare board is V100R004C01 or earlier. Note that the master subrack of the NE where the OptiX OSN 6800 subrack is located cannot be OptiX OSN 8800 T64. If the version is the same as that recorded in Step e. Choose Version from the shortcut menu to query the board software version information. and the process of the replacement board is complete. If any indicator flashes abnormally. Replace the fault board. Install the spare board to any available slot of the OptiX OSN 6800 subrack of version V100R004C02 or later. l d. the NE software delivers the configuration of the original board automatically. refer to "Replacing a Board" of the Supporting Tasks. 271 . l If the OptiX OSN 8800 T64 functions as the master subrack. no operation is required. review the indicators on the board. For more information regarding the valid slots of the board. Right-click the slot where the replacement board resides. l b. Remove the replacement board. clean the fiber connectors using a fiber cleaning tissue. and the board to be replaced is in any slot of the OptiX OSN 8800 T32 or OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack on the NE. Double-click the icon of the optical NE in the Physical View.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 23 Replacing the Optical Power and Dispersion Equalizing Board Step 3 Inform the onsite maintenance engineer and replace the board.. l a. l b. For more information regarding how to replace a board. see "Indicator" in the Hardware Description. Otherwise. For more information regarding the valid slots of the board. Otherwise. NOTE l Before removing a board. Choose Delete from the shortcut menu. you need to take the following actions on the replacement board before replacing any original board on the NE. it indicates that the process of the replacement board is successful. l e. l i. l Before inserting a board. and restore the fiber jumpers of the optical interfaces based on the fiber labels. and record the displayed version information. ----End Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. perform the following operations before replacing the board: l If the board is installed in the OptiX OSN 3800 subrack. For more information. Ltd. reset or replace the replacement board. l g. reset or replace the replacement board. l After the board is replaced. l h. l c. Otherwise. ensure that the fiber jumpers connecting to the optical interfaces on the board are removed. l f. the services of the active boards in other slots may be interrupted. l If the OptiX OSN 8800 T64 does not function as the master subrack. you need to perform the following operations on the replacement board before replacing the original board. If the board is installed in the OptiX OSN 6800 subrack. Choose Add Physical Board from the shortcut menu. Right-click the slot where the board to be replaced or the board with the same type as the board to be replaced resides. Install the spare board in any available slot of the OptiX OSN 6800 subrack of version V100R004C02 or later. no operation is required. l After the board is replaced. Choose Version from the shortcut menu. When the replacement board is in service. Right click the slot where the replacement board resides. For other operations. Right-click the slot where the replacement board resides. see the previous steps b to i.

Ensure the name.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 24 Replacing the DAS1 Board 24 Prerequisite Impact on System Replacing the DAS1 Board This section describes how to replace the DAS1 board. If no other paths are available during board replacement. Equipment. otherwise. 272 . Tools. preset the insertion loss of the new board and re-commission the original paths. Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.. NOTE If the version is inconsistent. If ASON services traverse the board to be replaced. Replacement of boards that process services causes interruption of traditional services. If the OSC board to be replaced is housed on an optical-layer ASON NE. optimize the ASON services traversing the board to other paths (the preset restoration paths of the services are preferred if they do not traverse the board to be replaced) before board replacement. Then. Ltd. For more information regarding the replacement relation between board versions. refer to the Hardware Description. You must be an NMS user with "NE and network operator" authority or higher. the new paths must be commissioned. the services may be interrupted. After board replacement. the PROG indicator on the board is blinking green quickly. Replacement of boards causes interruption of the optical supervisory channel services. During board replacement. U2000 Procedure Step 1 Select a spare board. and Materials ESD bag. TE links on the FIU board connected to the OSC board are interrupted or downgraded. the board software takes several minutes to be synchronized. switch the ASON services back to the original paths. For optical-layer ASON services. you need to determine if the board with different versions can be replaced. version and model number of the new board are the same as those of the original board. At this point. the ASON services will be interrupted.

If any indicator flashes abnormally. and restore the fiber jumpers of the optical interfaces based on the fiber labels. and repeat Steps a to g. Otherwise. l Before inserting a board. ensure that there are no fiber jumpers on the optical interfaces on the board. l After the board is replaced. Ensure that the STAT indicator is steady green. and the process of the replacement board is complete. Right click the slot where the replacement board resides. Choose Version from the shortcut menu. It takes ten minutes for a new board to work normally after insertion. you need to perform the following operations on the replacement board before replacing the original board. l d. clean the fiber connectors using a fiber cleaning tissue. l a. If the board is installed in the OptiX OSN 6800 subrack. l f. refer to "Querying the Current Alarms" of the Supporting Tasks. l a. For other operations. l e. review the indicators on the board. Right-click the slot where the board to be replaced or the board with the same type as the board to be replaced resides. l b. Remove the replacement board. l If the OptiX OSN 8800 T64 does not function as the master subrack.. Install the spare board to any available slot of the OptiX OSN 6800 subrack of version V100R004C02 or later. see the previous steps b to i. Choose Delete from the shortcut menu. For more information regarding how to replace a board. For more information regarding the valid slots of the board. 273 . Replace the fault board. For more information. reset or replace the replacement board. Otherwise. no operation is required. NOTE l If the software version of the spare board is V100R004C01 or earlier. the services of the active boards in other slots may be interrupted. Choose Add Physical Board from the shortcut menu. and the NE Panel is displayed. If the indicator gives abnormal Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 24 Replacing the DAS1 Board Step 2 Review and record the current alarms on the NE. it indicates that the process of the replacement board is successful. Install the spare board in any available slot of the OptiX OSN 6800 subrack of version V100R004C02 or later. Double-click the icon of the optical NE in the Physical View. When the replacement board is in service. Choose Version from the shortcut menu to query the board software version information. l h. refer to "Replacing a Board" of the Supporting Tasks. NOTE l Before removing a board. you need to take the following actions on the replacement board before replacing any original board on the NE. see "Indicator" in the Hardware Description. If the version is the same as that recorded in Step e. l i. Click the NE where the replacement board resides. no operation is required. l c. l After the board is replaced. ensure that the fiber jumpers connecting to the optical interfaces on the board are removed. l b. reset or replace the replacement board. and the board to be replaced is in any slot of the OptiX OSN 8800 T32 or OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack on the NE. For more information. l g. see "Valid Slots" in the Hardware Description. Note that the master subrack of the NE where the OptiX OSN 6800 subrack is located cannot be OptiX OSN 8800 T64. Ltd. For more information regarding the valid slots of the board. the services of the active boards in other slots may be interrupted. refer to "Replacing a Board" of the Supporting Tasks. Otherwise. Step 3 Inform the onsite maintenance engineer and replace the board. perform the following operations before replacing the board: l If the board is installed in the OptiX OSN 3800 subrack. l If the OptiX OSN 8800 T64 functions as the master subrack. Right-click the slot where the replacement board resides. For description of the indicators. Right-click the slot where the replacement board resides. see "Valid Slots" in the Hardware Description. Step 4 Review the indicators of the new board. the NE software delivers the configuration of the original board automatically. and record the displayed version information.

refer to "Indicators" of the Hardware Description. NOTE This step only applies to ASON NEs. Step 5 Query alarms and performances of the local NE and of the opposite NE and confirm that the original alarms or performances are cleared. or replace the board again. For more information regarding indicator definitions. you need to reinsert the board.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 24 Replacing the DAS1 Board indication. 274 . Step 6 Optional: For an optical-layer ASON NE. Ltd. synchronize TE links and verify that the status of the TE links and control links corresponding to the board after replacement is correct in the TE link management window. ----End Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co..

Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 275 . Equipment. J17. the J14. The default value of the three jumpers is 00000. The bits from high to low are 1-3. When 1+1 protection is provided. Replacing the AUX board does not affect services. replacing the AUX board interrupts the communication between the NE and the U2000. J15. The bits from high to low are J16. The TN11AUX02 has eight jumpers. l l The TN11AUX01 has three jumpers. Figure 25-1 shows the jumpers. The setting is realized by jumpers. The default value of the three jumpers is 000. replacing the AUX board does not interrupt the communication between the NE and the U2000. The three jumpers of the TN11AUX01 can be used to realize eight states that represent decimal values 0–7. and J2. Each jumper represents a binary value: 0 or 1. When 1+1 protection is not provided. and J18 jumpers are reserved.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 25 Replacing the AUX Board 25 Prerequisite Impact on System Replacing the AUX Board This section describes how to replace the AUX board. You must be an NMS user with "NE and network operator" authority or higher. U2000 Background Information (OptiX OSN 8800) There is no jumper inside the TN51AUX board. The five jumpers of the TN11AUX02 can be used to realize 32 states that represent decimal values 0–31. and Materials ESD bag. or the communication between the subrack where the AUX board is located and the U2000. Figure 25-2 shows the jumpers. Tools. Ltd.. Background Information (OptiX OSN 6800) The AUX board can be used to set the subrack ID. J4. J3.

That is. Others are slave subracks. Figure 25-1 Position of the jumper on the TN11AUX01 jumpers 1 2 3 CPU Figure 25-2 Position of the jumper on the TN11AUX02 Jumpers J4 J17 J3 J16 J2 J15 J18 J14 CPU Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. it represents the value 0.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 25 Replacing the AUX Board l l When a jumper cap is placed over the right-hand two pins in the figure. the subrack ID is 1. the ID of the master subrack is set to 0. In Figure 25-3 the value represented by the three jumpers is 001.. Ltd. which is 1 in decimal system. When a jumper cap is placed over the right-hand two pins in the figure or the three pins are not placed with any jumper cap. 276 . The master/slave subrack cannot be configured by using the U2000. it represents the value 1. For the master/slave subrack.

277 . Precaution(OptiX OSN 3800) The TN21AUX has threejumpers.. Figure 25-4 shows the jumpers. Figure 25-4 Position of the jumper on the TN21AUX CPU Jumper Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 25 Replacing the AUX Board Figure 25-3 Jumper TN11AUX01 jumper cap representing 0 representing 0 representing 1 1 2 3 TN11AUX02 jumper cap representing 0 representing 0 representing 0 representing 0 representing 1 J16 J15 J4 J3 J2 NOTE The dashed line between two pins in the figure indicates that a jumper cap may or may not be placed over the two pins.

. make sure that jumper settings on the new AUX board are the same as those of the AUX board to be replaced. refer to "Querying the Current Alarms" of the Supporting Tasks. NOTE After the board is replaced. Ltd. ----End Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. For details about how to replace a board. see "Replacing a Board" of the Supporting Tasks. For more information regarding indicator definitions. the NE software delivers the configuration of the original board automatically. version and model number of the new board are the same as those of the original board. If the indicator gives abnormal indication. NOTE Before inserting a new AUX board to the original slot. NOTE If the version is inconsistent. Ensure that the STAT indicator is steady green. you need to determine if the board with different versions can be replaced. 278 . Ensure the name.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 25 Replacing the AUX Board Procedure Step 1 Select a spare board. It takes ten minutes for a new board to work normally after insertion. Step 2 Review and record the current alarms on the NE. or replace the board again. refer to "Indicators" of the Hardware Description. Step 4 Review the indicators of the new board. Step 5 Query alarms and performances of the local NE and of the opposite NE and confirm that the original alarms or performances are cleared. For more information regarding the replacement relation between board versions. Step 3 Inform the on-site maintenance engineer and replace the board. For more information. refer to the Hardware Description. you need to reinsert the board.

the ASON services will be interrupted. the services may be interrupted. optimize the ASON services traversing the DCM to other paths (the preset restoration paths of the services are preferred if they do not traverse the DCM to be replaced) before replacement. otherwise. and Materials Cross screwdriver. 279 . NOTE Each DCM frame can hold up to two DCMs. Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. For optical-layer ASON services.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 26 Replacing the DCM 26 Prerequisite None Replacing the DCM This section describes how to replace the DCM. Equipment. After replacement. switch the ASON services back to the original paths. the new paths must be commissioned. Remove the DCM from the DCM frame. Tools. Each DCM requires four screws. screw Procedure Step 1 Loosen the screws on the DCM frame for fixing the DCM with the cross screwdriver from below. Tighten the screws to fix the DCM. as shown in Figure 26-1.. If ASON services traverse the DCM to be replaced. Step 2 Put a new DCM on the DCM frame. Impact on System Replacement of DCMs causes interruption of traditional services. Ltd. If no other paths are available during replacement.

Ltd.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 26 Replacing the DCM Figure 26-1 Replacing the DCM on the DCM frame 1 2 3 4 1. Screw ----End Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. DCM frame 3.. Mounting ear 4. DCM 2. 280 .

the input optical power might cross the overload point and the receiver optical module is burnt and damaged. Tools.. query whether the port of the optical module to be replaced is configured with protection. 281 . which must be taken with special caution to prevent the optical module from being burnt or damaged. If it is not. Equipment. The overload optical power point of an APD receiver laser is only -9 dBm. If the port of the optical module to be replaced is configured with protection. You must be an NMS user with "NE and network operator" authority or higher. replacement of the optical module causes interruption of traditional services. optical power meter Precautions CAUTION Before you connect a fiber to a pluggable optical module. test the input optical power of the module and confirm that the tested input optical power is within the normal range. Ltd. If electrical-layer ASON services traverse the port of the optical module to be replaced and the port is not configured with protection.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 27 Replacing the Pluggable Optical Module 27 Prerequisite Replacing the Pluggable Optical Module This section describes how to replace the pluggable optical module (eSFP/XFP). Otherwise. Impact on System When you replace an eSFP or XFP. U2000. optimize the electrical-layer ASON services traversing the port to other ports or other boards (the preset restoration paths of the services are preferred if they do not traverse the port of the optical module to be replaced) before module replacement. Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. module replacement does not affect services when the protection switching functions properly. and Materials ESD bag. Then. switch the services back to the original paths after module replacement.

Ltd. WARNING Cover a fiber with a protection cap immediately after you remove it. For more information. see the "Testing Optical Power by Using an Optical Power Meter" in Supporting Tasks. Step 3 Query whether the ports of the optical module to be replaced is configured with protection. NOTE l Before removing an optical module. see 8 Replacing the Optical Transponder Board and 9 Replacing the Tributary and Line Board. – when you replace the optical module of the working channel. Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.. Step 2 Review and record the current alarms on the NE. the receiver optical module is burnt and damaged. For details on these boards. see 8 Replacing the Optical Transponder Board and 9 Replacing the Tributary and Line Board. ensure that the fiber jumpers connecting to the portss of the optical module are removed. go to Step 4. For details. 282 . see Hardware Description. go to Step 4. Prevent the input optical power from crossing the overload point. perform a protection switching. ensure that there are no fiber jumpers on the portss of the optical module. The part number of the new pluggable optical module must be the same as the part number of the original pluggable optical module. otherwise. Step 4 Remove the fiber on the port of the optical module. For the procedure. NOTE For boards supporting TXFP modules. see Figure 27-1. For details.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 27 Replacing the Pluggable Optical Module Procedure Step 1 Select a spare pluggable optical module. Step 6 Replace the fault optical module. Step 5 Test the input optical power. you can use a TXFP module when replacing the XFP module on these boards. If the port of the optical module to be replaced is configured with protection: – when you replace the optical module of the protection channel. For details. l Before inserting an optical module. l l If the port of the optical module to be replaced is not configured with protection. refer to "Querying the Current Alarms" of the Supporting Tasks.

Select By Function. 283 . NOTE If the replaced optical module is a tunable optical module. after the optical module is replaced./Wavelength(nm)/ Frequency(THz) from the drop-down list.Insert the eSFP/SFP+/XFP/TXFP into the port. Inserting eSFP/SFP+/XFP/TXFP 1. Click Query to view Band Type/Wavelength No. 3./Wavelength(nm)/Frequency(THz) of each optical port. 1. 3. Step 8 Insert the fiber removed in Step 4. Step 9 Query alarms and performances of the local NE and of the opposite NE and confirm that the original alarms or performances are cleared.Cover the optical port with cover. Make sure the wavelength is the same as that of the original optical module. 2. In the NE Explorer. select the desired board and choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the Function Tree..Pull the safty latch to pull out eSFP/SFP+/XFP/TXFP from the port. Ltd.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 27 Replacing the Pluggable Optical Module Figure 27-1 Inserting and removing the eSFP/SFP/XFP/TXFP port 2 1 latch eSFP/SFP+ XFP/TXFP Removing eSFP/SFP+/XFP/TXFP 1. and then select Band Type/Wavelength No. ----End Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.Pull out fibre connectors first before removing eSFP/SFP+/XFP/TXFP . the SCC delivers the wavelength configuration of the original optical module automatically. Step 7 Check the wavelength of the new optical module on the U2000. 2.

Philips screwdriver Procedure Step 1 Select a new board. Equipment and Materials ESD bag. The existing services. however. Ltd. Step 3 Replace the EFI frame on site.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 28 Replacing the EFI Frame 28 Impact on System Replacing the EFI Frame This section describes how to replace the EFI frame in the OptiX OSN 6800. are not affected. refer to "Querying the Current Alarms" of the Supporting Tasks. the alarms generated during the replacement fail to be output by using the external equipment. The model number of the new board must be the same as that of the original board. Step 2 Review and record the current alarms on the NE. If the ALMO or ALMI interface is in use. For more information. the corresponding alarm indicator on the cabinet does not light up in case of an alarm during the replacement. see Figure 28-1. 284 . If the LAMP1 or LAMP2 interface is in use. Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Tools. For details.. the communication between the ETH3 interface and the slave subrack or the CRPC/ROP board connected to the interface is interrupted during replacement of the EFI frame in the OptiX OSN 6800. If the ETH3 interface is in use.

Connect the removed cables back to the corresponding interfaces according to the recorded matching relationship. 3. and use screws to fasten the plastic panel. 6. and then put it into an ESD bag. Insert the new EFI frame gently. 2. and then remove the cables. Unfasten the screws on the EFI frame to remove it gently.. Place the removed plastic panel back to the subrack. Record the matching relationship between each interface on the EFI frame and the cable connected to the interface. ----End Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 28 Replacing the EFI Frame Figure 28-1 Replacing the EFI frame 1. 285 . Unfasten the screws on the plastic panel of the subrack to remove the panel. Step 4 Query alarms and performances of the local NE and of the opposite NE and confirm that the original alarms or performances are cleared. and fasten the screws on it. 5. 4.

For OptiX OSN 8800 T16: The TN16EFI board is connected to the master subrack through the ETH1. and ID5-ID8 corresponding to bits 1-4 of SW1. The ID of each subrack is set by using two DIP switches on the TN51EFI1 board. and Materials ESD bag. The value represented by the ID5-ID1 is 00001. l The value that can be set by using each of the two DIP switches on the TN51EFI1/TN16EFI board is a binary value 0 or 1. Figure 29-2shows the position of the DIP switches on the TN16EFI board. the subrack ID is 1. services may be interrupted.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 29 Replacing the EFI Board 29 Prerequisite Impact on System Replacing the EFI Board This section describes how to replace the EFI board in the OptiX OSN 8800. communication among subracks. the value of the corresponding bit is set to 0. ID1-ID4 correspond to bits 1-4 of SW2. only ID1-ID5 are valid. "0" indicates the master subrack. The value is 00000 by default. When the DIP switch is toggle to ON. U2000 Background Information Subrack ID can be set by DIP switch on EFI board. or ETH3 interface. Among these ID values. ETH2. You must be an NMS user with "NE and network operator" authority or higher. Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. ID6 -ID8 are reserved. That is. or ETH3 interface. 286 . The bits from high to low are ID5-ID1. and communication between NE and U2000. l For OptiX OSN 8800 T64 and OptiX OSN 8800 T32: The TN51EFI2 board is connected to the master subrack through the ETH1. The other values indicate slave subracks Figure 29-1 shows the position of the DIP switches on the TN51EFI1 board. Ltd.. by which a maximum of 32 states can be set. which is 1 in decimal system. The ID of each subrack is set by using two DIP switches on the TN16EFI board. In addition. ETH2. Replacement of the EFI interrupts alarm signal input and output. Tools. Equipment.

. Ltd. ID5-ID8 of the SW1 must be toggle to ON. Figure 29-1 Position of the DIP switches on the TN51EFI1 board EFI1 CPLD (ID5) (ID6) (ID7) (ID8) ON ON ON ON (ID1) (ID2) (ID3) (ID4) ON ON ON ON SW1 SW2 Figure 29-2 Position of the DIP switches on the TN16EFI board U8 SERIAL T1 SW1 Figure 29-3 The ID of the subrack: 1-15 SW2 (ID1) (ID2) (ID3) (ID4) ON ON ON ON Subrack ID SW2 (ID1) (ID2) (ID3) (ID4) ON ON ON ON Subrack ID SW2 (ID1) (ID2) (ID3) (ID4) ON ON ON ON SW2 NM_ETH2 Subrack ID SW2 (ID1) (ID2) (ID3) (ID4) ON ON ON ON Subrack ID SW2 (ID1) (ID2) (ID3) (ID4) ON ON ON ON Subrack ID 1 2 3 4 5 (ID1) (ID2) (ID3) (ID4) ON ON ON ON 6 (ID1) (ID2) (ID3) (ID4) ON ON ON ON 7 (ID1) (ID2) (ID3) (ID4) ON ON ON ON 8 (ID1) (ID2) (ID3) (ID4) ON ON ON ON 9 (ID1) (ID2) (ID3) (ID4) ON ON ON ON 10 (ID1) (ID2) (ID3) (ID4) ON ON ON ON 11 (ID1) (ID2) (ID3) (ID4) ON ON ON ON 12 (ID1) (ID2) (ID3) (ID4) ON ON ON ON 13 (ID1) (ID2) (ID3) (ID4) ON ON ON ON 14 (ID1) (ID2) (ID3) (ID4) ON ON ON ON 15 NOTE When the ID of the subrack is from 1 to 15. Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. see "Master-Slave Subrack" in the Product Description.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement NOTE 29 Replacing the EFI Board For details about the principle for configuring the master and slave subracks. 287 .

the subrack ID is displayed on the AUX board.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 29 Replacing the EFI Board Figure 29-4 The ID of the subrack: 16-31 SW1 (ID5) (ID6) (ID7) (ID8) ON ON ON ON SW2 (ID1) (ID2) (ID3) (ID4) ON ON ON ON Subrack ID SW1 (ID5) (ID6) (ID7) (ID8) ON ON ON ON SW2 (ID1) (ID2) (ID3) (ID4) ON ON ON ON Subrack ID SW1 (ID5) (ID6) (ID7) (ID8) ON ON ON ON SW2 (ID1) (ID2) (ID3) (ID4) ON ON ON ON Subrack ID 16 17 18 (ID5) (ID6) (ID7) (ID8) ON ON ON ON (ID1) (ID2) (ID3) (ID4) ON ON ON ON 19 (ID5) (ID6) (ID7) (ID8) ON ON ON ON (ID1) (ID2) (ID3) (ID4) ON ON ON ON 20 (ID5) (ID6) (ID7) (ID8) ON ON ON ON (ID1) (ID2) (ID3) (ID4) ON ON ON ON 21 (ID5) (ID6) (ID7) (ID8) (ID5) (ID6) (ID7) (ID8) (ID5) (ID6) (ID7) (ID8) (ID5) (ID6) (ID7) (ID8) ON ON ON ON (ID1) (ID2) (ID3) (ID4) (ID1) (ID2) (ID3) (ID4) (ID1) (ID2) (ID3) (ID4) (ID1) (ID2) (ID3) (ID4) ON ON ON ON 22 25 28 31 (ID5) (ID6) (ID7) (ID8) (ID5) (ID6) (ID7) (ID8) (ID5) (ID6) (ID7) (ID8) ON ON ON ON (ID1) (ID2) (ID3) (ID4) (ID1) (ID2) (ID3) (ID4) (ID1) (ID2) (ID3) (ID4) ON ON ON ON 23 26 29 (ID5) (ID6) (ID7) (ID8) (ID5) (ID6) (ID7) (ID8) (ID5) (ID6) (ID7) (ID8) ON ON ON ON (ID1) (ID2) (ID3) (ID4) (ID1) (ID2) (ID3) (ID4) (ID1) (ID2) (ID3) (ID4) ON ON ON ON 24 27 30 ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON Procedure Step 1 Select a spare board. NOTE Before inserting a new EFI board to the original slot. 5.. For OptiX OSN 8800 T64 and OptiX OSN 8800 T32. 2. Gently pull out the board and put it into the ESD bag. NOTE If the version is inconsistent. Remove the cables and wires on the connectors. For OptiX OSN 8800 T16. 6. version and model number of the new board are the same as those of the original board. 3. 1. 288 Issue 02 (2011-10-31) . Record the mapping relationships of the board interfaces and the cables and wires. 4. For more information regarding the replacement relation between board versions. TN16EFI board: Loosen two screws at the top corner of the board. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. refer to the Hardware Description. the subrack ID is displayed on the SCC board. TN51EFI board: Loosen the screw at the top right corner of the board. ensure that DIP switch on the new EFI board is the same as that of the EFI board to be replaced. you need to determine if the board with different versions can be replaced. View the subrack ID displayed in the LCD screen on the front panel of the board to ensure that the subrack ID is correct. Ltd. refer to "Querying the Current Alarms" of the Supporting Tasks. For more information. Step 2 Review and record the current alarms on the NE. Step 3 Follow the steps below to replace the EFI on site. Insert the new board gently. Ensure the name.

8. 289 . Step 4 Verify that there are no faults on the board. TN16EFI board: Tighten two captive screws at the top corner of the board.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 29 Replacing the EFI Board 7. ----End Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Connect the cables and wires on the connectors as recorded. Ltd.. Query the U2000 for alarms on the NE and ensure that the alarm detected in Step 2 is cleared. TN51EFI board: Tighten the captive screw at the top right corner of the board.

Step 2 Review and record the current alarms on the NE. Ensure the name. 290 . U2000.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 30 Replacing the PIU Board 30 Prerequisite Impact on System Tools. Do shut down the corresponding switch.. For more information. there are 6 power output switches on each of the right and left sides of the DC power distribution unit. and Materials Replacing the PIU Board This section describes how to replace the PIU board. ESD bag. replacing the standby PIU brings no impact on services. Step 3 Switch off the corresponding power output switch on the DC power distribution unit on the top of the cabinet. Cross screwdriver Procedure (OptiX OSN 6800/3800) Step 1 Select a spare board. version and model number of the new board are the same as those of the original board. refer to "Querying the Current Alarms" of the Supporting Tasks. NOTE If the version is inconsistent. You must be an NMS user with "NE and network operator" authority or higher. you need to determine if the board with different versions can be replaced. Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. When 1+1 backup is provided. refer to the Hardware Description. Ltd. Equipment. For more information regarding the replacement relation between board versions. CAUTION l For OptiX OSN 6800.

version and model number of the new board are the same as those of the original board. 291 . put the power plug back to the new PIU board. Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd. Ensure the name.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 30 Replacing the PIU Board Figure 30-1 Mapping relationship table of the PIU boards and power supply switches in the OptiX OSN 6800 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 SW5 (A) SW5 (B) SW4(A) SW4 (B) SW3(A) SW3 (B) SW2(A) SW2 (B) Step 4 Remove the power plug on the PIU board to be replaced. For details about how to replace a board. ----End Procedure (OptiX OSN 8800) Step 1 Select a spare board. see "Replacing a Board" of the Supporting Tasks Step 6 After the replacement. Step 7 Query alarms and performances of the local NE and of the opposite NE and confirm that the original alarms or performances are cleared.. Step 5 Inform the onsite maintenance engineer and replace the board. Switch on the corresponding power switch on the DC power distribution unit.

For more information regarding the replacement relation between board versions.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement NOTE 30 Replacing the PIU Board If the version is inconsistent.. CAUTION l For OptiX OSN 8800. For more information. refer to "Querying the Current Alarms" of the Supporting Tasks. refer to the Hardware Description. 292 . Do shut down the corresponding switch. you need to determine if the board with different versions can be replaced. Step 2 Review and record the current alarms on the NE. Ltd. Figure 30-2 Mapping relationship table of the PIU boards and power supply switches in the OptiX OSN 8800 SW1(A) SW2(A) SW2(B) SW1(B) 8800 T32 8800 I Subrack A SW3(A) SW4(A) SW4(B) SW3(B) Subrack B 8800 T32 8800 I Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Step 3 Switch off the corresponding power output switch on the DC power distribution unit on the top of the cabinet. there are 4 power output switches on each of the right and left sides of the DC power distribution unit.

. Ltd.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 30 Replacing the PIU Board SW1(A) SW2(A) 8800 T64 SW2(B) SW1(B) Subrack A SW3(A) SW4(A) SW4(B) SW3(B) Subrack B 8800 T32 Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 293 .

Step 6 Follow the steps below to replace the PIU: Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.. Step 5 Unfasten the nuts on the power input terminals by using the cross screwdrivers and remove the power cables. Ltd.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 30 Replacing the PIU Board SW4(A) SW4(B) 8800 T16 SW3(A) SW3(B) 8800 T16 SW2(A) SW2(B) 8800 T16 SW1(A) SW1(B) 8800 T16 Step 4 Remove the plastic cover on the power input terminal block on the PIU board by using the cross screwdrivers. 294 .

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 30 Replacing the PIU Board 1. Insert the new PIU gently. and put it into the ESD bag. Step 7 After the replacement. Tighten the screw at the top right corner of the unit.. 3. Switch on the corresponding power switch on the DC power distribution unit. Loosen the screw at the top right corner of the unit. 2. ----End Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd. 4. Remove the unit gently. 295 . put the power cables back to the new PIU board. Step 8 Query alarms and performances of the local NE and of the opposite NE and confirm that the original alarms or performances are cleared.

None Impact on System None Tools. Ltd..OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 31 Replacing the Power Switch on the DC Power Distribution Box 31 Prerequisite Replacing the Power Switch on the DC Power Distribution Box This section describes how to replace a faulty power switch on the DC power distribution box. The -48V/-60 DC power supply is distributed to the working subracks through the power box shown in Figure 31-3. l Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. screw Background Information l OptiX OSN 8800 uses the standard -48V/-60V DC power supply. The -48V/-60 DC power supply is distributed to the working subracks through the power box shown in Figure 31-1 and Figure 31-2 . OptiX OSN 6800 uses the standard -48V/-60V DC power supply. Equipment and Materials Cross screwdriver. 296 .

Grounding cable 4. Output cable terminal 3. Input cable terminal 2.. Ltd. 297 . Power switch Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 31 Replacing the Power Switch on the DC Power Distribution Box Figure 31-1 Front panel of the DC power distribution box in the OptiX OSN 8800 T64&8800 T32 Power supply output area Power supply switch area Power supply input area Power supply switch area Power supply output area A B Figure 31-2 Front panel of the DC power distribution box in the OptiX OSN 8800 T16 Power supply output area Power supply switch area Power supply input area Power supply switch area Power supply output area + 1 + 2 + 3 + 4 + 1 + 2 + 3 + 4 Figure 31-3 Front panel of the DC power distribution box in OptiX OSN 6800 1 2 3 3 2 1 4 4 1.

See Figure 31-5.. There are 4 power switches in each side. Figure 31-5 Loosen the two screws between the faulty power switch and the plastic protective shell Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. The power distribution box can be seen in Figure 31-1. 298 . Figure 31-4 Loosen the captive screw Step 3 Loosen the two screws between the faulty power switch and the plastic protective shell to separate the power switch from the protective shell. Step 2 Loosen the captive screw on the front panel of the faulty power switch with the cross screwdriver as shown in Figure 31-4. Ltd. Remove the faulty power switch from the DC power distribution box.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 31 Replacing the Power Switch on the DC Power Distribution Box Procedure Step 1 Set the faulty switch on the DC power distribution box to the OFF position.

Step 6 Insert the new power switch into the DC power distribution box. reconnect the cables. check if the connection of the input power cables is correct: – if the connection is wrong. it indicates the new power distribution unit works normally. – if the connection is correct. Step 7 Set the new power switch to the state of ON. l If the RUN indicator is off.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 31 Replacing the Power Switch on the DC Power Distribution Box Step 4 Get a new power switch. and ensure the state is OFF. ----End Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. replace the power switch again. Tighten the captive screw on the front panel of the new power switch with the cross screwdriver. Step 5 Install the new power switch and the plastic protective shell. l If the RUN indicator is on.. Ltd. 299 . Check RUN indicator of the PIU board which connects to the power distribution box through the new power switch.

and Materials ESD bag. After the 20 minutes. Step 2 Review and record the current alarms on the NE.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 32 Replacing the Fan Tray Assembly 32 Prerequisite Impact on System Replacing the Fan Tray Assembly This section describes how to replace the fan tray assembly. Step 3 Follow the steps below to replace the fan try assembly on site. the fans rotate at a low or medium speed for the first 20 minutes. 3. refer to "Querying the Current Alarms" of the Supporting Tasks. you need to determine if the board with different versions can be replaced. put the fan tray assembly replaced into an ESD bag. You must be an NMS user with "NE and network operator" authority or higher. Equipment. Tools. version and model number of the new board are the same as those of the original board. 300 . For more information. U2000 Procedure Step 1 Select a spare board. Remove the faulty fan tray assembly. Ltd. Ensure the name.. The equipment can work normally for three minutes when no fans are provided. Insert a spare fan tray assembly immediately. 1. refer to the Hardware Description. Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. replace it immediately to avoid any damage to the equipment due to power heat dissipation. NOTE When the subrack is powered on for the first time. the fans rotate at the specified speed. NOTE If the version is inconsistent. 2. When there is a fault in the fan tray assembly. Replacing the fan tray assembly does not interrupt the service. For more information regarding the replacement relation between board versions.

Ltd. 301 .. ----End Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 32 Replacing the Fan Tray Assembly Step 4 Query alarms and performances of the local NE and of the opposite NE and confirm that the original alarms or performances are cleared.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. and Materials None Precaution CAUTION When drawing out the air filter during its replacement. Procedure (OptiX OSN 8800/6800) Step 1 Hold the grooves on the two sides of the air filter panel with two fingers and draw out the air filter.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 33 Replacing the Air Filter 33 Prerequisite None Replacing the Air Filter Replace the air filter periodically to ensure efficient heat dissipation from the equipment.. Equipment. Figure 33-1 and Figure 33-2 shows the position of the air filter. Ltd. NOTE It is recommended to replace the air filter every six months. Draw out the air filter gently to prevent dust disturbance. Impact on System None Tools. do not draw out the fans. 302 .

303 . Ltd. Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Figure 33-3 shows the position of the air filter.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 33 Replacing the Air Filter Figure 33-1 Drawing out the air filter (OptiX OSN 8800) Figure 33-2 Drawing out the air filter (OptiX OSN 6800) Step 2 Gently slide the new air filter into the original position along the guide rails below the fan tray assembly. ----End Procedure (OptiX OSN 3800) Step 1 Draw out the air filter by the handle..

304 . Ltd.. ----End Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 33 Replacing the Air Filter Figure 33-3 Drawing out the air filter(OptiX OSN 3800) Fan Air filter Step 2 Gently slide the new air filter into the original position along the guide rails on the left part of the fan tray assembly.

Otherwise. NOTE A fan module must be replaced in time after it is damaged. Impact on System l Replacing a fan module has no impact on the existing services.. the digital video O/E conversion chassis is powered off during the replacement and thus the existing services are interrupted. NOTE This SFP module is dedicated for the SDI. This prevents the SDI from being damaged due to excessively high working temperature. flathead screwdriver Background Information The SDI consists of an O/E conversion chassis and the SFP module on the TOM board. Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Tools. l Replacing an SFP module interrupts the existing services. The SFP module on the TOM board is specific for connecting to the SDI. l Replacing a power supply module has no impact on the existing services if there are active and standby power supply modules.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 34 Replacing SDI Components 34 Prerequisite None Replacing SDI Components This section describes how to replace a component (such as fan module. Ltd. NOTE l The preceding components in the digital video O/E conversion chassis are hot-swappable. and control board) on the digital video O/E conversion chassis and how to replace the SDIspecific SFP module on the TOM board. 305 . Equipment and Materials ESD bag. power supply module. Replacing a control board has no impact on the existing services if there are active and standby control boards.

1 Control Card Power Supply Module Fan Module 2 Step 3 Insert a new module into the slot that houses the original module.. remove the module from the SDI O/E conversion chassis and put it into an ESD bag.OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Parts Replacement 34 Replacing SDI Components Procedure Replace a fan module. or control board according to the following steps. power supply module. 306 . Ltd. use the flathead screwdriver to tighten the fastening screws on the front panel. Then. For the steps of replacing an SFP module. see 27 Replacing the Pluggable Optical Module. The name and model number of the new board must be the same as those of the original board. ----End Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Step 2 Use a flathead screwdriver to unfasten the fastening screws on the front panel of the module to be replaced. Step 4 After the new module is positioned properly in the slot. Step 1 Select a spare board.